The Book of Extended Abstracts

Transcription

The 3rd International CUA Graduate
Students Symposium
‫سَهيي سوپَزیَم بييالوللی داًشجَیاى تحصيالت‬
‫تکويلی داًشگاُّای عضَ اتحادیۀ قفقاز‬
University of Mohaghegh Ardabili
‫دانشگاه محقق اردبیلی‬
June 5-6, 2016
‫ خردادماه‬71-71
The Book of Extended Abstracts
The Youth View
The 3rd International Caucasus Universities Association
Graduate Students Symposium
05-06 June 2016, Ardabil, Iran
Organized by:
The Caucasus Universities Association
Sponsored by:
Ardabil University of Medical Sciences
Islamic Azad University, Ardabil Branch
University of Applied Science and Technology
1
‫‪The 3rd International CUA Graduate‬‬
‫‪Students Symposium‬‬
‫‪University of Mohaghegh Ardabili‬‬
‫‪June 5-6, 2016‬‬
‫‪ 71-71‬خردادماه‬
‫‪2‬‬
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The Youth View
The 3rd International Caucasus Universities Association
Graduate Students Symposium
Caucasus and Beyond, with Its Language, Literature, Arts, Economy,
Sociology, Science, History and Culture
The symposium aims to increase the cultural interaction between postgraduate
students in CUA member universities, exchange ideas related to literature in the
region, and promote students for future planning together. It is held in Ardabil in
remembrance of Shah Ismail Khataei by the University of Mohaghegh Ardabil and
Caucasus University Association with the contribution of Abroad Turkish Citizens
and Relative Communities, Ardabil University of Medical Sciences, Islamic Azad
University, Ardabil Branch, and the Ardabil University of Applied Sciences and
Technology.
3
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Organizing Committee:
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Goudarz Sadeghi Hashjin (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Ahmad Yousefian Darani (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Reza Abdi (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)
Prof. Dr. Ghadir Golkarian (Near East University)
Prof. Dr. Gürkan DOĞAN (Ardahan University)
Prof. Dr. Orhan SÖYLEMEZ (Ardahan University)
Prof. Dr. Roin KAVRELİŞVİLİ (Ardahan University)
Scientific Committee:
Prof. Dr. Yousef Abbaspour (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)
Prof. Dr. Erdoğan ALTINKAYNAK (Ardahan University)
Prof. Dr. Ercan ALKAYA (Fırat University)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Ahmet ALİ ASLAN (Ardahan University)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Mustafa ASLAN (Yıldırım Beyazıt University)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Erdal AYDOĞMUŞ (Ardahan University)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Tamilla ALİYEVA (Ardahan University)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Vedi AŞKAROĞLU (Ardahan University)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Samet AZAP (Ardahan University)
Prof. Dr. Ayabek BAYNİYAZOV (Ardahan University)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Âdem BALKAYA (Kafkas University)
Prof. Dr. Hakkı BÜYÜKBAŞ (Ardahan University)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Nergis BİRAY (Pamukkale University)
Prof. Dr. Alpaslan CEYLAN (Ardahan University)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Talip DOĞAN (Yıldırım Beyazıt University)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Mitat DURMUŞ (Kars Kafkas University)
Prof. Dr. Gürkan DOĞAN (Ardahan University)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Şakir EŞİTTİ (Ardahan University)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Ufuk ERDEM (Ardahan University)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Fatih EGE (Ardahan University)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Nasrin EGHBALİ (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Abdullah ELCAN (Ardahan University)
Prof. Dr. Ülkü ELİUZ (Karadeniz Technical University)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Mehmet EROL (Kilis 7 Aralık University)
Prof. Dr. Ahmet Evren ERGİNAL (Ardahan University)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Abdullah Eren (Ordu University)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Ranetta GAFFAROVA (Ardahan University)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Hanzade GÜZELOVA (Ardahan University)
Prof. Dr. Ghadir GOLKARIAN (Near East University)
4
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Türkan GÖZÜTOK (Karabük University)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Ahmet İÇLİ (Ardahan University)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Meheddin İSPİR (Kafkas University)
Prof. Dr. Ahmet KARTAL (Eskişehir Osmangazi University)
Prof. Dr. Roin KAVRELİŞVİLİ (Ardahan University)
Prof. Dr. Alaaddin KARACA (Muğla Sıtkı Koçman University)
Prof. Dr. Ceval KAYA (Ardahan University)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Ferhat KARABULUT (Celal Bayar University)
Prof. Dr. Zekeriya KARADAVUT (Akdeniz University)
Prof. Dr. Emel KEFELİ (İstanbul 29 Mayıs University)
Prof. Dr. Filiz KILIÇ (Nevşehir Hacı Bektaş Veli University)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Mehmet KILDIROĞLU (Ardahan University)
Prof. Dr. Ramazan KORKMAZ (Ardahan University)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Levent KÜÇÜK (Ardahan University)
Prof. Dr. Muhsin MACİT (Anadolu University)
Dr. Seiffollah MODABBER (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Nurgül MOLDALIEVA (Ardahan University)
Dr. Faroug NASİRİ (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)
Prof. Dr. Mohammad NARİMANİ (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Mayrambek OROZOBAYEV (Ardahan University)
Prof. Dr. M. Hanefi PALABIYIK (Atatürk University)
Prof. Dr. Hossein SHAYEGİ (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)
Prof. Dr. Ma’refat SİYAHKOUHİAN (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Makbule SARIKAYA (Ardahan University)
Prof. Dr. Orhan SÖYLEMEZ (Ardahan University)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Chinara SASYKULOVA (Ardahan University)
Prof. Dr. İbrahim ŞAHİN (Eskişehir Osmangazi University)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Fatih ŞAYHAN (Ardahan University)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Bahattin ŞİMŞEK (Ardahan University)
Assist. Prof. Dr. Oğuz ŞİMŞEK (Ardahan University)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Muammer Mete TAŞLIOVA (Yıldırım Beyazıt University
Assist. Prof. Dr. Mehmet TERZİ (Artvin Çoruh University)
Prof. Dr. Vahit TÜRK (İstanbul Kültür University)
Prof. Dr. Enver TÖRE (Artvin Çoruh University)
5
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Secretariat:
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Reza Abdı (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)
Fatma AKTEMUR (Ardahan University)
Roya Rassizadeh (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)
Amin Anvarzadeh (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)
Ali Afzal Ghaffarı (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)
Gülşah BEYOĞLU (Ardahan University)
Academic Candan TÜMER (Ardahan University)
Ress. Asst. Emine GÜVEN (Ardahan University)
Ress. Asst. Fatih KURTULMUŞ (Ardahan University)
Academic Eser KARADENİZ (Ardahan University)
Hilal KILIÇLIOĞLU (Ardahan University)
Ress. Asst. Ferhat UZUNKAYA (Ardahan University)
Sponsors:
Ardabil University of Medical Sciences
Islamic Azad University, Ardabil Branch
University of Applied Sciences and Technology
Presidency for Turks Abroad and relative Communities
6
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Invited Speakers:
Dr. Hasan Ameli, Department of Theology, Islamic Azad University; The Leadership
Delegate in the Province; and Friday Prayer Leader of Ardabil
Dr. Majid Khodabakhsh, Ardabil Provincial Governer
Prof. Dr. Ramazan Korkmaz, Head of Caucasus Univerisities Association; Rector of
Ardahan University
Associate Prof. Dr. Goudarz Sadeghi Hashjin, Chansellor of University of Mohaghegh
Ardabili
Mustafa Isen, Member of Turkish Parliment
Prof. Dr. Yurdal Jihangir, Girne University
Assistant Prof. Dr. Sajjad Hosseini, Mohaghegh Ardabili University
7
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Message of the Chancellor of the University of Mohaghegh Ardabili
As academicians, we are already blessed with the creative and transcending views
of the youth in the universities and this event provides a yet more pluralistic view of
the youth in that it is attended by several young researchers form a variety of
contexts. In the meantime, the focus, on Caucasus and its history, is a regional one
which interests and affects all of us. Being charming from a dual and even multiple
perspectives, we value the event as an exceptional opportunity to listen, discuss,
share and interact.
On behalf of our academic community, I welcome all our revered visitors from
different parts of the Caucasus region and respect the concern the CUA initial
leaders had felt to establish the association and the mission they are following to
promote regional solutions to the regional challenges with the help of
predominantly young views.
Our history, culture and the young’s examination of them, paves the way for a better
understanding of the current confusing situation in the world and the region and is
hoped to promote still more convergence among the apparently different nations.
I wish all the participants a sweet stay in Ardabil and I hope all papers presented
add to the overall theme of the symposium. I do appreciate all those who helped
make this event a possibility.
Goudarz Sadeghi Hashjin
8
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Message of the Head of Caucasus Universities Association
Kırgızistan’ın başkenti Bişkek’te 20 Mayıs 2016’da yapılan VI. Olağan Kongresi’nde
katılım protokülü imzalayan üniversiteler ile birlikte üye sayısı 13 ülkeden 120’e ulaşan
Kafkasya Üniversiteler Birliği (KÜNİB) yeni bir bilimsel toplantıyı tertiplemenin
mutluluğunu yaşamakta. İlkini Nahçıvan’da, ikincisini Tebriz’de gerçekleştirdiğimiz
“Kafkasya’ya Genç Bakışlar” başlıklı sempozyumumuz bu sene tarihî bir karakter olan Şah
İsmail Safavî adına, 5-6 Haziran 2016’da onun doğum yeri olan Erdebil’de gerçekleşecek.
Tam ismi ile Ebu’l-Muzaffer bin Haydar bin Cüneyd es-Safevi olan ve Hatayi
mahlasıyla şiirler yazan Şah İsmail, günümüz İran İslam Cumhuriyeti’nin önemli kültür
merkezlerinden olan Erdebil’de doğdu. (17 Temmuz 1487) Safevî tarikatının şeyh ailesinin
çocuğu olan İsmail, Safevî Hükümdarı olduktan sonra Kafkasya, İran ve Anadolu’nun
içlerine kadar geniş bir coğrafyada etkili bir siyaset ve kültür adamı olarak tanındı.
Otuz yedi (37) yıllık kısa ömründe önemli siyasî başarılar elde etti. Hatayi mahlası ile
aruz ve hece ile şiirler yazdı. Çocukluğunda ve gençliğinde yaşamış olduğu zorluklar şiirine
de aksetti. Azerbaycan edebiyatının tanınmış şairlerinden Nesimi’den Fuzuli’ye kadar olan
dönemde şiirleri önemli kitleler tarafından takip edilir oldu. Özelikle hece ölçüsü ile yazdığı
şiirler Anadolu’da gelişen halk ve tekke edebiyatını etkiledi.
Şah Hatayi'm eydür Bağdad'dır vatan
İkilikten geçip birliğe yeten
Erenler yanında kıyl ü kal tutan
Yolu dikenlidir hardan sayılır
dizelerinin sahibi Şah İsmail’in aziz hatırasına tertip edilen “Uluslararası Kafkasya’ya Genç
Bakışlar III” başlıklı sempozyumda İran, Türkiye, Gürcistan, Azerbaycan, Ukrayna, Moldova
(Gagauzeli), Beyaz Rusya, Kazakistan ve Kırgızistan’dan ellinin üzerinde bildiri
sunulacaktır. Bu bildiriler, Kafkasya coğrafyasını tarihî, kültürel, dinî, ekonomik, sosyolojik,
arkeolojik gibi pek çok bilim dalında inceleyen araştırma sonuçlarıdır. Genç bir sanatkâr ve
devlet adamının adına yapılan bu toplantıda, onun yaşadığı ve hayatını vakfettiği
coğrafyaya “genç bakışların” çok daha anlam yükleyeceğine inancım sonsuzdur. Sunulacak
olan bu bildiriler en kısa zamanda kitap halinde basılacaktır.
Bütün katılımcılara, ev sahipliğini yapan Erdebil Üniversitesi yönetimine, emeği
geçenlere ve elbette faaliyeti maddî olarak destekleyen T.C. Başbakanlık Yurtdışı Türkler ve
Akraba Topluluklar Başkanlığı’na şahsım ve Başkanlığını yürüttüğüm Kafkasya
Üniversiteler Birliği adına şükranlarımı sunuyorum.
Saygılarımla,
Prof. Dr. Ramazan Korkmaz
KÜNİB Başkanı ve Ardahan Üniversitesi Kurucu Rektörü
9
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Table of Contents
Title
Page
Symposium Scehdule
15
Oral and Poster Presentations Extended Abstracts
Acute Effect of Glutamine Supplementation on Serum Levels of LDH
after Eccentric Resistance Exercise in Untrained Young Men
Akram ebadi,
sheykhlouvand
Marefat
siahkohian,
Babak
nakhostin
rohi
and
Mohsen
Acute Effect of Glutamine Supplementation on Serum Levels of CPK
Akram ebadi,
sheykhlouvand
Marefat
siahkohian,
Babak
nakhostin
rohi
and
21
25
Mohsen
Project-Based According to Functional Knee Braces by Plastic Design
Amin Ghannadiasl, Kazem Shakeri and Nasim Nakhlband saei
29
The Effect of Opening Position in the Rectangular Concrete Beams on
the Size and Weight of Steel Consumption
37
Numerical Integration Using Daubechies’ Wavelets by Linear Least
square method
45
Amin Ghannadi Asl, Arezoo Gharibi Asl and Soheil Soleymanzade moghaddam
Amin Anvarzadeh and Mina Salimi
11
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The Optimization of Consumption steel T-Shaped Concrete Beams by
Genetic Algorithms
53
Amin Ghannadi asl, Arezoo Gharibi asl and Soheil Soleymanzade moghaddam
Wahhabism in Republic of Azerbaijan
57
Power Flow Solution in a Larg Scale Power System Including IPFC
63
A Study of Domestication and Foreignization Strategies in the Persian
Translation of "IL GROTTESCO QUOTIDIANO"
Laleh Mousavi and Tohid Siami
70
Comparison of PID Type Controller Performance in Microgrid
Frequency Deviation Enhancement Using MFO Algorithm
78
Morteza Ebrahimi, Parisa Baghghal Asgari and Naser Rahmani
Elham Mokaramian, Hossein Shayeghi and Abdolah Younesi
Maryam Houshyari, Hossein Shayeghi and Abdollah Younesi
Analysis of the Relationship Between Social Capital and Job
Satisfaction in Organizations
87
Masoud Darabi and Nasrin Azizian Kohan
Entanglement of Non-inertial Fermions is not Invariably Suitable for
Superdense coding
92
Mehrnoosh Farahmand, Hosein Mohammadzadeh, Hossein Mehri-Dehnavi and
Robabeh Rahimi
Thermodynamic Entropy Due to Lorentz Violation
Mehrnoosh Farahmand and Hosein Mohammadzadeh
New Approach for Solution of Volterra-Fredholm Integral Equations
11
99
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Mina Salimi and Amin Anvarzadeh
106
Haar Wavelet Method For Solving One-dimensional Burger’s equation
111
The impact of Russian and Chechen conflicts on the Caucasus crisis
116
M.Zarebnia and R.Parvaz
Morteza Ebrahimi, Sed Ali Mortazavi Emami Zavare, Fahime Oleiki and Mehdy
Jahantab
The America's Role in the Georgia Crisis
123
Morteza Ebrahimi, Somayeh Abbasi and Hamzeh Ganji
Qarabag, Reasons of the Formation and Prolongation of the Crisis
129
Morteza Ebrahimi, Naser Rahmani and Parisa Asgari
Determine and Evaluate the Aerobic and Anaerobic Threshold Heart
Rate of Maximum Heart Rate Threshold in Sedentary Female
135
Negar Asghari Moghaddam, Marefat Siahkouhian and Nasrin Azizian
The Effect of Noticing and Input Enhancement in Reading on Speaking
Skill by Intermediate Learners
Reza Abdi and Golnaz Tarbali
12
141
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The Effect of Collaboration Conditions on Learning Requesting Functions
147
Reza Abdi and Rokhsareh Haghjoo
The Effect of Teaching Compositional, Semi-compositional, and Noncompositional Idioms on Intake of EFL Learners
153
Reza Abdi,Ghazal Farangizade
Exercise and Diabetes: A Review of the Evidence
160
Sajjad Azizkhah Alanagh, Marefat Siahkohian and Afshin Dalir
Optimal Design of PI Controller for Load Frequency Control in a TwoArea Power System with DFIG Based Wind Turbine
166
Samira Fallahi, Hossein Shayeghi and Abdolah Younesi
Macroscopic Quantum Tunneling in Superconductor-InsulatorSuperconductor Josephson Junction
173
Sanaz Zohouri Kakhki and Mohammad Hamdipour
The Effect of Planning on Iranian Intermediate EFL Learners' Mastery
of Writing Skill
178
Sara Mirazi and Asgar Mahmoudi
Task Scheduling in Cloud Computing Using Particle Swarm
Optimization
192
Shahram Jamali,Fatemeh Alizadeh and Soheila Sadeqi
Forecast Record-Distance Running and Speed of Both the 100m and
10,000m Record
Soheil Mosavi, Marefat siahkohian, Hamed mosavi and Akram ebdi
13
199
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The Effect of Submaximal Exercise Combined with Weight Training
and Muscle Hypertrophy Limits Blood Flow to the Arm
203
Soheil Mosavi, Marefat siahkohian and Hamed mosavi and Akram ebdi
The Effect of Combination of Strength Arm Muscles Following
Exercise Maximum Congestion Backlash
209
Soheil Mosavi, Marefat Siahkohian, Lotfali bolboli and Hamed Mosavi
A study of domestication and foreignization strategies in the Persian
translation of "IL GROTTESCO QUOTIDIANO"
214
Tohid Siami and Laleh Mousavi
Physical pr1operties and mechanical behavior under compressive
loading of Green Walnut
223
Zahra Basati, Salman Habibi and Vali Rasooli-Sharabian
Some Physical and Mechanical Properties of Hawthorn Fruit
Zahra Basati, Salman Habibi and Vali Rasooli-Sharabian
14
234
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The Symposium Schedule
June 5, 2016
Time
Hall 1
Hall 2
Hall 3
LalehMousavi, Tohid Siami
Akramebadi,
MarefatSiahkohian, Babak
Nakhostinrohi
A study of domestication
and foreignization
strategies in the Persian
translation of "IL
GROTTESCO QUOTIDIANO"
Acute effect of glutamine
supplementation on serum
levels of LDH after eccentric
resistance exercise in
untrained young men
RaminMoharami,
ZhilaEbrahimi
SajjadAzizkhahAlanagh,
Marefat Siahkohian,
AfshinDalir
Adaptation status and
poetry of Seyyed Ashraf Aldin Gilani& Ali Akbar Saber
Exercise and Diabetes: A
Review of the Evidence
Tamar LOMADZE
Reza
Parvaz,MohammadZarebnia
Amir
MasoudShokri,FarhadSattar
i,SoghraMirershadi
Pre-election Discourse in
Georgia
Haar Wavelet Method For
Solving One-dimensional
Burger’s equation
Nonlinear Optical
Properties of Perovskite
Nanoparticles
Sevda GEÇEN
11:50
12:10
Ortadoğu'daKadınOlmak:
SabırTaşı Romanı Üzerine
Yakın Okuma
Shabnam GOLKARIAN
12:10
12:30
14:30
14:50
The impact of identity;
manifestation of culture in
the built environment, and
consequences of lack of
identity. Case study (IranTehran)
15
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
June 5, 2016 - Continued
Mahdi Rahmatinia
Akbar FarhadiVarkaneh,
GhaderNajarbashi,
BahmanSeifi
Solving One-dimensional
Burger’s equation
The entanglement
properties of a spin chain
Heisenberg XY model
MasoomehShabani,Ahmad
YousefianDarani
MehrnooshFarahmand,
HoseinMohammadzadeh,Ho
sseinMehri
The Persian Root Shen in
the Georgian Language and
Toponymy
On weak McCoy modules
over commutative rings
Entanglement of noninertial fermions is not
invariably suitable for
superdense coding
Rıza OYLUM
ÖzgeNur ÖĞÜTÇÜ
Aslıhan AYTAÇ
RomanlardaŞah İsmail: Üç
Roman
ÜzerindenKarşılaştırmalıBir
Analiz
Relations Between Iran and
South Caucasus Countries in
the post-Sanctions Era:
Energy and Transportation
Corridors
THE HISTORICAL
AWARENESS IN THE
NOVEL 'BASKIN' BY
TÖLÖGÖN KASIMBEKOV
Ahmet KESKİN
AslanYavuz ŞİR, Bilgay
DUMAN
HalilFatih ALAGÖZ
Iran’s Energy and Security
Policy Towards Its
CengizAytmatov’un
‘Yüzyüze’
ÖyküsündeBaşkişininBenlik
Algısı, The Protagonist's
Sense of Self in the Novel
'Face To Face' by
CengizAytmatov
Tamta AMIRANASHVILI
14:50
15:10
The Problem of
Intertextuality – William
Shakespeare and Aldous
Huxley’s Brave New World”
Nino ZEDGİNİDZE
15:10
15:30
16:00
16:20
16:20
16:40
HAK-MUHAMMED-ALİ
DEDİM: ŞAH HATÂYÎ
ŞİİRİNDE ESTETİK BİR
DİNAMİK OLARAK NİYAZ (I
MENTIONED ALLAHMUHAMMAD-ALİ:
INVOCATION AS AN
ESTHETICS DYNAMIC in
SHAH HATÂYÎ’S POETRY)
16
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Nuriman ABDÜREŞİD
16:40
17:00
Şah İsmail
Hatayî’nınŞiirlerindenÇin-ü
TürkistanBölgesinebir
“Gezinti”
17:00
17:20
Teona KVANTCHİANİ
İpek YILDIZ
Ethnodemographic and
cultural situation in
Tetritskaro district of
Georgia
AhmetMithatEfendi’nin
“Kafkas”
AdlıRomanındaMillîKimlikÜ
zerine /On the National
Identity of “Caucasian
Novel” of
AhmetMithatEfendi
Salome BERIDZE
Fazıl ÖZDAMAR
Toward The Ancient
Georgian- Iranian
Toponymy Conections
THE EFFECTS OF THE
FOLKTALES TO THE
CREATION OF POEM: AŞIK
ABBAS AND HAN ÇOBAN
POEMS
June 6, 2016
9:309:50
Hall 1
Hall 2
Tamuna TCHITCHAGUA
Morteza Ebrahimi,
SomayehAbasi,
HamzehGanji
Armenian Diasporas in
Georgia
Studying the role of the
USA in Georgia`s crisis
17
Hall 3
The geographical
landscape and
archaeological analysis of
pre-historic settlement
patterns of East of
Azerbaijan based on the
first part of archaeological
surveys of Namin
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
MasoudDarabi,
SajjadPaydar,
BehnamArefi, Mehdi
GhorbaniGharazaki
Zahra Basati, Salman
Habibi,ValiRasooliSharabian
Ossets in Georgia: History
and Modernity
solution to attract sports
tourism
Physical properties and
mechanical behavior under
compressive loading of
Green Walnut
Ana RAMAZASHVİLİ
SadeghFarahmand Amin,
KambizPushaneh
Zahra Basati, Salman
Habibi,ValiRasooliSharabian
Alternative Flea Market in
Tbilisi
Relationship in the
adaptability rate of personenvironment and stress
between primary stage
teachers in districts1،2
Ardabil based on Personenvironment adaptation
model
Some physical and
mechanical properties of
Hawthorn fruit
Fatma TOPDAŞ
EbrahimZareImani, Amin
GhorbaniGoshaehOlya,
AlialnaghiMostafaei
ANAR RIZAYEV’İN ‘AK
LİMAN’ VE ‘BEŞ KATLI
EVİN ALTINCI KATI’ ADLI
ROMANLARINDA
SİMGESEL BİR
DEĞER: MEKÂN
Routing in Vehicle
Networks Based the
Location of Returning
Message in the Route
Ketevan TSIMINTIA
09:5010:10
10:1010:30
11:0011:20
18
FaridehManafi,
Reza AlipanahMoghadam
Evaluation of MDA and
SOD in secondary iron
overload model
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Amin Ghannadiasl,
KazemShakeri,
NasimNakhlbandsaei
FaridehManafi, Zahra
Farzanehsheikhahmad,Ara
shMehripiryvatlo,Reza
AlipanahMoghadam
Camasbname’denMasallar
aŞahmaran:
TürkiyeSahasıMasallarında
Şahmaran Tipi veAnlatıları
Project-based according to
functional knee braces by
plastic design
Estimation of catalase in
Serum as a Biomarker for
antioxidative Stress in
Patients with Esophageal
Cancer
Emrah SEFEROĞLU
Amin GhannadiAsl,
ArezooGharibiasl,
SoheilSoleymanzadeMogad
dam
Sam
Rahimnejad,Mohammad
Reza Rahimnejad
BEN’DEN BİZ’E: BAHTİYAR
VAHAPZADE’NİN
ŞİİRLERİNDE MİLLİ
KİMLİK İNŞASI
The effect of opening
position in the rectangular
concrete beams on the size
and weight of steel
consumption
Effect of Bacopamonnieri
extract on the motor
activity change due social
isolation-induced stress
Maryam Houshyari,
HosseinShayeghi,
AbdollahYounesi
Seyyed Saied Disnad,
Samira MahmoudiNia
Comparison of PID Type
Controller Performance in
Microgrid Frequency
Deviation Enhancement
Using MFO Algorithm
Effects of erythropoietin in
the prevention of cell
damage and necrosis in the
liver induced by ischemiareperfusion in rats
Seçkin SARPKAYA
11:2011:40
11:4012:00
Emine GÜVEN
12:0012:20
ON THE MATTER OF
TRANSLATİON AMONG
TURKİSH DİALECTS AND
ABOUT PROPER NOUNS
19
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Alev UYSAL
14:2014:40
14:4015:00
15:0015:20
15:2015:40
EVALUATİON OF
CONCEPTUAL AND
SYMBOLİC PLANE OF THE
HATAYİ-LOVE-POWER
TRİANGLE AT İSKENDER
PALA’S NOVEL
“ŞAH&SULTAN”
Aysel OSOYDAN
ÖZE DÖNÜŞ
GÖSTERGELERİ:
ŞEHRİYAR’IN
HEYDERBABA’YA SELAM
ŞİİRİ
Erdem TAZEGÜL
ZENCAN AĞZI ÜZERİNE
BİR İNCELEME
Erkan BEDER
Hakan ÇALIK
Andrei MAXIMCHYK
TopraktanAteşeBirAşkınSe
rgüzeşti
REFLECTED IMAGE OF
GEOGRAPHY ON POETRY:
CAUSCASUS IN MIKAIL
MUSFIK’S POEMS
Trophies of the Russian–
Turkish and RussianPersian wars of the XVIII–
XIX centuries in the
collection of the Caucasian
Military History Museum
Emel ŞENGÖNÜL
Sema ORUÇ
Ömer TEMİZKAN
CengizAytmatov’un
"BeyazGemi"sindeModerni
zmEleştirisi
JOURNEY FROM
HOMELAND TO FOREIGN
LAND IN POETRY OF
ELMAS YILDIRIM
Türkiye’de “Öteki” ve
“Yerli”
BirHalkOlarakKaraçayBalkarlar
Akif XANSULTANLI
Taha Tuna KAYA
Erasti ELIJARASHVILI
GürcistandaBorçalıBölgesi
ndeAşıklıkGeleneklerininT
arihi
AN EVALUATION ON
POEMS OF HATAYÎ IN
CÖNK 6706 REGISTERED
IN SIVAS - ZIYA BEY
LIBRARY
Political Aspects of
Caucasian Regional
Security in 21st
Century:The History and
Reality
21
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Acute Effect of Glutamine Supplementation on Serum
Levels of LDH after Eccentric Resistance Exercise in
Untrained Young Men
Akram ebadi
Soheil mosavi
Marefat siahkohian
Babak nakhostin rohi
Mohsen sheykhlouvand
Physical education,Mohaghegh Ardebili, Iran
Abstract
L-Glutamine is the most abundant amino acid in human muscle protein synthesis is and can Lactate
Dehydrogenase (LDH) is one of biochemical degradation of muscle cells in blood serum reduce.
Increased serum Lactate Dehydrogenase and exercise extrovert is more pronounced among nonathletes. The aim of this study is acute influence of L-Glutamine supplementation on serum levels of
LDH after eccentric resistance exercise in young men. Methods: 16 randomly selected young man
(age: 22.35±2.27yr; body mass: 69.91± 9.78kg; height: 177.08±4.32cm) disabled and the two groups
(n=8) control group (n=8) were divided that all subjects were obtained twice in the 8th with
maximum dominant leg begins to warm up, then in 3 sets of 15 teeth with 70%1 RM performed knee
flexion. Test the positive side move to the zero angle of the knee joint did and the motion negative
(eccentric contraction of the quadriceps) was carried out by subjects. Also, rest for 3 minutes
between each session was considered. The active group received L-Glutamine acute. Blood samples
were taken from the subjects after 24 hours and data using spss software and analyzed by parried
sample T test (P≤0.05). Results showed that acute consumption of L-Glutamine in the active group (P
= 0.001) were significant and in the control group (P = 0.17), no significant effect was observed. This
study showed that acute consumption of L-Glutamine can be Lactate Dehydrogenase is reduced and
muscle damage.
Keywords: Lactate Dehydrogenase, L-Glutamine ,eccentric exercise
21
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Introduction
Many athletes use a variety of dietary supplements to improve their performance and minimizing
risk of injures to provide them with an advantage over their opponent (2). DOMS and impaired
muscle function are the common consequences of excessive EE (1). Glutamine is the most abundant
amino acid within the human body (4). Multiple roles of dietary protein and key amino acids such as
glutamine create a variety of potential applications for hard-training athletes (4). Increase
intramuscular glutamine levels have been directly linked to influencing muscle cell volume (9),
which enhances protein synthesis, and increases muscle size. By increasing muscle mass, the
contractile force of a muscle can be increased (2).During exercise, increases and decreases in plasma
glutamine levels have been demonstrated and these variations are reflected by the type, duration,
and intensity of exercise (6). Exercise induced muscle damage to muscle fibers resulting in an
inflammatory response (7) and myofibrillar damage along the Z-band (8).
In general, DOMS continues to increase after exercise and peaks between 24 and 48 h after exercise).
The reasons behind DOMS have been a steady interest for many sports scientists for a long time.
Although several factors including lactic acid, connective tissue damage surrounding muscles, muscle
temperature, muscle spasm, inflammatory responses, free radicals, and nitric oxides have been
suggested for causing DOMS, there is no clear explanation Previous literatures have speculated that
the cause of DOMS is due to structural muscle damages and perturbation of calcium homeostasis or
acute inflammatory responses to exercise .The EMG spectrum from eccentric, concentric muscle
contractions and increased serum levels of muscle proteins such as creatine kinase (CK) in humans
were studied as a factor of mechanical damage of muscle fiber and functional change of metabolic
tissue (9,10). Prophylactic and therapeutic nutritional interventions involving protein, protein
hydrolysate, mixed amino acids, selective amino acids, and branched-chain amino acids have been
demonstrated to be effective in reducing some or all of the symptoms of muscle damage following
isolated eccentric muscle actions (11,13), resistance exercise (14),downhill running (15), and
endurance exercise (17).
Method
16 randomly selected young man (age: 22.35±2.27yr; body mass: 69.91± 9.78kg; height:
177.08±4.32cm) disabled and the two groups (n=8) control group (n=8) were divided that all
subjects were obtained twice in the 8th with maximum dominant leg begins to warm up, then in 3
sets of 15 teeth with 70%1 RM performed knee flexion. Test the positive side move to the zero angle
of the knee joint did and the motion negative (eccentric contraction of the quadriceps) was carried
22
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
out by subjects. Also, rest for 3 minutes between each session was considered. The active group
received L-Glutamine acute. Blood samples were taken from the subjects after 24 hours and data
using spss software and analyzed by parried sample T test (P≤0.05).
Results and Discussion
LDH one of the tiny blood factors that are indicative of muscle damage in the hours after intense
exercise significant increase in the blood and muscle. Extreme eccentric muscle exercises cause more
damage, and enzymes in the plasma to enter into the muscle cells and thus can be identified muscle
damage after exercise. Research a lot about that eccentric exercise causes muscle damage and
destruction there. The sports supplements can reduce muscle damage and its value in plasma
research also shows that the amino acid intake can prevent further muscle damage. Glutamine is the
most abundant amino acid in human muscle that can damage and destroy muscle cells after eccentric
exercise prevent the aim of this study is that acute consumption of glutamine what the outcome will
be. Results showed that athletes who use non-acute 0.1 grams of glutamine per kg of body weight
had decreased blood lactate dehydrogenase which indicates muscle damage is low (p = 0.001). This
increase was observed in the group that had consumed glutamine (p = 0.17). The results showed that
acute consumption of glutamine supplementation of 0.1 grams per kilogram of body weight nonathletes reduce muscle damage and muscle damage can be prevented.
References
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
O’Reilly K, Warhol M, Fielding R, Frontera W, Meredith C, Evans W. Eccentric exercise-induced
muscle damage impairs muscle glycogen repletion. J Appl Physiol. 1987;63:252–6. [PubMed]
Waddell D, Fredricks K. Effects of a Glutamine Supplement on the Skeletal Muscle Contractile
Force of Mice. Am J Undergraduate Res. 2005;4:11–8.
Rahmani Nia F, Farzaneh E, Damirchi A, Shamsi Majlan A. Effect of L-Glutamine Supplementation
on Electromyographic Activity of the Quadriceps Muscle Injured By Eccentric Exercise. Iran J
Basic Med Sci; 2013; 16: 808-812.
Lowery L, Forsythe CE. Protein and overtraining: potential applications for free-living athletes. J
Int Soc Sports Nutr. 2006;3:42–50. [PMC free article] [PubMed]
Cruzat VF, Rogero MM, Tirapegui J. Effects of supplementation with free glutamine and the
dipeptide alanyl-glutamine on parameters of muscle damage and inflammation in rats submitted
to prolonged exercise. J Cell Biochem Funct. 2010;28:24–30. [PubMed]
Babij P, Mattews SM, Rennie MJ. Changes in blood ammonina, lactate, and amino acids in relation
to workload during bicycle ergometer exercise in man. Eur J Appl Physiol. 1983;50:405–
Newsholme EA. Why is L-glutamine metabolism important to cells of the immune system in
health, post-injury, surgery, or infection. J Nutr. 2001;131:2515–2522. [PubMed]
23
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Clarkson P, Hubal M. Exercise-induced muscle damage in humans. Am J Phys Med Rehabil.
2002;81:52–69. [PubMed]
Low SY, Taylor PM, Rennie MJ. Response of glutamine transport in cultured rat skeletal muscle
to osmotically induced changes in cell volume. J Physiol. 1996;492:877–85. [PMC free article]
[PubMed]
Joohyung Lee, College of Physical Education, Kookmin University, 77 Jeongneung-ro, Seongbukgu, Seoul 136-702, Korea, Tel: +82-2-910-4782, Fax: +82-2-910-4789,
Merletti R, Lo Conte L, Sathyan D. Repeatability of Electrically-evokedMyoelectric Signals in the
Human Tibialis Anterior Muscle. J Electromyogr Kines. 1995;5:67–80. [PubMed]
Zhou Y, Li Y, Wang R. Evaluation of exercise-induced muscle damage by surface
electromyography. J Electromyogr Kines. 2011;21:356–62. [PubMed]
Buckley JD, Thomson RL, Coates AM, et al. Supplementation with a whey protein hydrolysate
enhances recovery of muscle force-generating capacity following eccentric exercise. J Sci Med
Sport. 2010;13:178–81. [PubMed]
R. B., fc. W. OGILVIE, AND J. A. SCHWANE. Eccentric exercise-induced injury to rat skeletal
muscle. J. Appl. Physiol.: Respirat. Environ. Exercise Physiol. These experiments were designed
to study skeletal muscle p54( 1): 80- 93, 1983.Nosaka K, Sacco P, Mawatari K. Effects of amino acid supplementation on muscle soreness and
damage. Int J Sport Nutr Exerc Metab. 2006;16:620–35. [PubMed]
Kraemer WJ, Ratamess NA, Volek JS, et al. The effect of amino acid supplementation on hormonal
responses to resistance training overreaching. Metabolism. 2006;55:282–91. [PubMed]
Etheridge T, Philp A, Watt PW. A single protein meal increases the recovery of muscle function
following an acute eccentric exercise bout. Appl Physiol Nutr Metab. 2008;33:1–6. [PubMed]
Phillips T , Childs AC , Dreon DM , Phinney S , Leeuwenburgh C University of Florida,
Biochemistry of Aging Laboratory, College of Health and Human Performance, Center for
Exercise Science, College of Medicine, Gainesville 32611, USA. Medicine and Science in Sports
and Exercise [2003, 35(12):2032-2037]
Greer BK, Woodard JL, White JP, et al. Branched-chain amino acid supplementation and
indicators of muscle damage after endurance exercise. Int J Sport Nutr Exerc Metab.
W. J. Evans, C. N. Meredith, J. G. Cannon, C. A. Dinarello, W. R. Frontera, V. A. Hughes, B. H. Jones,
H. G. Knuttgen Journal of Applied Physiology Published 1 November 1986 Vol. 61 no. 5, 18641868 DOI:
Nosaka K , Clarkson PM Exercise and Sports Science, Department of Environmental Science,
Yokohoma City University, Japan. International Journal of Sports Medicine [1996, 17(2):120127]
Vinicius Fernandes Cruzat1, Marcelo Macedo Rogero2 and Julio Tirapegui1, Effects of
supplementation with free glutamine and the dipeptide alanyl-glutamine on parameters of
muscle damage and inflammation in rats submitted to prolonged exercise. Article first published
online: 2 NOV 2009 DOI: 10.1002/cbf.1611
24
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Acute Effect of Glutamine Supplementation on Serum Levels of CPK
Akram ebadi
Soheil mosavi
Marefat siahkohian
Babak nakhostin rohi
Mohsen sheykhlouvand
Physical education,Mohageg Ardebili, Iran
Physical education,Mohaghegh Ardebili, Ira
n
Abstract
Glutamine is the most abundant amino acid in human muscle protein synthesis is and can Creatine
kinase (CPK) is one of biochemical degradation of muscle cells in blood serum reduce. Increased
serum Creatine kinase and exercise extrovert is more pronounced among non-athletes. The aim of
this study is acute influence of glutamine supplementation on serum levels of CPK after eccentric
resistance exercise in young men. Methods: 16 randomly selected young man (age: 22.35±2.27yr;
body mass: 69.91± 9.78kg; height: 177.08±4.32cm) disabled and the two groups (N=8) control
group (N=8) were divided that all subjects were obtained twice in the 8th with maximum dominant
leg begins to warm up, then in 3 sets of 15 teeth with 70%1 RM performed knee flexion. Test the
positive side move to the zero angle of the knee joint did and the motion negative (eccentric
contraction of the quadriceps) was carried out by subjects. Also, rest for 3 minutes between each
session was considered. The active group received glutamine acute. Blood samples were taken from
the subjects after 24 hours and data using spss software and analyzed by parried sample T test
(P≤0.05). Results showed that acute consumption of glutamine in the active group (P = 0.04) were
significant and in the control group (P = 0.36), no significant effect was observed. This study showed
that acute consumption of glutamine can be Creatine kinase is reduced and muscle damage.
Keywords: Glutamine, Creatine kinase, eccentric exercise
25
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Introduction
Many athletes use a variety of dietary supplements to improve their performance and minimizing
risk of injures to provide them with an advantage over their opponent (2). DOMS and impaired
muscle function are the common consequences of excessive EE (1). Glutamine is the most abundant
amino acid within the human body (4). Multiple roles of dietary protein and key amino acids such as
glutamine create a variety of potential applications for hard-training athletes (4). Increase
intramuscular glutamine levels have been directly linked to influencing muscle cell volume (9),
which enhances protein synthesis, and increases muscle size. By increasing muscle mass, the
contractile force of a muscle can be increased (2).During exercise, increases and decreases in plasma
glutamine levels have been demonstrated and these variations are reflected by the type, duration,
and intensity of exercise (6). Exercise induced muscle damage to muscle fibers resulting in an
inflammatory response (7) and myofibrillar damage along the Z-band (8).
In general, DOMS continues to increase after exercise and peaks between 24 and 48 h after exercise).
The reasons behind DOMS have been a steady interest for many sports scientists for a long time.
Although several factors including lactic acid, connective tissue damage surrounding muscles, muscle
temperature, muscle spasm, inflammatory responses, free radicals, and nitric oxides have been
suggested for causing DOMS, there is no clear explanation Previous literatures have speculated that
the cause of DOMS is due to structural muscle damages and perturbation of calcium homeostasis or
acute inflammatory responses to exercise .The EMG spectrum from eccentric, concentric muscle
contractions and increased serum levels of muscle proteins such as creatine kinase (CK) in humans
were studied as a factor of mechanical damage of muscle fiber and functional change of metabolic
tissue (9,10). Prophylactic and therapeutic nutritional interventions involving protein, protein
hydrolysate, mixed amino acids, selective amino acids, and branched-chain amino acids have been
demonstrated to be effective in reducing some or all of the symptoms of muscle damage following
isolated eccentric muscle actions (11,13), resistance exercise (14),downhill running (15), and
endurance exercise (17).
Method
16 randomly selected young man (age: 22.35±2.27yr; body mass: 69.91± 9.78kg; height:
177.08±4.32cm) disabled and the two groups (n=8) control group (n=8) were divided that all
subjects were obtained twice in the 8th with maximum dominant leg begins to warm up, then in 3
sets of 15 teeth with 70%1 RM performed knee flexion. Test the positive side move to the zero angle
of the knee joint did and the motion negative (eccentric contraction of the quadriceps) was carried
out by subjects. Also, rest for 3 minutes between each session was considered. The active group
26
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
received L-Glutamine acute. Blood samples were taken from the subjects after 24 hours and data
using spss software and analyzed by parried sample T test (P≤0.05).
CPK one of the tiny blood factors that are indicative of muscle damage in the hours after intense
exercise significant increase in the blood and muscle. Extreme eccentric muscle exercises cause more
damage, and enzymes in the plasma to enter into the muscle cells and thus can be identified muscle
damage after exercise. Research a lot about that eccentric exercise causes muscle damage and
destruction there. The sports supplements can reduce muscle damage and its value in plasma
research also shows that the amino acid intake can prevent further muscle damage. Glutamine is the
most abundant amino acid in human muscle that can damage and destroy muscle cells after eccentric
exercise prevent the aim of this study is that acute consumption of glutamine what the outcome will
be. Results showed that acute consumption of glutamine in the active group (P = 0.04) were
significant and in the control group (P = 0.36), no significant effect was observed. This study showed
that acute consumption of glutamine can be CPK is reduced and muscle damage.
References
1. O’Reilly K, Warhol M, Fielding R, Frontera W, Meredith C, Evans W. Eccentric exercise-induced
muscle damage impairs muscle glycogen repletion. J Appl Physiol. 1987;63:252–6. [PubMed]
2. Waddell D, Fredricks K. Effects of a Glutamine Supplement on the Skeletal Muscle Contractile
Force of Mice. Am J Undergraduate Res. 2005;4:11–8.
3. Rahmani Nia F, Farzaneh E, Damirchi A, Shamsi Majlan A. Effect of L-Glutamine Supplementation
on Electromyographic Activity of the Quadriceps Muscle Injured By Eccentric Exercise. Iran J Basic
Med Sci; 2013; 16: 808-812.
4. Lowery L, Forsythe CE. Protein and overtraining: potential applications for free-living athletes. J
Int Soc Sports Nutr. 2006;3:42–50. [PMC free article] [PubMed]
5. Cruzat VF, Rogero MM, Tirapegui J. Effects of supplementation with free glutamine and the
dipeptide alanyl-glutamine on parameters of muscle damage and inflammation in rats submitted to
prolonged exercise. J Cell Biochem Funct. 2010;28:24–30. [PubMed]
6. Babij P, Mattews SM, Rennie MJ. Changes in blood ammonina, lactate, and amino acids in relation
to workload during bicycle ergometer exercise in man. Eur J Appl Physiol. 1983;50:405–
7. Newsholme EA. Why is L-glutamine metabolism important to cells of the immune system in
health, post-injury, surgery, or infection. J Nutr. 2001;131:2515–2522. [PubMed]
8. Clarkson P, Hubal M. Exercise-induced muscle damage in humans. Am J Phys Med Rehabil.
2002;81:52–69. [PubMed]
27
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
9. Low SY, Taylor PM, Rennie MJ. Response of glutamine transport in cultured rat skeletal muscle to
osmotically induced changes in cell volume. J Physiol. 1996;492:877–85. [PMC free article] [PubMed]
10. Joohyung Lee, College of Physical Education, Kookmin University, 77 Jeongneung-ro, Seongbukgu, Seoul 136-702, Korea, Tel: +82-2-910-4782, Fax: +82-2-910-4789,
11. Merletti R, Lo Conte L, Sathyan D. Repeatability of Electrically-evokedMyoelectric Signals in the
Human Tibialis Anterior Muscle. J Electromyogr Kines. 1995;5:67–80. [PubMed]
12. Zhou Y, Li Y, Wang R. Evaluation of exercise-induced muscle damage by surface
electromyography. J Electromyogr Kines. 2011;21:356–62. [PubMed]
13. Buckley JD, Thomson RL, Coates AM, et al. Supplementation with a whey protein hydrolysate
enhances recovery of muscle force-generating capacity following eccentric exercise. J Sci Med Sport.
2010;13:178–81. [PubMed]
14. R. B., fc. W. OGILVIE, AND J. A. SCHWANE. Eccentric exercise-induced injury to rat skeletal muscle.
J. Appl. Physiol.: Respirat. Environ. Exercise Physiol. These experiments were designed to study
skeletal muscle p54( 1): 80- 93, 1983.15. Nosaka K, Sacco P, Mawatari K. Effects of amino acid supplementation on muscle soreness and
damage. Int J Sport Nutr Exerc Metab. 2006;16:620–35. [PubMed]
16. Kraemer WJ, Ratamess NA, Volek JS, et al. The effect of amino acid supplementation on hormonal
responses to resistance training overreaching. Metabolism. 2006;55:282–91. [PubMed]
17. Etheridge T, Philp A, Watt PW. A single protein meal increases the recovery of muscle function
following an acute eccentric exercise bout. Appl Physiol Nutr Metab. 2008;33:1–6. [PubMed]
18. Phillips T , Childs AC , Dreon DM , Phinney S , Leeuwenburgh C University of Florida, Biochemistry
of Aging Laboratory, College of Health and Human Performance, Center for Exercise Science, College
of Medicine, Gainesville 32611, USA. Medicine and Science in Sports and Exercise [2003,
35(12):2032-2037]
19. Greer BK, Woodard JL, White JP, et al. Branched-chain amino acid supplementation and indicators
of muscle damage after endurance exercise. Int J Sport Nutr Exerc Metab.
20. W. J. Evans, C. N. Meredith, J. G. Cannon, C. A. Dinarello, W. R. Frontera, V. A. Hughes, B. H. Jones, H.
G. Knuttgen Journal of Applied Physiology Published 1 November 1986 Vol. 61 no. 5, 1864-1868 DOI:
21. Nosaka K , Clarkson PM Exercise and Sports Science, Department of Environmental Science,
Yokohoma City University, Japan. International Journal of Sports Medicine [1996, 17(2):120-127]
22. Vinicius Fernandes Cruzat1, Marcelo Macedo Rogero2 and Julio Tirapegui1, Effects of
supplementation with free glutamine and the dipeptide alanyl-glutamine on parameters of muscle
damage and inflammation in rats submitted to prolonged exercise. Article first published online: 2
NOV 2009 DOI: 10.1002/cbf.1611
28
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Numerical Integration Using Daubechies’ Wavelets by Linear
Least square method
Amin Anvarzadeh
Mina Salimi
Department of Applied Mathematics, Mohaghegh University of Ardabil, iran
Abstract
In this paper, we use a method based on Daubechies wavelets for obtaining numerical solution of
definite integral. This approximation depends on pure scaling functions expansion. The Method
transforms definite integrals to a system of algebraic equations. We apply least square method for
solving linear system. In order to illustrate the efficiency and accuracy of the method a few test
examples are given.
Keywords: Numerical integration, Daubechies’ wavelets.
1.Introduction
Integration of a function on bounded interval is an important operation for many applied science
problems such as physical problems. There are several numerical approximating method for
numerical integration of a function. Most procedure for approximating value of definite integral are
based on use the polynomial that approximate the function. Daubechies’ wavelets are bases function
that satisfy certain mathematical requirements and are used for approximation of a function and also
the Daubechies wavelets bases are orthonormal bases that having compact support on [0,D-1], where
the parameter D is called the Daubechies number or wavelet genus. The basic scaling function
represented by  (x ) and basic wavelet function represented by   x  such that they both satisfy the
following two-scaling relations respectively
 x  
D 1
a   2x  l  ,
(1)
l
l 0
29
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
 x  
D 1
b   2x  l  ,
(2)
l
l 0
alD01 are
Where the coefficients
called filter coefficients, and bl   1 aD 1l [1]. And the
l
Daubechies orthonormal basis is formed by [2]
ij  x   2
j
2
2
j

x l ,
(3)
and

j

 ij  x   2 2  2 j x  l .
(4)
Denoted the set of orthogonal functions by {ij  x  , l  Z} for a particular j, generates a space
V j  L2  R  and W j  L2  R  is orthogonal complementary in V j 1 . Let P j denote the orthogonal
projection L2  R  V j . Then the vector space V j have the following conditions defining a
multiresolution analysis [2,3]:
(i)
V j  L2  R  and  V 2 V 1 V 0 V 1 V 2  
(ii)
f  x   Pj f  x   min f  x   g  x  , where g  x  V j
(iii)
f  x  V j  f  2x  V j 1 for all j  Z .
(iv)
The projection Pj f  x  converges to f  x  when j tends to infinity:
lim Pj f  x   f  x  or j 0V j is dense in L2  R 
j 
such that
Pj f  x  


C j 1,l  j 1,l  x  
l 

d
j 1,l  j 1,l
x  ,
(5)
l 
where the coefficients c j ,l and d j ,l are as follows:

c j ,l 
 f  x 
j ,l
 x  dx
,
(6)

and

d j ,l 
 f  x 
j ,l
 x  dx
.
(7)

31
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
2.Method
Let  be the basic scaling function of Daubechies number D and assumes that  is known at the
, m  0,1,,  D  1 2q , for some chosen q  N . Pure scaling function
2q
expansions of a function f(x) can be written as follows [4]:
dyadic rationals m

c
f x  
j , l  j ,l
x  ,
x R ,
(8)
l 
at th e grid pint
x  x k  k r , k Z ,
2
where r  N corresponds to some chosen resolution of the real line and

 f  x 
c j ,l 
j ,l
 x  dx
.
(9)
(10)

when x  a, b  for a, b  N , we impose the resolution 2r on interval a, b  , i.e.
b a
, k  0,1,, 2r  1 .
2r
so (8) takes the following form [5]:
xk  k
2 j b 1

f x  
(11)
c j ,l  j ,l  x  , x  a, b .
(12)
l 2 j a D  2
So f(x) at grid point x k  k
2 j b 1
b a
2
 b a 
f k r  
c j , l  j ,l
2  l 2 j a D  2


r
, k  0,1,, 2r  1 and r  j can be written as follows:
 b a 
k r  ,
2 

(13)
if we use (3), so (13) takes the following form:
2 j b 1
j
b a
 b a 


f k r   2 2
c j ,l   2 j k r  l  ,
2 
2



j
l 2 a D  2

(14)
which can be written in matrix form as follows:
fr 2
j
2
(15)
AC
where

b a 
f r   f  0  , f  r  , f
 2 


 2 b  a  

 ,, f
r
 2



T
 2 r  1 b  a   

 ,

 
2r


31
(16)
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016


 (2 j a  D  2)

A 

j 1
j 1
  ( (2  1)b  a (2  1)  2D  4 )

2


c  c j ,2 j D  2 , c j ,2 j D 3 ,, c j ,2 j b 1

T

 (2 b  1) 


,

(b  a ) 
(
)
2
2r (2 j (b a )  D  2)
j
.
(17)
(18)
Note that when we overhaul the system shown in (15) we find that the matrix A is not a square
matrix. Therefore we can’t solve the system shown in (15) , then we will use linear least square
method to solve above system to obtain column-vector C. Linear least squares method is a
procedure to determine the best fit line to data. The linear least square problem is formally
defined as follows:
Given a real m  n matrix A and a real vector b, find a real n-vector x such that the function:
r (x )  Ax  b ,
is minimized[6].
At end of this section we denoting the integrals of  (x ) by r(x) which written as [7]:
x

r  x   φ  y  dy .
(19)
0
Let f  x  V j , x  a,b  for a, b Z , we can expand this function by (12). Integration both side of Eq.
(12) from x=a to x=b and using integration theorem yields
2 j b 1
b
b
a
j
a l 2 a D  2
f  x dx   
2
c j ,l  j ,l  x  dx
2 j b 1

j
2
b

c j ,l  (2 j x  l )dx
l 2 j a D  2
2
2 b 1

j
2
u
a
j
b

c j ,l 2 j  u  du .
l 2 j a D  2
(20)
a
Using definition of r(x) shown in (19), Eq. (20) can be written as follows:
b
f  x dx  2
2 j b 1
j
2

c j ,l  r (2 j b  l )  r (2 j a  l )  .


(21)
l 2 j a D  2
a
which can be written in matrix form as follows:
b
f  x dx  2
j
2
RC .
(22)
a
32
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
where matrix C is the same shown in (15) and R is as follows:




T
 r 2 j b  a   D  2  r  D  2  




j
r
2
b

a

D

1

r
D

1







(23)
R 
 .


r  2   r 2 j a  b   2




j


r 1  r 2  a  b   1


The system shown in (22) can be computed when we obtain the column-vector C from the system
shown in (15). Then we use least square method to find the inverse of a matrix A. In other





words we use pseudo inverse. Denoting A   A T A

1
A T as a pseudo inverse of the matrix A[6].
Then column-vector C computed as follows:
C 2
j
2
f rA .
(24)
so (22) takes the following form:
b
f  x dx  2
j
Rf r A  .
(25)
a
Hence Eq. (25) is used to evaluate the values of definite integral of a function using Daubechies’
wavelets by linear least square method.
In this section we employ the error analysis for the Daubechies’ wavelets bases by linear least square
method described above to evaluate an approximation value of definite integral and obtain upper
bound of the absolute error.
Lemma1. Let A be m  n ( m  n ) and full rank matrix. Then the minimum-norm solution to
the underdetermined system Ax=b is given by
x  (AT A )(1) AT b ,
(26)
T
note that the matrix (A A )
( 1)
A
T
is pseudo inverse of A.
proof. The proof is given in [8].
Lemma 2. In Eq. (6), d j ,l  C 2
 j  D 1 /2
maxI j ,l
p
f     , where
1
C 
p!
D 1
x
  x  dx , and
p
0
p D
.
2
Proof. The proof is given in [5].
b

Lemma 3. Let f(x)  L2 ( ) be a continuous functions difined for a  x  b , H  f (x )dx and
a
33
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
b

H j  PV j f (x )dx Then:
a
E j  H  H j C 2
 j ( D 1)
2
.
(27)
Proof. The absolute error may be defined as:
b 
Ej 
2 j b 1
 
d i ,l i ,l (x )dx ,
(28)
j
a i  j l 2 D  2
which d i ,l are defined in (7). So
Ej
2
b

2 j b 1
 
d i ,l  i ,l (x )
 (
j
a i  j l 2 D  2


2 j b 1

2 j b 1
 


2 j b 1
   
d i ,l d m , k
i  j l 2 j D  2 m  j k 2 j a D  2


2 j b 1
 
d m ,k  m ,k (x ))dx
m  j k 2 j a D  2
d i ,l
2

b
i ,l  m , k

(x )dx dx

a
(b  a )
(29)
i  j l 2 j a D  2
by using lemma 2 in Eq. (27), it takes the form
Ej
2


2 j b 1
 
i  j l 2 j a D  2


C
  max
2 j b 1
2 i ( D 1)
2
ij


2
i D 1
p
C 2 2   maxI j ,l f     (b  a )
I j ,l

2
p
f     (b  a )
l 2 j a D  2

p
 C 2 maxI j ,l f    
 12 2
2
2 j ( D 1) 2
2( D 1) 2
,
(30)
taking the square root of (30) yields


p
 C maxI j ,l f     2 j ( D 1) 2 .
(31)
Hence
E j  C 2 j ( D 1) 2 .
(32)
34
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Hence the accuracy in the numerical integration using Daubechies’ wavelets bases by linear least
square method improves as we increase j or D.
In order to show the numerical result, the following examples are introduced and the approximate
value are obtained for j=9,11 and D=4,6,8. In Table 1- 3 the relative errors with respect to the exact
value are shown.
Example1.
1

x 2  5x  12dx
0
(see Table 1).
Table 1-Relative error above method with respect exact value.
J
D=4
D=6
D=8
9
1.7668E
-
9.3151E – 08
0.0000E + 00
1.1760E
-
6.1369E - 09
0.0000E + 00
07
1
1
08
Example2.
1
 sin(x
2
)dx
0
(see Table 2).
J
D=4
D=6
D=8
9
2.9132E- 06
1.43151E
–
1.1272E – 09
1.10215E - 08
0.0000E + 00
06
1
1
1.2403E
-
07
Example3.
3

1
1
(x  1)3
dx
(see Table 3).
35
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
J
D=4
D=6
D=8
9
6.7668E - 03
6.3151E – 03
6.1137E - 03
1
3.4012E - 03
3.2769E - 03
3.0147E - 03
1
From Tables 1-3 it can be noticed that above method for numerical integration of definite integrals
using Daubechies wavelet by linear least square methods have acceptable accuracy and the
approximate value of definite integral is improved by increasing j and D.
References
1. Williams, J.R and Amaratunga, K. (1994), “Introduction to Wavelets in Engineering”, International
Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering, 37, pp. 2365-2388.
2. Dabechies, I. (1992), “Ten Lectures on Wavelets” SIAM, Philadelphia.
3. Goswami, J.C. and Chan, A.K. (2011), “Fundamentals of Wavelets, Theory, Algorithms and
Applications”, John Wiley and Sons Inc, New York.
4. Nielsen, M. (1998). “Wavelets in scientific computing”, Ph.D. Thesis (Dissertation), Technical
university of Denmark.
5. Hashish, H., Behiry, S.H. and EL-Shamy, N.A. (2009). “Numerical integration using wavelets”,
Journal of Applied Mathematics and Computation, 211, pp. 480-487.
6. Datta, B.N. (1995) “Numerical Linear Algebra and Applications”, Brooks/Cole Publishing Company,
USA.
7. Jin, F. and Ye, T.Q. (1997), “Instability Analysis of Prismatic Members by Wavelet-Galerkin
Method”, Advanced in Engineering Software, 30, pp. 361-367.
8. EL-Beshbeshy, W.S. (2005). “Wavelet Solution for Solving Partial Differential Equations, Ph.D.
Thesis, Mathematical and Physical science Dept., Faculty of Engineering, Mansoura University, Egypt.
36
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Project-Based According to Functional Knee Braces by
Plastic Design
Amin Ghannadiasl
Kazem Shakeri
Nasim Nakhlband saei
Faculty of Engineering, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran
Faculty of Engineering, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran
MSc student, Faculty of Engineering, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran
Abstract
Design is according to a kind of modern methods of structural design. Now days this method have
been developed in order to improve the performance of earthquake-resistant structures. Though
often design codes use force to analyze for the seismic effects buildings in earthquake. On the other
hand deformation and shift control are essential in the design of structures. In this paper, plastic
design has been studied on performance form structural steel design with knee bracing system.
Therefore, several structures with different heights with knee bracing system against lateral loads
according to Iranian Earthquake Design codes and the tenth issue of national building codes is
considered as the basic structures. And again based on performance with the methods of plastic
design are designed. Basic structures and designed structures are based on the performance under
analysis inelastic Pushover. It can be seen that the method of operation under severe earthquakes,
create mechanism of surrender purposes, but the method of force the number of plastic hinges are
creating in columns. Finally, it can be concluded with design structural based on functional can be
taken a new step to improve seismic performance.
Keywords: Functional design, knee braces, deformation of the building
1. Introduction
Earthquake resistant design of structures is one of the most important factors of the modern
societies. Scientists studying the destructive effects of past earthquakes on structures are trying to
dissolve the deficiencies of the design methods of buildings. The destructive effects and abundant
37
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
damages caused by major earthquakes during the twentieth century, made the government agents,
experts, and engineers to think about a proper solution for confronting this natural phenomenon.
Among the new methods for design of structures, performance-based design method can be noted,
which is developed today in order to improve the performance of earthquake resistant structures.
The conducted researches during the recent years indicate the superiority of the performancebased design method over the force-based design method. In this paper, the performance-based
design method for structures with knee-bracing system is fully explained. The purpose of this study
is to evaluate the performance-based design methods against the force-based design methods. Seo
and Kim have conducted studies titled seismic design of steel structures with knee braces. Recently,
Aristizabal Ochoha has conducted researches on the knee-bracing systems. Naeimi and Bozorg have
also studied the seismic performance of knee-bracing systems and Shaban Abdolmohammadi has
evaluated the performance-based design method for steel moment resisting frames in a study.
2. Method
1-1- Performance-based design of steel structure with knee-bracing system in this paper is done in
such a way that first we consider a structure with 5 stories and a defined plan. This structure has the
knee-bracing system in both directions. The structure is considered to be located in Ardabil city and
on the soil type II. The structure is a residential and parking building, so is placed in the category of
the buildings of medium importance.
1-2- The studied structure is modeled in ETABS 2015 software and is analyzed by using the
equivalent static analysis method. The analyzed structure in this step is then again analyzed using
the nonlinear static (pushover) analysis method. The aim of this effort is to evaluate the output of the
two different methods and to compare them.
Nonlinear static analysis:
1-3- After performing the equivalent static analysis and designing the steel structure members, the
preparations for the nonlinear static analysis (pushover analysis) is provided. For this, first we
define the nonlinear static load cases in ETABS 2015. We perform the command “Define Menu>Load
Cases”. In this menu we click the “Add New Case” button and define the nonlinear static load case
“PUSHG1” according to Figure (1).
By doing this, the gravity loads are in fact applied to the structure and the nonlinear analysis under
seismic loading begins at this final state. After the gravity loads are applied to the structure, the
software modifies the stiffness matrix of structure according to the applied gravity loads. The gravity
load case “PUSHG2” is also defined according to Figure (2).
38
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Figure (1): Definition of gravity load
PUSHG1
Figure (2): Definition of gravity load
PUSHG2
We click the “Modify/Show” button in front of the term “Results Saved” and in the opened box first
we choose “Final State Only” and then check the box “Save Positive Displacement Increments Only”.
After defining the gravity loads we define the lateral loads. The lateral loads are defined both positive
and negative in directions of X and Y following the gravity loads.
Definition of nonlinear hinge properties:
In order to observe or change the nonlinear hinge properties we perform the command “Define
menu>Section Properties>Frame/Wall Nonlinear Hinges…”. Different types of nonlinear hinges can
be defined among which axial load, moment of inertia about strong and weak axis, shear in strong
and weak axis and the interaction between force and moments are most widely used. After defining
the required nonlinear hinge properties in this study, the hinges are assigned to the members. For
this purpose, according to the performance and the type of hinge that might be formed in the
members, the appropriate nonlinear hinges are assigned to them.
In the present step, in addition to linear static loads the analysis is also performed for nonlinear
static loads. The nonlinear analysis is commonly progressed to the destruction of structure, however,
different criteria are defined for destruction of structure including the criteria of hinges rupture, the
criteria of the mechanism formation and the criteria of nonlinear displacement (deformation) for
which an ultimate limit state must be determined in order to limit the amount of displacement.
According to the seismic rehabilitation standard of existing structures, this ultimate limit state is
equal to the target displacement.
39
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
3. Results and Discussion
The results of investigating the story displacements in the equivalent static analysis model shows
that the structural drift limitation is not achieved and also the demand to capacity ratio of line
members such as beam and column in stories is not suitable, hence, modification of the lateral
displacement and strengthening of members are required. In the nonlinear static (pushover)
analysis model, as displayed in Figures 4 and 5, with increasing the lateral loading in places in
which the hinge occurs in the cross section, the hinge formation sign is appeared.
Figure (4): Formation of plastic hinge in frame A Figure (5): Formation of plastic hinge in frame D
The studied structure meets the target displacement determined based on rehabilitation standard
and also the desirable rehabilitation objective.
41
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Figure (6): Pushover Curve - Base Shear vs Monitored Displacement
Table(1)
Base Shear vs Monitored Displacement
Monitored
Displ
Base
Force
cm
N
0
0.002
1
Step
A-B
B-C
C-D
D-E
>E
A-IO
IO-LS LS-CP
0
339
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
-0.307
57207.9
339
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
2
-0.616
114415.8
339
2
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
3
-0.926
171623.7
339
7
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
4
-1.235
228831.7
339
6
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
5
-1.544
286039.8
339
3
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
6
-1.854
339
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
343247.9
41
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Step
Monitored
Displ
Base
Force
cm
N
A-B
B-C
C-D
D-E
>E
A-IO
IO-LS LS-CP
8
7
-2.163
400456.2
339
4
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
8
-2.472
457664.6
339
2
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
9
-2.782
514873.1
339
4
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
10
-3.091
572081.8
339
3
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
11
-3.4
629290.7
339
1
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
12
-3.71
686499.7
339
8
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
13
-4.019
743709.0
339
7
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
14
-4.328
800918.5
339
9
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
15
-4.638
858128.3
339
8
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
16
-4.947
915338.4
339
3
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
17
-5.256
972548.7
339
9
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
18
-5.566
1029759.
339
45
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
42
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Monitored
Displ
Base
Force
cm
N
19
-5.875
20
Step
A-B
B-C
C-D
D-E
>E
A-IO
IO-LS LS-CP
1086970.
339
45
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
-6.184
1144181.
339
8
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
21
-6.494
1201393.
339
51
0
0
0
0
339
0
0
22
-6.636
1227646.
338
75
1
0
0
0
339
0
0
23
-6.951
1279957.
336
75
3
0
0
0
339
0
0
24
-7.475
1346793.
335
76
4
0
0
0
339
0
0
25
-7.784
1383974.
335
49
4
0
0
0
336
3
0
26
-8.359
1449542.
332
17
7
0
0
0
335
4
0
27
-8.976
1496216.
331
79
8
0
0
0
335
4
0
28
-9.278
1516819.
331
1
8
0
0
0
334
5
0
References
1. Jinkoo Kim, Youngill Seo, “Seismic design of steel structures with buckling-restrained knee braces”,
Journal of Constructional steel research 59, p.1477-1497, July 2003.
2. Aristizabal-Ochoa, J. D., “Disposable knee bracing: improvement in seismic design of steel frames”,
J. Structure. Engineering, ASCE, 1986, 112, (7), 1544-1552
43
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
3. Naeemi, M. and Bozorg, M. (2009). Seismic Performance of Knee Braced Frame. World Academy of
Science, Engineering and Technology, No. 50, PP. 976-980
4. Shaban Abdolmohammadi, Moein, (1393), “Evaluation of performance-based design of steel
moment resisting frames” M.Sc. Thesis, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil.
5. Mousavi, Hashem, Aghaeipour, Tohid, (1393) “Comparison of strength- and performance-based
design methods in studying of vulnerability and strengthening of steel buildings” Zanjan
university.
44
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The Effect of Opening Position in the Rectangular Concrete
Beams on the Size and Weight of Steel Consumption
Amin Ghannadi Asl
Arezoo Gharibi Asl
Soheil Soleymanzade moghaddam
Engineering, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran
Abstract
In the construction of moderns buildings, many pipes and ducts are necessary to accommodate
essential services like water supply, sewage, air-conditioning, electricity, telephone, and computer
network usually these pipes and ducts are placed underneath the sofitt of the beam and, for aesthetic
reasons, are covered by a suspended ceiling, thus creating a dead space that adds to the overall
building height depends on the number and depth of ducts to be accommodated. To avoid increasing
the height of the ceiling and dead weight floor, it is better that pipes and ducts pass from the beams
of ceiling for this purpose beams should be designed in the form of opening. In this paper, opening
position is beam height. Also in this article is investigated, the effect of the presence or absence of
openings in the beam height on the tensile, compressive and shear steel in reinforced concrete
beams. For this purpose, the program is provided by matlab. The results show that changes in crosssectional dimensions and position of opening cause to change the amount of area tensile,
compressive and shear steel, and the total weight of the steel in reinforced concrete sections.
Keywords: reinforced concrete beam with opening, the amount of used steel.
1. Introduction
In modern building construction, transverse openings in reinforced concrete beams are often
provided for the passage of utility ducts and pipes. These ducts are necessary in order to
45
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
accommodate essential services such as water supply, electricity, telephone, and computer network.
These ducts and pipes are usually placed underneath the soffit of the beam and for aesthetic reasons,
a recovered by a suspended ceiling, thus creating a dead space. In each floor, the height of this dead
space adds to the overall height of the building depending on the number and depth of ducts.
Therefore web openings enable the designer to reduce the height of the structure, especially with
regard to tall building construction, thus leading to a highly economical design.
The presence of transverse openings will transform simple beam behaviour into a more complex
behaviour, as they induce a sudden change in the dimension of the beam’s cross section. However, as
the opening represents a source of weakness, the failure plane always passes through the opening.
The ultimate strength, shear strength, crack width and stiffness may also be seriously affected.
Furthermore, the provision of openings produces discontinuities or disturbances in the normal flow
of stresses, thus leading to stress concentration and early cracking around the opening region.
Similar to any discontinuity, special reinforcement or enclosing of the opening close to its periphery,
should therefore be provided in sufficient quantity to control crack widths and prevent possible
premature failure of the beam. This section presents the classification of Reinforced Concrete (RC)
beams with circular openings based on the opening’s size and position.
The method used in this paper:
1.
The algorithm for the design of concrete beams with openings based on regulations Iran.
2.
To avoid from this, it considered that shear force is limited according to regulations Iran to
prevent increasing the diameter of the hole.
46
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Figure 1: Rectangular concrete beam design algorithm
Figure 2: Rectangular concrete beam design with compressive bars algorithm
3.
The use of shear force to obtain stirrups area and Rebar reinforcement.
47
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Figure 3: shear resistance Vs provided by shear reinforcement at an opening
Shear across the failure plane are those by the sides of the opening within the distance of
 b  do  :
Vs 
Where
Av f yv
S
(b d o )
b is width of beam width and d 0 is diameter of opening Av is area of shear stirrups and
f yv is yield strength of stirrups. According to references of (2).
As can be seen by increasing the diameter of the hole due to limitations intended to diameter hole
cut in the area of tensile steel was low at the beginning of beam and in the middle of beam with
increases bending and decreases of shear it will increases. But the area of compressive steel beam is
zero because diameter hole is small. Also in the area of shear steel will increases at the beginning of
beam and in the middle of beam with increases bending and decreases of shear it will decreases also
this method is true for the weight of shear steel at the beam. And also by increasing the diameter of
the hole can be seen that the total amount of steel consumption increases.
48
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Figure 4: The area of tensile bars (mm2), according to length (mm)
Figure 5: The area of compression bars (mm2), according to length (mm)
49
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Figure 6: stirrups area and Rebar reinforcement (mm2/mm), according to length (mm)
-4-1
Figure 7: The weight of stirrups area and Rebar reinforcement (kg/m), according to length
(mm)
51
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Figure 8: The weight of tensile steel (kg/m), according to length (mm)
1140
1130
1120
1110
1100
1090
1080
1070
0
50
100
150
200
Figure 9: The total weight of steel (kg/m), according to diameter (mm)
51
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
References
Concrete beam book by civil engineering regulations Iran.
Concrete beam whit openings analysis and design by M. A. Mansur and Kiang- H wee tan.
The artical of Reinforced concrete beams with web openings: A state of the art review A. Ahmed,
M.M. Fayyadh, S. Naganathan, K. Nasharuddin.
52
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The Optimization of Consumption steel T-Shaped
Concrete Beams by Genetic Algorithms
Amin Ghannadi asl
Arezoo Gharibi asl
Soheil Soleymanzade moghaddam
Abstract
Optimization theory is method studies to find their optimal. The "optimal" as a technical term
implies quantitative measurements and mathematical analysis, while best things are the less
accuracy and more for everyday use. In this paper, by providing appropriate algorithm for the design
of T-shaped concrete beams and also optimized by genetic algorithm want to get the best rate of
consumption steel. In this article, the numerical results use to optimize the T-shaped concrete
beams.
Keywords: genetic algorithm, optimization, T-shaped concrete beam.
1. Introduction
Genetic algorithm is one of the methods of stochastic optimization based on the concept of natural
selection and genetic that inspired evolution of humans. This method uses the approximate
population of possible solutions to issues offer is expressed. Genetic Algorithm produced by
repeating the generation and development-focused people by the fitness function. For this purpose,
the initial population consisted of people randomly and then to The development of any of the
people using the fitness function evaluates and then jump on the genetic operators such as
integration and has practiced And higher qualified people to form a new population creates. This will
continue until the conditions of termination algorithm.
This method can be used in a wide range of issues in various fields such as engineering, mathematics,
and surgery.
53
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
In this paper, by providing appropriate algorithm for the design of T-shaped concrete beams and also
optimized by genetic algorithm want to get the best rate of consumption steel.
2. The method used in this paper:
1.
The algorithm for the design of concrete T shape beams based on regulations Iran.
Figure 10: T shape concrete beam design algorithm
54
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Figure 11: T shape concrete beam design with compressive bars algorithm
We conclude from this graph, genetic algorithms, rather than trial and error, much earlier finds the
optimal level, and this issue is more with increased span length.
Chart Title
80000
60000
40000
20000
0
0
5
10
15
the try error
20
25
30
35
genetic
Figure 12: Genetic and the try error according to length (m)
55
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
GA was able to repeat fewer, roughly the same cost, optimizes cross section.
Chart Title
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
5
10
15
20
the cost of try error
25
30
35
the cost of genetic
Figure 13: The cost of genetic and the try error according to length (m)
References
Concrete beams based on regulations Iran.
Space truss weight optimization using genetic algorithms, the artical by Ehsan Mahmoudi
Koochaksarai.
56
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Wahhabism in Republic of Azerbaijan
Morteza Ebrahimi
Parisa Baghghal Asgari
Naser Rahmani
Assi. Professor, Department of Political Science, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran.
M.Sc. Student, Department of Humanities, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran.
Abstract
After the collapse of the Soviet Union, the Muslim republics of the central Asia and Caucasus where
considered as a new objectives for the diversion radical movements specially Wahhabism. In this
geographic set republic of Azerbaijan considered as one of main objective countries for many
reasons and the leader of Wahhabism groups were engaged in missionary activity in this country.
The main reasons for activity of this groups are, although the Azerbaijan is a Muslim country with
majority of Shiite, but nowadays it is in a bad situation in area of religion and religiosity and religion
community of this country is in a type of intellectual confusion. The three cases which can be
considered as main reasons for formation of this situation are, first is religious and ideological
vacuum which is legacy of communist rule. Second is selecting the Secular model as type of political
system in a Muslim country which is follower of Ahle Bait (PBUT), and the third is lack of attention
and emphasis on religion and the religion of the majority community and insists on equality of all
religions from perspective of type and amount of activity and propaganda from the government.
Keywords: Wahhabism, Caucasus, Religion vacuum, Republic of Azerbaijan.
1. Introduction
Republic of Azerbaijan with 86 600 square kilometers area is the most important country in the
South Caucasus. This land belonged to Iran till 200 years ago. But in the war of Iran and Russia by
the treaty of Golestan and TurkmenChay joined to Russia. After the collapse of the Soviet Union in
October 1991 Republic of Azerbaijan has announced independent and as an independent political
unit in international arena has recognized. Nowadays one of the most important radical movement
57
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
that has been obstacle for Muslims success in all over the world and has lend lots of sorrow for
Islamic world is Wahhabism. At the moment Republic of Azerbaijan is one of the countries that has
become a place for action and prowl of this radical movement. This article examines the role of
Wahhabism and Wahhabism threat for Azerbaijan and the regions.
2. Discussion
Intellectual and political history of Wahhabism
Ahmad ibn Hanbal (164-241H.q):
Ahmad ibn Hanbal, the founder of the Hanbali sect and had been considered as one of the thought
leaders of Hadith, was born in Rabi al awal 164 AH in Baghdad. Ahmad ibn Hanbal was a jurist who
travel a lot, and in the pursuit of knowledge and tradition to Hijaz, Yemen, Kufa and Basra travelled.
And gathered lots of Hadiths. And put them in a series called documentary of Ibn Hanbal. Ahmad
had many masters, in fiqh and hadith, So that Ibn Khallikan considers him one of the companions
and special students. Of Imam Shafi.'
Ibn Hanbal after 77 years of living in the twelfth of Rabi al-Awwal 241 AH, after a nine-day course of
the disease died in Baghdad a , and his body was buried in the tomb of bab al Hor. His life history,
testifies that Ahmed resistance in his beliefs, drew emotions of people to him. And gradually he
became the imam of belief among Sunnis and could publish Sunni beliefs as were valid to him. He
was the founder of his school called "Hanbali"
Ibn Taymiyyah:
Ahmad Ibn Taymiyyah, was born five years after the fall of the Abbasi Caliphate in Baghdad, in a
district called Horran in Sham. This city in the years before his birth and his childhood was invaded
by the Mongol. So, people of the city, including Abdul Halim Ibn Taymiyyah’s parents were forced to
leave the city to go to Damascus. Ahmad ibn Taymiyyah as a jurist, Hanbali narrator, aroused against
all liberal and modernist. Some of the reasons that scholars objected to ibn Taymiyyah were as
followers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Considering a body for God
Considering a place/location for God as an object
God is alike objects and creatures
Denying the Spiritual magnificent of prophet Mohammad after his death
58
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
5. Denying prophets pilgrimage and intercession
6. Insulting the prophet’s
7. Most important calling all the Muslims infidel
Actually he believed that any action that hadn’t be done in prophet’s time shouldn’t be done after
him .ibn Taymiyyah derived 3 rules from the general principles.
1. No benefactor person or friends of friends of God should be a means to get closer to God,
2. Don’t refuge to any one for help , living or dead
3. Shouldn’t be bowed to any ones grave or tomb specially prophets
In fact, they believe that funeral and mourning is forbidden because dead man can’t do anything not
spiritual and worldly affairs.
Muhammad ibn Abdul Wahhab
Muhammad ibn Abdul Wahhab was born in 1115 AD in Uyayna. Muhammad's father had taught
religious affairs justice in Uyayna. Mohamad was interested in interpretation books and hadith and
fiqh opinions from his childhood and had been taught Hanbali tradition by his father, who was a
Hanbali scholar. Abd al-Wahhab studied religious science and starred judging as a career.
Muhammad son of Abdul Wahhab after the end of the introductory courses went to the Medina for
studying. During in his studying he had told some words that had some special ideas behind them. So
that his teachers were worried about his future and told he will mislead people if started for
proselytism. Mohammad ibn abd al wahhab was brought in tribal society and because of his father’s
hanbali beliefs and his job that was judging became interested in hanbalis figh and whom that had
studied it specially ibn taymiyyeh and his student ibn gayim and also ibn addaolhadi .so for getting
more information about these persons and informing of the cultural social and political atmosphere
of Syria and Iraq that were ruled by the Ottoman Empire traveled to those areas.
Religions in Azerbaijan
Islam
Republic of Azerbaijan has been one of the most important Islamic centers of the ancient years, and
still have ethnic links with Islamic history and shiee art. More than five thousand places according
with the Shiite Islamic architecture there is in this republic. Three hundred institutions and religious
consensus in the country that operate legally and are supervised by DQIDK. There are also three
hundred mosques in the country that are acting in cultural and religious features legality, but twenty
percent of them do not work. Baku Islamic University and the Sumgait Islamic University are those
academic centers that Field of "Islamic theology" taught there.
59
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The rise of Wahhabism
The Religious vacuum created in Azerbaijan in the years after independence, was a good time to
propagate other religions and sects emerging and attract an audience among people who had lived
seventy years in irreligious, People who were strongly eager for speaking out, after getting their
freedom, were walking after their awake mettle, and lived like an arid desert waiting for water. On
the other hand ruinous war in Karabakh and political chaos in Azerbaijan in early years of
independence as well as the crisis in Chechen in the North Caucasus (in later years) the opportunity
to advertise and spread of different religions and sects such as Wahhabism, in the Republic created.
History of Wahhabism attendance in Republic of Azerbaijan
Wahhabis in the early 90's by Arab charities help have found their way to Azerbaijan. Abu Bakr
Mosque (the largest Wahhabi mosque in Azerbaijan where followers of the Wahhabi doctrine often
gather in this mosque) with the financial assistance of the Kuwaiti charitable foundations
established in Baku in 1998 and its supervision was given to "Suleiman gamat" who was educated in
Saudi Arabia In these years some Arab charities were expelled from Azerbaijan. But for the activity of
Abu Bakr Mosque hadn't made limits and because of that some members of the mosque and
publications accused haji gamat to cooperating with the government. At this time‫"د‬Ali Khan Musa of"
one of the members of the Abu Bakr mosque was known as one of the figures. In this time, Wahhabis
call him Ekhwan. Wahhabis as the third largest group of foreign missionaries using the pristine
religious and ideological atmosphere of
Azerbaijan entered on the scene of Azerbaijan. And
missionaries of the Wahhabi sect from 1995 began onwards to promote the Wahhabism and
destruction of other religions, especially Shi'a Islam.
The followers of the Wahhabi sect gradually expanded its activities in the Republic of Azerbaijan and
began to brainwashing in this country.
Wahhabi active groups in Republic of Azerbaijan
The early years of the twentieth century due to the rapid spread of this cult in Azerbaijan ,The other
paths of this cult parallel to each other has spread and growth. Four main groups that nowadays are
active in Azerbaijan include: Jihad Population, Salafis, migration population (excommunication) and
the Brotherhood that each branch had its own president and its own principles and beliefs
associated.
61
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Wahhabis major fields of activity
Nowadays Azeri Wahhabis and followers of this religion that are acting by support of Arabia and
other Arab countries financial help by the name of charity units , With the establishment IN war
refugee camps and penetration into the education system of the country , tend to propagandize their
religion. As ANS Press reported that studies on the schools has shown that the influence of radical
religious movements among students is expanding.
Azeri rulers fight against Wahhabism
Azerbaijani Governors after 11 September 2001 and knowing the nature of these groups who could
face the rule of Azerbaijan with a huge challenge, revised on their decisions, and considered some
restrictions on them to prevent their growth .Although it seems nowadays the fight against this
movement has got a Steep slope. The two cases are mentioned below:
1. In November 2005, on the eve of parliamentary elections in Azerbaijan, politicians of this county
were talking about the threat of political stability of Azerbaijan from the Wahhabism more and more.
This concern was justified based on the evidence, and one of the evidence was in relation of
sending 14 ton of religious publications to Baku ,in Azerbaijani , Russian , Arabic , Uzbek-Kazakh
languages for the Muslim Council of the Caucasus from the Muslims Commission of Kuwait. The
government banned these book, because in many of them Wahhabism was advertised and Sunni and
Shiite, Islam branches, were against each other.
2. In 2014 lham Aliyev during his visit to Iran and his meeting with the Supreme Leader, showed his
concern about Wahhabism, and said that (religious extremism) is as the cause of common concern
between the two countries states and called for greater ties with the Islamic Republic of Iran.
3.Conclusion
Wahhabism at the beginning of its activity in Azerbaijan introduced itself as submissive and
supportive of policies of the ruling system. And bye the praising of the sovereignty of that country ,
by urging on the continuation of its campaign, their followers were increasing, and after
strengthening its position, there is a threat to the stability and security of this country and these are
the exactly the same process that in other countries have experienced before. Unfortunately the
America and the Zionist regime support, is a key factor in the spread of the cult of the Wahhabi sect
in Azerbaijan. The fears of forming Shia government in the neighbourhood of Islamic Republic of Iran
61
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
according to the historical, cultural and religious commonalities between the two countries has
caused to create rifts and divisions between the two nations more and more. Azerbaijan Sunni
Muslims that make up about 25% of the population, in the absence of Wahhabi influence are not
considered a new threat to the Azerbaijani government and the Shia community. But high sentiments
among the ethnic groups in the Caucasus and non-Azeri of most Sunnis living in sensitive border
areas has caused the movements of anti-Shiite Wahhabis, create the risk of violent facing between
the followers Sunni and Shia. So Baku recently realized the danger of Wahhabism, and monitored its
activities, and Wahhabism tactics in this field is blowing in religious conflicts and sectarian strife.
References
1.What is happening in Azerbaijan? WWW.hawzah.net
2.Nosrati, Ahmad, danger of Wahhabism in Azerbaijan, 1392: WWW.arannews.com
3.Representative of the Supreme Leader in Hajj and pilgrimage areas, recognizing Saudi Arabia,
released Hiram, without date, unwarranted, Page 108
4.Qazet newspaper, 525
5.Ansari, Reza, October, Religion in Azerbaijan: Winter 1392, WWW.qafqaz.ir
6.Mobaleghi, Ahmad, history of religions: Page 1430
7.Goli, Hassan Wahhabi threat to Azerbaijan, Journal Aran, sixth year: Number 15 and 16 springsummer 1387
8.Abdullahi, Aref, presence of Wahhabism in Azerbaijan, scientific research Journal of Caucasus, fifth
year, Number: 17-18, Summer 93
9.Ansarimehr, Reza, Religion in the Republic of Azerbaijan, winter 1392, www.gafgaz.ir
10.Commonwealth of Independent States and Baltic republics, pages 15, 148,
11.How the Wahhabi sect was founded and what is the difference between the Wahhabis and
Sunnis? www.mashreghnews.ir
12. Davitashvili ,Zurab, translation: Amirahmadian, Bahram, Ethnic - geographical backgrounds and
political crisis in the Caucasus, Humanities institution And cultural studies, Human Sciences
Comprehensive Portal ,No. 145-146
62
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Power Flow Solution in a Larg Scale Power System
Including IPFC
Elham Mokaramian
Hossein Shayeghi
Abdolah Younesi
Technical Engineering Department, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran
Abstract
Abstract: In this paper a power injection model (PIM) of interline power flow controller (IPFC) by
applying the Newton-Raphson method is discussed. This model is incorporated into NewtonRaphson power flow to study the effects of IPFC parameters in the power flow study. The IPFC has
much more flexible topologies, consists of at least two converters, and can be used to control power
flows of a group of lines. It can be anticipated that the IPFC may be used to solve the complex
transmission network congestion management problems that transmission companies are now
facing in the transmission open-access environment. The Newton-Raphson power flow solution
method with IPFC model is a useful tool for operation and control of power systems.
Keywords: Interline power flow controller (IPFC), Newton-Raphson power flow, Power injection
model (PIM), Loss minimization
1. Introduction
Flexible AC Transmission System (FACTS) is a technology based concept that can provide a full
dynamic control over active and reactive power flow on transmission systems based on the key
control variables such as transmission line impedance, phase angle and terminal voltages [1]. The
latest generation of FACTS controllers are unified power flow controller (UPFC) and interline power
flow controller (IPFC). It is found that, in the past, much effort has been made in the modeling of the
63
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
UPFC for power flow analysis [2]-[4]. The IPFC is conceived for the compensation and power flow
management of multi-line transmission system. Like the STATCOM, SSSC and UPFC, the IPFC also
employs the voltage sourced converter as a basic building block [5]. A simple model of IPFC with
optimal power flow control method to solve overload problem and the power flow balance for the
minimum cost has been proposed [6]. This paper investigates the performance of IPFC in a power
system network. A detailed mathematical model of IPFC which will be referred as IPFC power
injection model has been presented. This model is helpful in understanding the impact of IPFC on
power system. Further, the IPFC injection model can easily be incorporated in the steady state power
flow model. The proposed model is used to demonstrate the features of IPFC. This paper shows that
the IPFC has the capability of regulating bus voltages, active power flow, reactive power flow and
minimizing the power losses simultaneously [7].
HV1
HV2
dc link
Cdc
+
-
System data
Measured Vdc
IPFC CONTROLER
Control para
Measured para
2. INTERLINE POWER FLOW CONTROLLER
A. Operation Principles of IPFC
In its general form, the IPFC employs a number of dc to ac converters, each providing series
compensation for a different line. The converters are linked together at their dc terminals and
connected to the ac systems through their series coupling transformers [8]. The simplest IPFC
consists of two back-to-back dc-to-ac converters, which are connected in series with two
transmission lines through series coupling transformers and the dc terminals of the converters are
connected together via a common dc link. With this IPFC, in addition to providing series reactive
compensation, any converter can be controlled to supply real power to the common dc link from its
own transmission line [9].
B. Mathematical Model of IPFC
64
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
In this section, a mathematical model for IPFC which will be referred to as power injection model is
derived. This model is useful to study the impact of the IPFC on the power system network and can
easily be incorporated in the power flow algorithm [7]. Usually, in the steady state analysis of power
systems, the VSC may be represented as a synchronous voltage source injecting an almost sinusoidal
voltage with controllable magnitude and angle. Based on this, the equivalent circuit of IPFC is shown
in Fig.2. In this circuit, is the complex
(n=j, k) controllable series injected voltage.


V
Z se  R se
n
n
 jX
se n
se n
V
se n
 se
n
(n=j, k) is the series transformer impedance [10]. V ,
i
complex bus voltages at the buses i, j and k respectively, defined as
V
m
V
m
V
j
and
V
k
are the
 m (m= i, j and k).
Therefore, the current source can be expressed as
I se
n
  j b se
V
n
(1)
se n
Now, the current source (
complex power injected at
s
inj ,i
I se
i
) can be modeled as injection powers at the buses i, j and k. The
n
th
bus is
  V i ( Isen )*
n  j ,k
(2)
Subtitle (1) in (2)
s
inj ,i
  V i ( j b se
n  j ,k
V
n
(3)
)*
se n
After simplification, the active power and reactive power injection at
i
th
bus are
P
 RE (S
inj ,i
)   (V
n  j ,k
V b
sein
sin(i   sein ))
(4)
inj ,i
Q
 IM (S
inj ,i
)   (V
V b
sein
cos(i   sein ))
(5)
inj ,i
n  j ,k
i
i
sein
sein
The complex power injected at
S
inj ,n
n
th
bus (n=j,k) is
(6)
V n (Isen )*
Substitute (1) in (6)
65
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
s
inj ,n
V n ( j b se
V
in
(7)
)*
se in
After simplification, the active power and reactive power injections at
P
inj ,i
 RE (S
inj ,n
)  V
Q
inj ,i
 IM (S
inj ,n
) V
sein
b
sein
sin(n   sein )
V b
n
sein
sein
n
th
bus are
(8)
cos(n   sein )
(9)
Based on (4), (5), (8), and (9), power injection model of IPFC can be seen as three dependent
power injections at buses i, j and k.
As IPFC neither absorbs nor injects active power with respect to the ac system, the active power
exchange between the converters via the dc link is zero, i.e.
Re(Vseij I*ji  Vseik I*ki )  0
(10)
Where the superscript * denotes the conjugate of a complex number. If the resistances of series
transformers are neglected, (10) can be written as

m i , j , k
Pinj ,m  0
(11)
3. IMPLEMENTATION OF IPFC MODEL IN NR METHOD
A. Power Balance Equations with IPFC
The IPFC power injection model can be incorporated into NR power flow algorithm by addition of
power injections to the corresponding power mismatch equations. The power balance equations can
be expressed as:
Pi  Pi 0  Pinj ,i
Qi  Qi0  Qinj ,i
Pn  Pn0  Pinj ,n
Q n  Q n0  Qinj ,n
66
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Where the superscript ‘0’ denotes the power mismatch without IPFC and n=j, k.
4. Results and Analysis
In this section, numerical results are carried out on IEEE 57-bus system [19] to show the robust
performance and capabilities of IPFC model. In the test system, bus 1 is considered as slack bus,
while bus 2, 3, 6, 8, 9 and 12 as generator buses and other buses as load buses. For all the cases, the
convergence tolerance is 1e-7 p.u. System base MVA is 100. The inductive reactance of the coupling
transformers are taken to be 0.01 p.u.
Beginning, the power flow solution i.e. bus voltages, line flows and line losses of 57-bus system are
calculated using Newton-Raphson method without IPFC. Next, for the same system the power flow
solution is obtained using NR method with IPFC. The one converter of IPFC is embedded in a line
between the buses 13-14 which is considered as 1st line and the other converter of IPFC is placed in
a line between the buses13-15 which is considered as 2nd line and bus 13 is selected as common bus
for two converters. The bus voltages, line flows and line losses of test system without and with IPFC
(parameters Vse= 0.3 p.u and θse=- 120) are shown in Table I, II and III respectively
Table 1
LINE FLOWS WITHOUT AND WITH IPFC
Active power flow
From-To
Reactive power flow
(MW)
(MVAR)
Without
With
Without
IPFC
IPFC
IPFC
13-14
-0.089
-0.534
0.259
0.268
13-15
-0.485
-0.595
0.127
0.170
67
With
IPFC
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Table 2
Line Losses without and with IPFC
Total active power losses
(P.U)
without IPFC
0.240
Total reactive power losses
(P.U)
with IPFC
0.212
without IPFC
with IPFC
1.167
1.016
5. Conclusion
In this paper, a power injection model of IPFC has been presented. This model is incorporated in NR
power flow solution method to study the effects of IPFC parameters in power flow studies.It is
shown that there is a possibility of regulating bus voltage, active and reactive power flow and
minimizing the power loss with proper IPFC parameters.. The strong multi line control capability of
IPFC plays an important role in power systems. The NR power flow solution method with IPFC model
is a useful tool for planning, operation and control of power systems.
References
1.Shea, John. "Understanding FACTS-concepts and technology of flexible AC transmission systems
[Book Review]." Electrical Insulation Magazine, IEEE 18.1 (2002): 46-46.
2. Fuerte-Esquivel, C. R., and E. Acha. "Unified power flow controller: a critical comparison of
Newton-Raphson UPFC algorithms in power flow studies." Generation, Transmission and
Distribution, IEE Proceedings-. Vol. 144. No. 5. IET, 1997.
3. Noroozian, M., et al. "Use of UPFC for optimal power flow control." Power Delivery, IEEE
Transactions on 12.4 (1997): 1629-1634.
4. Fuerte-Esquivel, C. R., E. Acha, and H. Ambriz-Perez. "A comprehensive Newton-Raphson UPFC
model for the quadratic power flow solution of practical power networks." Power Systems, IEEE
Transactions on 15.1 (2000): 102-109.
5. Gyugyi, Laszlo, Kalyan K. Sen, and Colin D. Schauder. "The interline power flow controller concept:
68
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
a new approach to power flow management in transmission systems." Power Delivery, IEEE
Transactions on 14.3 (1999): 1115-1123.
6. Teerathana, S., and A. Yokoyama. "An optimal power flow control method of power system using
interline power flow controller (IPFC)." TENCON 2004. 2004 IEEE Region 10 Conference. Vol. 100.
IEEE, 2004.
7. Babu, AV Naresh, and S. Sivanagaraju. "Mathematical modelling, analysis and effects of interline
power flow controller (IPFC) parameters in power flow studies." Power Electronics (IICPE), 2010
India International Conference on. IEEE, 2011.
8.Gyugyi, Laszlo, Kalyan K. Sen, and Colin D. Schauder. "The interline power flow controller concept:
a new approach to power flow management in transmission systems." Power Delivery, IEEE
Transactions on 14.3 (1999): 1115-1123.
9. Shea, John. "Understanding FACTS-concepts and technology of flexible AC transmission systems
[Book Review]." Electrical Insulation Magazine, IEEE 18.1 (2002): 46-46.
10. Zhang, Yankui, Yan Zhang, and Chen Chen. "A novel power injection model of IPFC for power flow
analysis inclusive of practical constraints." Power Systems, IEEE Transactions on 21.4 (2006): 15501556.
69
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
A Study of Domestication and Foreignization Strategies in
the Persian Translation of "IL GROTTESCO QUOTIDIANO"
Laleh Mousavi
Tohid Siami
MA student,, Department of Humanities, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran
Headmaster of literature and foreign language Department of Humanities, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran
Abstract
The purpose of the present study was to investigate the use of Venuti’s domestication and
foreignization strategies in the translation of the book "il grottesco quotidiano" from Italian into
Persian. All cases of domestication and foreignization were identified and organized as single lexical
items, expressions and idiomatic expressions. The data then were analyzed according to the criteria
introduced by Venuti. In this study, Newmark's methods are also used for translating culture-specific
concepts. The results of the data analysis revealed domestication to be the dominant strategy in
rendering culture-bound lexical items or expressions.
Keywords:domestication,foreignization,culture-bound lexical items orexpressions,Venuti,Newmark,
il grottesco quotidiano
1. Introduction
The terms foreignization and domestication were introduced into translation studies (TS) by
Lawrence Venuti (1995). Generally speaking, domestication designates the type of translation in
which a transparent, fluent style is adopted to minimize the strangeness of the foreign text for target
language readers, while foreignization means a target text is produced which deliberately breaks
target conventions by retaining something of the foreignness of the original (Shuttleworth & Cowie
1997:59).
71
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The conflict between domestication and foreignization as opposite translation strategies can be
regarded as the cultural and political rather than linguistic extension of the time-worn controversy
over free translation and literal translation (Wang Dongfeng 2002：24). That is to say, only when
there are differences in both linguistic presentation and cultural connotation, domestication and
foreignization exist. The present paper seeks an objective way to test the plausibility and practical
applicability of the domestication/foreignization in the translation of culture specific lexical items
and idiomatic expression in the Persian Translation of "IL GROTTESCO QUOTIDIANO."
2. Theoretical Foundations
Domestication is a translation strategy of using “a transparent, fluent, ‘invisible’ style in order to
minimize the foreignness of the target text (TT)” (Munday 2008: 144). By contrast, foreignization is
not transparent and it eschews fluency for a more heterogeneous mix of discourses in order to
signify the difference of the foreign text (Venuti 1995).
The domestication vs. foreignization dichotomy is comparable to another age-old dichotomy, namely
that between free and literal translation. However, those two dichotomies are not synonymous. The
free vs. literal dichotomy refers to linguistic form, while the domestication vs. foreignization
dichotomy concerns the two cultures involved, i.e. whether an ST is adapted to the target culture, or
the foreign cultural elements are preserved.
In the German culture of the Classical and Romantic periods, Friedrich Schleiermacher proposed
two paths that ‘der eigentliche Uebersetzer’ can take: “Either the translator leaves the author in
peace, as much as possible, and moves the reader towards him; or he leaves the reader in peace, as
much as possible, and moves the author towards him.” (1813: 241–242). The first path is similar to
Venuti's foreignizing translation, whereas the second path is similar to Venuti's domesticating
translation.
Schleiermacher sees foreignization and domestication as binary opposites, and he explicitly claims
they must not be mixed; the translator has to opt for one or the other method and then be consistent
in its use. Combining the two methods would lead to unreliable results; the author and the reader
could completely miss each other (Schleiermacher 1813: 47). By contrast, Venuti states that
domestication and foreignization are ‘heuristic concepts designed to promote thinking and research’
rather than binary opposites (Munday: 145–146).
Both Schleiermacher and Venuti advocate foreignizing translation, but for different reasons.
Schleiermacher advocates foreignizing method because it puts the language in motion (1813: 69).
Schleiermacher is explicitly against the domesticating method because he thinks that the thought
71
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
and its expression cannot be separated. There is no way to make a foreign author speak the domestic
language as if it were his own.
The reason Venuti is opposed to domestication is not because it is impossible, but because it is
unfair. According to Venuti (1995: 20), domestication involves ‘an ethnocentric reduction of the
foreign text to target-language cultural values.’ Another negative consequence of domestication,
according to Venuti, is that it makes the translator invisible because the translation reads like an
original. Venuti therefore prefers foreignization as a form of resistance to the ‘violent, ethnocentric’
(Anglo-American) cultural values.
In the contemporary international translation field, it was Eugene Nida who first advocated
domestication (Yang 2010: 78). Nida differentiated between ‘formal’ and ‘dynamic’ (functional)
equivalence. While ‘formal equivalence’ strives to preserve form as well as content, ‘dynamic
equivalence’ aims at producing in translation an equivalent effect on the target readers that the
original text had on the original readers. Nida preferred ‘dynamic equivalence,’ mostly because he
was dealing with Bible translation, where the most important thing is to successfully carry the
message through, disregarding the form of the message.
Both domestication and foreignization implicate manipulation of the text. Whether one or the other
strategy will be applied depends on variables such as the purpose of the translation (Skopos), the
status of the receiving literary system (polysystem theory), i.e. the power relations between the
source and the target literary systems, and other variables of the historical, social and cultural
setting in which the translation takes place. In order to see why a certain strategy is used in a certain
context, we have to turn to the analysis of real translations in the following sections of the paper.
3. Methods of translation
Newmark (1988b) mentions the difference between translation methods and translation
procedures. He writes that, "while translation methods relate to whole texts, translation procedures
are used for sentences and the smaller units of language". He goes on to refer to the following
methods of translation:



Word-for-word translation: in which the SL word order is preserved and the words
translated singly by their most common meanings, out of context.
Literal translation: in which the SL grammatical constructions are converted to their nearest
TL equivalents, but the lexical words are again translated singly, out of context.
Faithful translation: it attempts to produce the precise contextual meaning of the original
within the constraints of the TL grammatical structures.
72
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016





Semantic translation: which differs from 'faithful translation' only in as far as it must take
more account of the aesthetic value of the SL text.
Adaptation: which is the freest form of translation, and is used mainly for plays (comedies)
and poetry; the themes, characters, plots are usually preserved, the SL culture is converted
to the TL culture and the text is rewritten.
Free translation: it produces the TL text without the style, form, or content of the original.
Idiomatic translation: it reproduces the 'message' of the original but tends to distort nuances
of meaning by preferring colloquialisms and idioms where these do not exist in the original.
Communicative translation: it attempts to render the exact contextual meaning of the
original in such a way that both content and language are readily acceptable and
comprehensible to the readership (1988b: 45-47).
4. Methodology
Different scholars have analyzed the strategies and procedures involved in the translation of CSIs ,
suggesting various classifications of such strategies. For the purpose of this paper, we draw upon one
of the pioneers in this field, Newmark (1988). He suggests a number of procedures for translating
CSIs, namely transference, naturalization, cultural equivalence, functional equivalence, descriptive
equivalence, synonymy, through-translation, shift or transposition, modulation, recognized
translation, translation label, compensation, componential analysis, reduction and expansion,
paraphrase, couplet, and notes. The Cultural specific concepts were culled from the ST and TT and
were classified based on The following categories: Toponyms, Anthroponyms, Means of
transportation, Date, Food and Drink, Idioms, Measuring system, Scholastic reference.
5. Data Analysis
The collected data were analysed according to the following criteria.
Transference: According to Newmark, "Transference is the process of transferring a SL word to a TL
text as a translation procedure" 1. When the translators face the following cases, they should use the
method of transference: name of all living or dead people, geographical names, name of the periodical
and newspapers, plays, films, etc.
Newmark (1988, p.81)
73
1
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Source language
Target language
Floro d'Avanza
‫فلَرٍ داٍ ًتسا‬
San martino di
Costrozza
‫سي هرتيٌَ دی کاسترتسا‬
CSCs1
Method of
translation
Anthroponym
Toponym
Word –for word
Word –for word
Naturalization: "This procedure succeeds transference and adapts the SL word first to the normal
pronunciation, then to the normal morphology of the TL".
Source language
Target language
CSCs
Teresa
‫ترزا‬
Anthroponym
Method of
translation
Word –for word
La Carta
‫کارت پستال‬
Object
Word –for word
La Limonata calda
‫ليوًَاد گرم‬
Drink
Word –for word
Cultural Equivalent: This strategy is "an approximate translation where a SL cultural word is
translated by a TL cultural word" 2.
Source language
In bianco
Il vino
Target language
‫برًج سفيذ‬
CSCs
Food
‫هشرٍبات الکلی‬
Drink
Method of translation
Communicative
translation
Communica
tive translation
Functional equivalent: According to Newmark, functional equivalent "applied to cultural words,
requires the use of a culture-free word, sometimes with a new specific term"1.
Cultural specific concepts 1
74
2
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Source language
Una buona bottiglia
Target language
‫بطری‬
CSCs
Drink
‫یک‬
Method
of
translation
Literal translation
‫ًَشيذًی عالی‬
Descriptive equivalent: In this strategy the translator uses some descriptions to clarify the meaning
for his audience. Using this strategy enable us to have a correct perception of CSIs by using other
words and phrases.
Source language
Il luogo rinomato
Target language
CSCs
Religious celebration
‫هکاى هقذس‬
Method
of
translation
Literal translation
Componential analysis: Componential analysis is defined as "comparing an SL word with a TL word
which has a similar meaning but is not an obvious one-to-one equivalent, by demonstrating first
their common and then their differing sense components. Normally the SL word has more specific
meaning than the TL word"2
Source language
Target language
Means
of
transportation
‫اتَبَس‬
Pullman
CSCs
Method
translation
Communicative
translation
of
Synonymy: According to Newmark, synonymy is defined as a "near TL equivalent to a SL word" 3.
Source language
L'uovo
Target language
CSCs
Food
‫تخن هرغ‬
Method
translation
Word-for word
of
Modulation: In this strategy the translators try to create the message of the SL in the TL in
conformity with the current norms of the TL. 4
1
2
Newmark (1988, p.114)
3
4
75
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Source language
Un aspetto sinistro
Target language
CSCs
concept
‫چْرُ شَم‬
Method
of
translation
Literal translation
Paraphrase: "This is an amplification or explanation of the meaning of a segment of the text” 1.
Source language
Convogliare verso sè
quel fiume di miele
Target language
CSCs
‫ٍرق را بِ ًفع‬
Idiom
Method
of
translation
Idiomatic translation
‫خَد برگرداًذ‬
Through-translation: It concerns mostly the literal translation of common collocations, names of
organizations and some popular phrases.
Source language
Una scenata
L'ansante
Target language
CSCs
‫جارٍ جٌجال‬
Concept
Method
of
translation
Literal translation
‫ًفس‬
Concept
Literal translation
‫ًفس‬
‫زًاى‬
References
English
1.Baker, Mona. 1998. Routledge Encyclopedia of Translation Studies. London and New York:
Routledge. pp.240-242.
2.Lefevere, André, ed. (1992). Translation/History/Culture: A Sourcebook. Edition 2003, Taylor &
Francis e-Library. London – New York: Routledge.
3.Munday, Jeremy (2008). Introducing Translation Studies: Theories and Applications. 2nd Edition.
4.London – New York: Routledge.
5.Newmark, Peter (1988). Approaches to Translation. New York – London: Prentice Hall
6.International.
7.Nida, Eugene. 2001. Language and Culture-Contexts in Translation. Shanghai: Shanghai Foreign
8.Language Education Press.
76
1
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
9.Schleiermacher, Friedrich (1813). Ueber die verschiedenen Methoden des Uebersezens.
10.Reproduced in Das Problem des Übersetzens 1963, ed. Hans Joachim Störig. Stuttgart: Henry
Goverts Verlag, 38–69.
11.Shuttleworth, M. & M. Cowie. 1997. Dictionary of Translation Studies. Manchester, UK: St Jerome
Publishing.
12.Venuti, Lawrence (1995). The Translator’s Invisibility: A History of Translation. London - New
York: Routledge.
13.Venuti, Lawrence (1998a). The Scandals of Translation: Towards an Ethics of Difference. London New York: Routledge.
14.Venuti, Lawrence (1998b). Strategies of translation. Baker, Mona, ed. Routledge Encyclopedia of
Translation Studies. Edition 2003, Taylor & Francis e-Library. London – New York: Routledge, 240–
244.
‫فارسی‬
)‫ دیروز و امروز (دانشگبه فردوسی مشهد‬،‫ " نظریه ترجمه‬،‫ علی‬،‫ خساعی فر‬-15
‫ اجتمبعی به بررسی مسئله برابری در ترجمه ادبیبت داستبنی از انگلیسی به‬-‫ "رویکردی نشبنه شنبختی‬،1386 ،‫ توحید‬،‫ صیبمی‬-16
.‫رسبله دوره دکترای زببنشنبسی همگبنی‬،"‫فبرسی‬
،22 ‫ شمبره‬,6 ‫ دوره‬،‫ مطبلعبت ترجمه‬،"‫ "برخورد بب هم آیی هب در ترجمه هبی انگلیسی به فبرسی‬،1387 ‫ تببستبن‬،‫ گیتی‬،‫ کریم خبنلویی‬-17
9 -22 ‫از صفحه‬
55-63‫ صص‬،32 ‫ شمبره‬،‫ سبل نهم‬،‫ مترجم‬،"‫ "تعبدل در ترجمه‬،1379 ،‫ منصور‬،‫ کوشب‬-18
12-15 ‫ صص‬،74 ‫ شمبره‬،‫ سبل چهبردهم‬،)‫ علی (مترجم‬،‫ خساعی فر‬،"‫ "استراتژیهبی ترجمه‬،1374 ،‫ الرنس‬،‫ ونوتی‬-19
.‫ پبیبننبمه کبرشنبسی ارشد‬،"‫ در ایران‬80 ‫ "بومی سبزی و بیگبنه سبزی در ترجمه ادبیبت کودک در دهه‬1391 ،‫ سلمب زینب‬،‫ یسدی‬-20
77
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Comparison of PID Type Controller Performance in
Microgrid Frequency Deviation Enhancement Using MFO
Algorithm
Maryam Houshyari
Hossein Shayeghi
Abdollah Younesi
Electrical Engineering Department, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran
Abstract
This paper deals with an MFO algorithm based design of load frequency different PID type controller
for a microgrid consisting of solar photovoltaic, diesel engine generator, fuel cell with the equaelectrolyzer and ultra-capacitor has been considered for simulation studies. The intermittent nature
of solar power may cause serious problem of frequency fluctuation. Therefore, IPD and PDPI
controllers designed for the purpose of minimization of frequency deviation and results are
compared with PID controller. Control gains of the different controllers are optimized using Mothflame optimization algorithm. Performance study of the power system is carried out under different
perturbation condition. It is found that MFO based optimized PDPI controller is very superior to PID
and IPD controllers in terms of settling time, overshoots and some performance indexes.
Keywords: Microgrid, Load frequency control, MFO algorithm, PID controller.
1.Introduction
Any country in the world, electricity is one of the most demanding forms of energy in every one's
daily life. In recent years the increasing concerns about the limited fossil fuel resources, their impact
on the environment, especially the global warming and the harmful effects of carbon emissions have
created a new demand for clean and sustainable energy sources [1]. The gap between power
78
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
generation and demand is widening day-by-day which has forced electric power utilities to supply
power to the customers erratically. Not only this, there are many places in the world which are yet to
be electrified due to energy shortage issue. Moreover, growing concern on deteriorating
environmental condition has led the electrical power utilities round the world to search renewable
energy sources based power generation technologies. Renewable energy sources based power
generation technologies are clean, sustainable and environment friendly [2]. Solar power generation
is one of the most promising renewable power generation technologies. Fuel cell also has potential to
be considered as one of the green power sources of the future. However, renewable energy sources
are mostly intermittent, so they can’t supply quality power constantly. This problem solved by
combining more renewable energy sources together with non-renewable or storage devices [3].
Currently, the microgrid power system is expected to create the smart power system for rural and
isolated areas due to some advantages such as high quality and reliability, increasing efficiency,
reducing costs, and environmentally friendly etc. The oscillations of load demand lead to mismatch
between the power generation and load demand resulting in mismatch in system frequency (f) from
the nominal value.
In the past, many researches have been proposed for controlling the oscillations of the frequency in
microgrid. Many control strategies have been proposed in the literature. In [4], optimization of
controller parameters proposed. Also in Refs. [5-6] variable structure control and in [7] energy
storage controllers have been reported
The Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) controller has its widespread acceptance in the industrial
processes due to its simplicity in understanding and its applicability to a large class of process having
different dynamics [9]. Thus, in this paper type PID controllers designed simultaneously, for any
renewable / non renewable energy sources. Type PID controllers are IPD and PDPI controllers
presented in [10].
In the recent years, optimization techniques are being used to obtain the optimal solutions efficiently
to the problems related to the operation and control of hybrid power system. Thus, the main
motivation of the present work triggers from the use of this novel Moth-Flame Optimization (MFO)
for optimizing controllers parameters for frequency regulation of the proposed hybrid power
system. The main inspiration of this optimizer is the navigation method of moths in nature called
transverse orientation. The statistical results on the benchmark functions show that this algorithm is
able to provide very promising and competitive results [11].
In this paper, a microgrid consisting of Photovoltaic (PV), Diesel Engine Generator (DEG), Fuel Cell
(FC), Aqua Electrolyzer (AE) and Ultra-Capacitor (UC) is proposed. The power system frequency
deviates for sudden changes in load or solar PV power. The controllers are installed before the
sources to alleviate this frequency deviation. The gain of the type PID controller is optimized using
79
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
MFO algorithm to mitigate frequency deviation owing to sudden generation/load change and
dynamic performance of PID controller compared with the IPD and PDPI controller.
2.Proposed Microgrid System
The generalized block diagram of the studied microgrid is shown in Fig. 1. The system consists of
diesel generator, FC, aqua electrolyzer, solar thermal and Ultra-Capacitor.The mathematical models
with first order transfer functions, fuel cell, aqua electrolyzer, PV system, diesel engine generator are
shown in this section. Nominal system parameters of the investigated microgrid model are presented
in [1].
Cont roll er
DEG
Cont roll er
AE
Cont roll er
FC
Cont roll er
UC
PV
a.
b.
PL
Fig 1. Block diagram of the hybrid power system
A. Diesel Generator
Diesel generator can be used for emergency power supply. With sudden increase in load, it is
necessary that a diesel engine prime. Moreover, it has a fast dynamic response and have a good
capability of fluctuation rejection. The operation of DEG block may be given by simple transfer
functions as stated in Eqs. (1).
G DEG (S) 
(1)
K DEG
T DEG s  1
B. Solar PV system
Photovoltaic (PV) system converts the solar radiation coming from the sum into electrical energy.
The output power of the system is given by:
PPV  S {1  0.05(T a  25)}
(2)
Where, ɳ is conversion efficiency factor ranging from 9% to 12%, S (=4084 m 2) is the measured area
a is ambient temperature in degree Celsius. The transfer
function of the PV system is given as [12]:
G PV (S ) 
C.
PPV
1


1  ST PV
(3)
Aqua Electrolyzer
81
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
AE apart from being used as a device to produce hydrogen for a FC unit, it also serves as the
controllable load. With the help of proper controller action, AE absorb the rapidly fluctuating output
power from wind turbine generators and solar photovoltaic power system. The transfer function
model of aqua electrolyzer can be expressed by [12]:
G A E (s ) 
K AE
1  sT A E
(4)
D. Fuel Cell
Energy of fuel directly into electrical energy without classical combustion. Because of high efficiency
and reliability, modularity, fuel flexibility, having no geographical limitations and being environment
friendly, FC are seen as very prominent alternative to be used along with intermittent sources like
wind turbine generator and solar photovoltaic that can be used in interconnected and islanded micro
grid. For low frequency domain analysis it is represented by a first order lag transfer function model
given as [19]:
G FC (s ) 
K FC
1  sT FC
(5)
E. Ultra-Capacitor
Ultracapacitors are electrochemical type capacitors which are used to store electrical energy during
surplus generation and deliver high power within a short duration of time duration of time during
the peak-load demand. Similarly the transfer function of the ultracapacitor can be represented as a
first order lag:
GUC (s ) 
F.
(6)
K UC
1  sTUC
Adopted Control Strategy
In this paper, type PID controllers are equipped for diesel generator, fuel cell, aqua electrolyzer, and
ultracapacitor. Input to each controller is the sum of the error in supply demand and product of
frequency deviation of power system and the gain. PID controller is one of the most commonly used
conventional controllers used by the process industries. It is, easily, realizable and it offers superior
performance in eliminating steady state errors and improving overall system dynamic response [13].
The architecture of the considered type PID controller is depicted in Fig. 2.
OUTPUT
INPUT
(a)
OUTPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
(c)
(b)
Fig. 2. Type PID controller; (a) PID Controller, (b) IPD Controller, (c) PDPI Controller.
81
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
3.Moth-Flame Optimization Algorithm
Moth-Flame Optimization (MFO) algorithm is a novel nature-inspired algorithm. The main
inspiration of this algorithm is the navigating mechanism of moths in nature called transverse
orientation [11]. Moths fly in night by maintaining a fixed angle with respect to the moon, a very
effective mechanism for travelling in a straight line for long distances. However, these fancy insects
are trapped in a useless/deadly spiral path around artificial lights. In this paper, the MFO algorithm
are used to verify the performance of PID controller IPD and PDPI. In this paper, we consider the
ITSE performance criteria, of frequency deviation as the objective function. The fitness function is
the objective function we want to minimize. By minimizing the fitness function we get the optimal
parameters of PID, IPD and PDPI controllers.
4.Simulation Results and Discussions
MFO algorithm has been applied to optimal tune the different gains of the traditional controllers
incorporated in the studied microgrid, of Fig. 1 for frequency stabilization. In the present work, the
performance of ‘‘PID controller’’ is compared with ‘‘IPD and PDPI controller’’and the effectiveness of
the proposed IPD and PDPIcontroller is examined by simulation studies under two perturbation
conditions like (a) 1% step increase in load demand and 2% step in solar PV power, (b) 1% random
change in load demand. Results (overshoot and settling time) presented in Table 1.
A. Performance analysis with 1% step increase in load demand and 2% step in solar PV power:
A step disturbance of 0.01 p.u. is applied to the load demand at t= 0.5 s. The profile of Δf for the
different system configurations are shown in Fig. 3(a). From this Figures, it may be noted that the
proposed ‘‘IPD and PDPI controllers’’ system configuration outperforms the other system
configuration (i.e. ‘‘PID controller’’) in terms of settling time and overshoot. The power output of the
diesel generator are shown in Figs. 4(a) for PID, IPD and PDPI controllers. Diesel power plot shows
that for ‘‘PDPI controller’’, the power input is less, which is better, as the diesel generator is an
nonrenewable energy source. Now, a step disturbance of 0.02 p.u. is applied to the solar PV power.
The profiles of Δf for the different system configurations are shown in Fig. 3(b). From this Figures, it
may be noted that the proposed ‘‘IPD and PDPI controllers’’ system configuration is better the other
system configuration in terms of settling time and overshoot. The power output of the diesel
generator shown in Figs. 4(b). Figs. 4(b) shows similar results, alike while the 1% step increase load
demand.Results (settling time and overshoot) presented in Table 1.
82
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Table 1. Analysis of different controllers sytem with 1% step increase in load demand
Disturbances at
Disturbances at
Load Demand
Controller OS
TS(sec)
Controller OS
TS(sec)
PID
0.01
1.8236
PID
0.011
7.8982
IPD
0.0054
1.9274
Solar PV Power IPD
5.7718e
10
PDPI
0.0063
1.9274
PDPI
8.1944e-4 6.2491
Fig.3. Frequency deviation-(a) Change in load demand; (b) Change in photovoltaic power, Solid (PDPI
Controller), Dashed-dotted (IPD Controller); Dashed (PID Controller)
Fig.4. Diesel power output deviation -(a) Change in load demand; (b) Change in photovoltaic power,
Solid (PDPI Controller), Dashed-dotted (IPD Controller); Dashed (PID Controller)
B. Performance analysis with random change in load demand
The effect of load variation is undertaken into account as random load change as an input
disturbance in the proposed microgrid to examine the performance of different system
configurations. Due to this random load variation, the nature of Δf is shown in Fig. 5. Even due to the
randomness of the variation in load demand, the proposed ‘‘IPD and PDPI controllers’’ system
configuration is giving better performance than the other system configuration.
83
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Fig. 5. Frequency deviation with 1% random in load demand. , Solid (PDPI Controller), Dashed-dotted
(IPD Controller); Dashed (PID Controller)
C. Performance analysis based on performance indices
The values of IAE and ISTE, as defined in Eqs. (7)-(8), are calculated for the three system
configurations at the end of developed program. The values of these performance indices are
featured in Table 2 on sample basis corresponding to 1% step increase in load demand. From this
Table, it may be noted that the proposed ‘‘IPD controller’’ system configuration is the best
configuration for the studied microgrid over ‘‘PID controller’’ model in terms of system stability.

IA E 

f dt
(7)
0

ITSE 
 t . f
2
.dt
(8)
0
Table 2. Values of different with 1% step increase in load demand.
Controller
Performance Index
PID(×10-6)
IPD(×10-6)
PDPI(×10-6)
IAE
3200
1600
2200
ITSE
13.27
3.0666
5.3891
84
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
5.Conclusion
The microgrid requires a control system for the purpose of minimization of frequency deviation. In
this paper, in order to reduce frequency deviation under varying condition of load and solar PV
power, IPD and PDPI controllers has been designed for the proposed system using MFO algorithm. It
has been that the proposed controllers outperform the PID controller. IPD and PDPI system
configuration works very well under normal condition and it can tolerate satisfactorily the load
variation as well as intermittent solar PV power condition. Under small random load system
configuration also behaves well.
Refrences
1.Das, D. C., Roy, A. K., & Sinha, N. (2011, December). PSO based frequency controller for wind-solardiesel hybrid energy generation/energy storage system. In Energy, Automation, and Signal (ICEAS),
2011 International Conference on (pp. 1-6). IEEE.
2.Shankar, G., & Mukherjee, V. (2016). Load frequency control of an autonomous hybrid power
system by quasi-oppositional harmony search algorithm. International Journal of Electrical Power &
Energy Systems, 78, 715-734.
3.Pena, R., Cárdenas, R., Proboste, J., Clare, J., & Asher, G. (2008). Wind–diesel generation using
doubly fed induction machines. Energy Conversion, IEEE Transactions on, 23(1), 202-214.
4.Perera, A. T. D., Attalage, R. A., Perera, K. K. C. K., & Dassanayake, V. P. C. (2013). A hybrid tool to
combine multi-objective optimization and multi-criterion decision making in designing standalone
hybrid energy systems. Applied Energy, 107, 412-425.
5.Nandar, C. S. A. (2013). Robust PI control of smart controllable load for frequency stabilization of
microgrid power system. Renewable energy, 56, 16-23.
6.Bhatti, T. S., Al-Ademi, A. A. F., & Bansal, N. K. (1997). Load frequency control of isolated wind diesel
hybrid power systems. Energy conversion and management, 38(9), 829-837.
7.Mendis, N., & Muttaqi, K. (2013). An integrated control approach for standalone operation of a
hybridised wind turbine generating system with maximum power extraction capability.
International Journal of Electrical Power & Energy Systems, 49, 339-348.
8.Senjyu, T., Nakaji, T., Uezato, K., & Funabashi, T. (2005). A hybrid power system using alternative
energy facilities in isolated island. Energy Conversion, IEEE Transactions on, 20(2), 406-414.
9.Das, D. C., Roy, A. K., & Sinha, N. (2012). GA based frequency controller for solar thermal–diesel–
wind hybrid energy generation/energy storage system. International Journal of Electrical Power &
Energy Systems, 43(1), 262-279.
10.Vukic, Z., & Kuljaca, O. (2002). Lectures on pid controllers. Faculty of Electrical Engineering and
Computing University of Zagreb.
11.Mirjalili, S. (2015). Moth-flame optimization algorithm: A novel nature-inspired heuristic
paradigm. Knowledge-Based Systems, 89, 228-249.
85
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
12.Lee, D. J., & Wang, L. (2008). Small-signal stability analysis of an autonomous hybrid renewable
energy power generation/energy storage system part I: time-domain simulations. Energy Conversion,
IEEE Transactions on, 23(1), 311-320.
12.Shayeghi, H., Jalili, A., & Shayanfar, H. A. (2008). Multi-stage fuzzy load frequency control using
PSO. Energy Conversion and Management, 49(10), 2570-2580.
86
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Analysis of the Relationship Between Social Capital and
Job Satisfaction in Organizations
Masoud Darabi
Nasrin Azizian Kohan
MA student of sports management (Physical Education and Sports Science, Mhaghegh Ardabili, Iran)
Assistant professor of sports management (Physical Education and Sports Science, Mhaghegh Ardabili, Iran)
Abstract
Social capital is an important social issue a means to achieve other forms of capital, including
economic, human and cultural capital. One of the impressionable important of social capital, is job
satisfaction. Thus, the present study was to understand the importance of social issues and accepting
these assumptions that job satisfaction in different organizations،under the influence of social capital
people employed at the organization. pays off to explain the theoretical and empirical literature on
social capital and its impact on job satisfaction and in this explained present research at home and
abroad through the meta-analysis examined. The theoretical framework is based on the theory of
Putnam, Bourdieu, Coleman's social capital and Fisher, Hapax, Hersey and Blanchard on job
satisfaction and a combination of several other theories in this area is, and the effect of independent
variables, including dimensions of social capital is measured on dependent variable job satisfaction.
The methods used in this study, is documents and is a kind of meta-analysis. meta-analysis the
findings of the research conducted indicates that the dimensions of social capital variables (trust,
partnership, cooperation, solidarity, empathy and mutual respect, social networks) and the
dependent variable of job satisfaction, there is a significant and positive relationship.
Keywords: social capital,job satisfaction,partnership,empathy,Cooperation
1.Introduction
In the traditional view of management development, financing, economic, physical and human
resources played a most important role, but in the current era for development, executives more
than the economic capital, physical and human need, they need social capital, for without the use of
capital other capital improvements will be done. In a society that lacks sufficient social capital other
funds are wasted. Thus, social capital is considered as a guiding principle for achieving development
and Successful managers are able to communicate with the community to meet the production and
87
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
development of social capital]1[The role of social capital, physical capital and financial organizations
is very important. If organizations do not have the social capital in the community, other funds will
be value added]2[Therefore, managers should pay much attention to the attitude of the staff, because
the attitudes, behavior and can affect people of potential employees to their actual capabilities]3[.
Job satisfaction least three reasons is very important for managers. (1) There is ample evidence that
dissident leave the Organization. (2) Studies show that happy employees of better health and live
longer. (3) Job satisfaction is a phenomenon that transcends the boundaries of organizations and
companies and its effects in the private lives of employees can also be seen outside the
organization]4[.
From one side, social capital concepts in the present age is the key to the success of staff and On the
other side, job satisfaction, increasing productivity and providing better service to the Clientele]5[.
Because, according to the original dimensions of social capital, trust, social norms, social awareness
and community involvement and civic and connecting people with each other, If more people in an
organization and their career planning and process involved, have higher social awareness and the
social norms of cooperation and trust more commonplace, have higher job satisfaction from their
work and higher job satisfaction, A more efficient organization and successfully lead its members
and physical and mental well-being and finally helps community mental health [6].
Considering the importance and the role that social capital plays in creating job satisfaction on the
other side the importance of job satisfaction, the study is designed to investigate the factors affecting
job satisfaction in terms of social capital. This study issue is examination of the impact of social
capital on job satisfaction based on previous research.
2.Method
This study is a documentary research using meta-analysis methods based on investigation and
previous internal and abroad research in recent years, deals the subject.
Meta-analysis of previous research
A. Research conducted abroad:
Wing Chun Chang (2009) in an article entitled evaluation of social capital and personal satisfaction in
Taiwan to the conclusion that Partnerships with nonprofit organizations and religious participation
and charities and social services was positively associated with the level of personal satisfaction.
Other results of this research are:
88
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Social capital has inversely related with age.
Social capital is positively related to net income.
Partnerships with nonprofit organizations and religious participation is positively related to the
amount of social capital. It states that social capital is complementary friendly and religion behaviors
[7].
Yamaguchi, Ikushi (2012) in a study by an examination of self-determination, Organizational social
capital, Job satisfaction and organizational commitment in both Japan and America countries
Concluded that social capital has a profound impact on job satisfaction and organizational
commitment [8].
Boas and Wind (2012) in his study exploring the relationship employment- based social capital, Job
stress, Burnout and intent to leave among child protections workers concluded that social capital
indicators (trust, understanding and mutual respect, cooperation) are effective in reducing job stress
and job satisfaction. It is much more pronounced for older workers [9].
B. Research conducted Inside:
Safarzadeh (2010) by examining the effect of social capital indicators on occupational activities Staff,
first, addressed to measure the social capital among faculty members and in examining the
relationship and its impact on job satisfaction concluded that social capital has a direct and
significant impact on physical activity faculty members' job [10].
Aryan nasab (2011) in a study aimed to evaluate the impact on job satisfaction District 3 Education
Teachers of Qom, components of social capital (trust, participation, support, social interaction and
network membership) should be considered. Came to the conclusion that a significant relationship
between these components with teacher's job satisfaction. The results show that about 65% of
changing teachers' job satisfaction by variable Social capital can be explained [11].
3.Results and Discussion
Given the number of components and different aspects of the review, the results are very numerous
and varied. Here even the opportunity to provide a detailed summary of the results is not. As
mentioned, different research results are compared to distinguish different aspects here is what the
outcome of the investigation. Here and in aggregate findings can be related to admission of error and
89
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
taking advantage of the scale Likert judge on the status of work environments. According to the final
status of social capital in each of the aspects described as follows:
The top 60 percent: good or high condition
Between 40 and 59 percent: state average
Below 40 percent: unfavorable or down
Relationship between social capital and job satisfaction
In general, social capital theory with an emphasis on listed and analysis of the benefits of social ties
at different levels, gives a new analysis of satisfaction at work. With regard to the collection and
analysis of the theoretical foundations that were cited in this section, social capital variables as the
basis for job satisfaction was chosen analysis. If you check this variable can be used to form and
subject matter were testing relevant theory to accommodate the requirements and conditions of the
studied population.

Significantly between the social capital and employees' job satisfaction and the relationship
between the two variables are directly related. With the increase of social capital, i.e.
employees, their job satisfaction increases.
 There is a significant relationship between cohesion and job satisfaction there. Satisfaction
with distinct social organizations in order to destroy jobs and are harmful for satisfaction.
The results indicated that the success of individual features it depends on the organization's social
status. Employees who earn higher social capital that is placed at the center of social networks, may
during their working life enjoy their professional development. Social needs of fundamental human
need they tend to have intimate relationship with your colleagues and also be accepted by the group.
Thus improving cooperation between people makes improving job satisfaction and increase the
motivation of individuals. Human relations and solidarity probably more than any other factor in job
satisfaction is important, people interested work with people they like and can cope with them. They
will work good for president. And when he does not like, leave your job. Build trust and friendly
relations is the first step the responsibility of the authorities is in the workplace, which is a part of
society. If organization officials create trust among employees and also note the informal relations
and programs need to increase informal and friendly relations between their employees, Meanwhile,
organizations can reduce costs, and also increase their productivity.
91
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The proposed model for explaining the relationship between social capital and job
satisfaction
References
1- Alvani, M, Shrvani,A, social capital (concepts, theory and applications), Mani Press, 2006
2-Field, John, Social Capital, Routledge Taylor Francis Group, London and New York, 2004
3- Robbins, Stephen IP-2004, Organizational Behavior, translation Arabs and Mohammad Ali
Parsaeian, Tehran: Cultural Research Bureau. Fifth Edition.
4- Stoner, James, Freeman, Edward, management, leadership and control, translated by Mohammad
Erabi and Ali Parsaeian. Tehran, Institute for Trade Studies and Research,2004
5- Delve, cultural pathology examination of the organizational culture and approach, strategy,
culture, 2008
6- Taj bakhsh, K, trust and democracy and the development of social capital, Tehran, Shiraz
Publishing,2005
7-Chang Y. Gender differences in relationship between social capital and individual smoking and
drinking behavior in Taiwan, Journal homepage, social science & medicine, 67, pp 1321-1330, 2009
8-Yamaguchi, Ikushi, A Japan- us cross-cultural study of relationship among organizational social
capital, job satisfaction, and organizational commitment, International Journal of Intercultural
Relations, 20012
9-Boyas, Javier, Leslie H. Wind, Exploring the relationship employment- based social capital, Job
stress, Burnout and intent to leave among child protections workers. An age-based path analysis
model children and youth services Review, vole 34, pp 50-62, 2012
10-Safarzadeh, H., Ahmed Sharif, M, Zackery, A, the effect of social capital indicators on occupational
activities of faculty members, Journal of Educational Technology, Issue 2, Pages 152-145, 2010
11-Aryayi Nasab, Z, to investigate the impact on job satisfaction District 3 Qom, Master Thesis, 2010
91
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Entanglement of Non-inertial Fermions is not Invariably
Suitable for Superdense coding
Mehrnoosh Farahmand
Hosein Mohammadzadeh
Hossein Mehri-Dehnavi
Robabeh Rahimi
Department of Physics, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, 5619911367, Ardabil, Iran
Department of Physics, Babol University of Technology, 47148-71167, Babol, Iran.
Department of Physics, Science and Research Branch, Islamic Azad University, Tehran, Iran
Abstract
Two particles, even being far from each other have quantum correlation as a result of the existence
of entanglement in between them. Therefore, information can be shared by entangled particles,
sitting in separate places. Superdense coding is one of the quantum protocols that relies on
entanglement. In this paper, we study superdense coding with an non-inertial observer in beyond
single mode approximation. We investigate the probability of success for superdense coding and
quantum correlation of the state. Entanglement behavior is studied considering an entanglement
measure so called logarithmic negativity. Comparing logarithmic negativity with probability of
superdense coding is shown these quantities have different behaviors, particularly, when the beyond
single mode approximation is strong.
Keywords: superdense coding, entanglement, non-inertial frame
1.Introduction
Entanglement has central importance in quantum information theory. Since world is relativistic and
many implementations of quantum information tasks require relativistic systems, relativistic effects
in quantum information have been exposed in vast domain of researches.
92
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Entanglement treatments and its application in quantum information processing have been
investigated for non-inertial observers in single mode approximation (Mehri-Dehnavi at al., 2011;
Mehri-Dehnavi at al., 2015). It has been shown that entanglement in infinite acceleration limit is nonzero between spinor modes in single mode approximation (Alsing, at al., 2006). For exploitation of
how entanglement is played a role in presence of Rindler horizon, the results have been extended to
beyond single mode approximation (Bruschi, at al., 2010).
The main purpose of this research is to study superdense coding (Bennett, at al., 1992) with an noninertial observer in beyond single mode approximation. We compare the probability of success in
superdense coding with the logarithmic negativity (Peres, at al., 1996). It is shown these quantities
have different behaviours in beyond single mode approximation.
2.Superdense coding
Superdense coding process (Bennett, at al., 1992; Rahimi, at al,. 2006) begins with a pair of
entangled two-level particles that is shared between Alice, as sender, and Bob, as receiver. An EPR
pair (Einstein, at al., 1935) or a Bell state, in the two-dimension Hilbert space of the two particles is
used, that is a maximally entangled. Suppose Alice and Bob share a Bell state,
〉
√
( 〉 〉
〉 〉),
〉
, as follows
(1)
where subscripts A and B show Alice's qubit and Bob's one, respectively. Alice has a two-bit message,
00, 01, 10, or 11, that she wants to send it to Bob. Alice operates one of the four unitary operators,
on her qubit. Therefore, the initial Bell state, Eq. (1), transforms to one of the four
orthonormal Bell states. Then Alice transmits her manipulated qubit for Bob. Bob performs a
measurement in the Bell-basis, that is yielded one of the four distinctive results, based the outcome,
the initial two-bit message is distinguishable. So in the super dense coding a classical two-bit
message is encoded by one of the four Bell states, by the sender, and the receiver decodes this
quantum state by a suitable measurement and achieves the original information.
93
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
3.Superdense coding in non-inertial frame
Alice and Bob, as two inertial observers, start the process by sharing a maximally entangled twoqubit state, an EPR pair, such as Eq. (1). Consider Alice remains at rest and Bob accelerates
uniformly. The Minkowski vacuum and one particle modes from Bob's view point is expanded in
terms of the corresponding Rindler vacuum and one particle modes in the regions I and II (Alsing, at
al., 2006; Bruschi, at al., 2010), as follows.
〉
〉
〉
〉
〉
〉
where
〉
〉
(
(
〉 ,
〉 ,
)) with
(2)
𝜔 (
) is the parameter equal to acceleration,
and
which indicated the presence probability of particle in right or left Rindler regions, respectively, are
the complex numbers that satisfy
cases that
and
,
and
-. For simplicity, we only consider the
are real. Therefore, the initially shared state, Eq. (1) can be rewritten in terms of
left and right Rindler regions such as follow
〉
√
〉
where
〉
〉
√
〉
〉
〉
√
√
〉
〉
〉+,
(3)
〉 . Alice applies one of the operators,
〉
*
√
〉
〉
*
〉
〉
to her qubit as follows
〉+,
*
〉
〉
〉
〉+,
*
〉
〉
〉
〉+,
*
〉
〉
〉
〉+.
(4)
Suppose Alice has been used the operator I which does not change the state (3). Then the Alice’s
manipulated qubit is sent to Bob. Now Bob has both qubits in his position. The Rindler region I and II
94
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
are causally disconnected and no information propagates between them. Bob is constrained to move
in the region I, thus the density matrix is obtained by tracing out the region II, as follows
〉〈
*
〉〈
〉〈
〉〈
(
〉〈
〉〈
)+.
(5)
Bob performs a Bell-basis measurement to decode the classical information, and gets the following
results
Table 1
The Results of measurement in Bell-basis by Bob
〈
Probability
finding
Bell states
of
in the
|
(
〉
|
)
〈
|
〉
|
(
)
〈
|
〉
|
(
)
〈
|
〉
|
(
)
The results of Table 1 show that the probability of success for superdense coding is
(
) . Thus the measurement by Bob on the density matrix after tracing out the region
II depends on the acceleration parameter, r, and the presence probability of particle in the left or in
the right Rindler regions. If
, then single mode approximation is achieved. The probability of
success for superdense coding as a function of the acceleration parameter, r, and the presence
probability of particle in the right Rindler region, is shown in Figure. 1. This function is decreasing
with respect to increasing r and with respect to decreasing . We employ the logarithmic negativity
to quantify the entanglement of
in Eq. (5), (Peres, at al., 1996). the logarithmic negativity is
defined as
(
where
)
∑
(
),
is the partial transpose of the density matrix
and
(
) are the eigenvalues of
partial transpose of density matrix . Thus the logarithmic negativity for Eq. (5), is given by
95
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
(
)
{
}.
(6)
Figure 14 The probability of success in
terms of the acceleration parameter, r,
and the presence probability, .
Figure 15 The logarithmic negativity
in terms of the acceleration
parameter, r, and the presence
probability, .
96
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Figure. 2 shows the logarithmic negativity as a function of the acceleration parameter, r, and the
presence probability of particle in the right Rindler region,
. In the single mode approximation,
, the logarithmic negativity is a descending function of acceleration, r. So long as the particle is
in the right Rindler region, i.e. it has a small probability to be in the left Rindler region, and for small
value of acceleration, then the logarithmic negativity has similar behaviours to the probability of
success with respect to the acceleration and with respect to the presence probability of particle in
the right Rindler region. It is clear that the logarithmic negativity is decreasing with increasing r and
with decreasing
. However, if the particle has larger probability of being in the left Rindler region
and for large value of the acceleration, the logarithmic negativity has different behaviours with
respect to the probability of success. The logarithmic negativity is an increasing function of r, and a
descending function of
.
c.
We investigated the superdense coding by an accelerated observer in beyond single
mode approximation. The probability of success is dependent to acceleration.
d.
In Single mode approximation, qr =1, and for r=0, probability of success is
maximum, i. e. P=1, where is given the original superdense coding (Bennett, at al., 1992). In
this situation the logarithmic negativity is also maximum, N=1. By increasing the acceleration,
the probability of success and the logarithmic negativity are decreasing functions of the
acceleration, as expected.
In beyond single mode approximation, by increasing the acceleration, the probability of success is
always decreasing with respect to increasing the acceleration and with respect to decreasing the
presence probability of particle in right Rindler region. The logarithmic negativity behaves the same
for the small values of acceleration and the large values of presence probability of particle in right
Rindler region. Nevertheless, when the particle has larger probability of being in the left Rindler
region and for the large values of the acceleration, the logarithmic negativity has different behaviors
to the probability of success with respect to the acceleration and with respect to the presence
probability of particle in the right Rindler region. Therefore, the logarithmic negativity is not a
reliable measure for these ranges of the acceleration and the presence probability of particle in right
Rindler. In fact, the logarithmic negativity is not shown suitable entanglement for superdense coding,
97
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
at least, for the special ranges of the acceleration and the presence probability of particle in the right
Rindler region.
References
1.Alsing, P. M., Fuentes-Schuller, I., Mann, R. B., & Tessier T. E. (2006). “Entanglement of Dirac fields
in noninertial frames”. Phys. Rev. A 74, 032326.
2.Bennett, C. H., & Wiesner, S. J. (1992). “Communication via one-and two-particle operators on
Einstein-Podolsky-Rosen states”. Phys. Rev. Lett. 69, 2881.
3.Bruschi, D. E., Louko, J., Mart ́n-Mart ́nez, E., Dragan, A., & Fuentes, I. (2010). “The Unruh effect in
quantum information beyond the single-mode approximation”. Phys. Rev. A 82, 042332.
4.Einstein, A., Podolsky, B., & Rosen, N. (1935). “Can quantum-mechanical description of physical
reality be considered complete?”. Phys. Rev. 47, 777.
5.Mehri-Dehnavi, H., Mirza, B., Mohammadzadeh, H., & Rahimi, R. (2011). “Pseudo-entanglement
evaluated in noninertial frames”. Ann. Phys. 326, 1320.
6.Mehri-Dehnavi, H., Rahimi, R., Mohammadzadeh, H., Ebadi, Z., & Mirza, B. (2015). “Quantum
teleportation with nonclassical correlated states in noninertial frames”.Quantum Inf. Process. 14,
1025.
7.Peres, A. (1996). “Separability criterion for density matrices ”. Phys. Rev. Lett. 77, 1413.
8.Rahimi, R., Takeda, K., Ozawa, M., & Kitagawa, M. (2006). “Entanglement witness derived from NMR
superdense coding”. J. Phys. A 39, 2151.
98
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Thermodynamic Entropy Due to Lorentz Violation
Mehrnoosh Farahmand
Hosein Mohammadzadeh
Abstract
Quantum effects of gravity in the early universe can be led to the existence of the present particles.
We consider a free mass-less scalar field on a spatial lattice has been included in the early universe,
so that all modes of the field are in vacuum state. Such scalar field model represents a modified
dispersion relation as Lorentz violation which displays a quantum gravity model. The vacuum state
in the presence of Lorentz violation can be appeared as particle creation. In this paper, the particle
production due to Lorentz violation is shown as an entropic increase. Therefore, in this approach the
source of the current entropy content of the universe should be directly related to particle creation
stemming from Lorentz violation.
Keywords: particle creation, Lorentz violation, thermodynamics entropy
1.Introduction
In a gravity dominant regime with enormous density of the field, such big-bang and black hole
theories, quantum effects are important. A quantum gravity model is a deviation from standard
dispersion relation, i. e. Lorentz violation. In fact, the modified dispersion relation is achieved by the
process of discrete modeling the spacetime on a lattice (Amelino-Camelia, 2013).
Study of quantum field theory in curved spacetime is shown that the initial vacuum state represents
created particle due to interaction between quantum field and gravitational field (Birrell, at al.,
1984). We use Lorentz violation model with a time dependent Lorentz violation parameter to study
how the present state containing particle is appeared. Also, we employ thermodynamics to
99
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
understanding the current entropy source of universe .We show that the source of the current
entropy content of the universe is directly related to created particle stemming from Lorentz
violation.
2.Free scalar field on a spatial lattice
We consider a mass-less free scalar field in 1+1 dimensions without loss of generality. The KleinGordon equation is such as follow.
̈
,
(1)
where exhibits the dispersion relation for plane waves as
𝜔
.
(2)
Letting Eq. (1) on a spatial lattice, we have
̈
(
)
(
)
( )
.
(3)
where a is the space discrete-time continuum lattice. We will have a symmetric Brillouin zone,
, considering a plan-wave solution on the lattice as follows.
.
(4)
Substituting the solution in Eq. (3) yields
𝜔
.
(5)
Thus, the dispersion relation for the lattice model is as follows
𝜔
(
Eq. (6) for
𝜔
).
(6)
, is yielded
(
),
(7)
where in the limit
, implies the standard dispersion relation, i. e. Eq. (2). Adding second term of
the Talor extension of the cos-function in Eq. (6), represents a modified dispersion relation as
follows.
𝜔
.
(8)
111
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
3.Production entropy
Let us consider a deviation from the standard dispersion relation such Eq. (8), as quantum gravity
effect (Amelino-Camelia, 2013). We assume the back ground structure of space time is flat. For the
early times,
, the dispersion relation is 𝜔
, where
is the Lorentz
violation parameter. For the late times,
, the dispersion relation has the standard form, Eq.
(2). The natural solutions are
, but since the dispersion relation is different for two
asymptotic regions, the definitions of basis are not the same. Thus, the initial vaccum state and the
final vacuum state are not equivalent, in analogy with other scenarios of quantum field theory in
curved space time (Birrell, 1984).
According to above interpretation, we choose a time evolution of the Lorentz violation parameter as
follows (Khosravi, 2011)
( )
.
(9)
Substituting the operators
Gordon equation leads to
,
( )
and
-
into 𝜔 and
in Eq. (7), and letting
( ), the Klien
.
(10)
The solution of Eq. (9) is
(√
( )
)
(
)
(√
)
(
).
(11)
where
is the hypergeometric function. Eq. (10) for the far past time, in-region and the far future
time, out-region are as follow 2F1
( )
√
(
),
111
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
√
( )
(
(
) (
)
(
) (
)
(
)
( ) (
)
( ) (
)
(
)),
(12)
where
is the Gamma function and
√
(𝜔
𝜔
),
√
(𝜔
𝜔
),
√
Also, 𝜔
𝜔 .
√
(
(13)
. The solution of in-region and out-region are related as follow
)
(
)
(
),
(14)
( )
( ),
( )
( ) and
where
Therefore, the created particle is in the following form
( (
(
)
))
(
.
and
are the Bogoliubov coefficients.
(15)
)
Then the initial vacuum state converts to an exited state which the context of the particle is given by
Eq. (15).
Considering the vacuum state in the infinity future as a two mode squeezed state, the reduced
density matrix will be as
|
|
∑
〉〈
.
(16)
112
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The density matrix of the created particle can be written in the thermal form such as follows
∑
(
)
〉〈
.
(17)
Therefore, the created entanglement mode pairs are in a thermal equilibrium with an equilibrium
temperature as follows
(
)
.
(18)
It has been shown the production entropy of the created particle is given by
,
(19)
where T is the equilibrium temperature assigned to created particle, Eq. (18). Substituting Eq. (18)
into Eq. (19) yields
.
/,
(20)
where
is given by Eq. (15). Regarding to the definition of 𝜔
√
, there is an upper
bound on the k, for positive value of , in the event that the Eq. (20) is always valid for negative
value of . The case
corresponding to
, as expected.
113
The Youth Look
The 3rd CUA’s Graduate Students Symposium
University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran
www.uma.ac.ir/links/tgss
Figure 16: The production entropy
with respect to k for
, the
solid line, and for
, the
dotdashed line.
Figure 17: The production entropy
with respect to k for
, the
solid line, with the upper bound
and for
, the dotdashed line,
with the upper bound
.
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Figure 1 shows the production entropy with respect to k for two different negative values of . The
production entropy has maxima, where for each Lorentz parameter is different. Increasing the
Lorentz parameter, the maximum value of the production entropy forward to larger value of k.
Figure 2 represents the production entropy with respect to k for two different positive values of .
It is worth mentioning that for each case, valid values of k are less than the upper bound on the k.
We investigated the effects of Lorentz violation by a time dependent modified dispersion relation. In
the past infinity, The vacuum state in the presence of Lorentz violation can be represented the
created particles in the absence of Lorentz violation in the future infinity.The particle production due
to Lorentz violation was shown as an entropic increase. Therefore, in this approach the source of the
current entropy content of the universe was directly related to particle creation stemming from
Lorentz violation.
References
1.Amelino-Camelia, G. (2013). “Quantum spacetime phenomenology” Living Rev. Relativity, 16 (5),
137.
2.Birrell, N. D., & Davies, P. C. W. (1984). Quantum fields in curved space (No. 7). Cambridge university
press.
3.Khosravi, N. (2011). “Particle creation from vacuum by Lorentz violation”. General Relativity and
Gravitation, 43(5), 1417.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------105
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
New Approach for Solution of Volterra-Fredholm Integral
Equations
Mina Salimi
Amin Anvarzadeh
Abstract
In this paper we analyze two methods to approximate of the solution of the mixed volterra-fredholm
integral equations, by making use of the expression of a function of a basis spline and schauder. The
first is collocation method and second one is fixed point method. We analyze some problems of
convergence and stdy the error in each approximation. Numerical results show the theoretical
statements.
Keywords: Volterra-Fredholm equation, collocation method, fixed point method. spline, schauder
basis
Introduction
Let us consider the following Volterra–Fredholm linear integral equation of the second kind:
(1)
* + ;
,
- ,
) ,
Where
; (
and u: ,
, with f and
(
)
known function satisfying (1).
When modeling real problems, one has frequently to deal with Eq. (1) which has the theoretical and
computational features
of both Volterra and Fredholm equations.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------106
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
)and are posed in order to obtain a unique solution of (1) in C[a,b],
Suitable conditions on (
under the assumption that f C[a,b] (for proofs in particular Banach spaces, with different conditions
), refer, for example, to [6,1]).
on (
However, in this paper, to state some results about the convergence of the proposed methods, we
will assume the following
conditions:
From a numerical point of view it is well known that Volterra equations are generally solved through
iterative methods.
On the contrary direct methods are more suitable to the solution of Fredholm equations (see for
example [2] and [3]). We tried to afford the solution of (1) both through an iterative as well as
through a direct numerical method. The aim of this
paper is to analyze and compare these two different numerical methods.
We can reduce (1) to two equivalent compact forms:
(2),(3)
where operators
and
are defined as follows:
(4),(5)
and I is the identity operator in C[a,b].
The structure of (2) and (3) suggests the idea of constructing and comparing two different classes of
methods: collocation direct methods and iterative fixed point methods (normally referred in
particular to non linear equations).
Both kinds of methods are proposed for a particular class of approximating functions.
Namely, the first method (in the following called CSp) is a collocation method based on a linear
spline class approximation;
the second one (in the following called FPSc) is a fixed point method built on Schauder linear bases.
We compare the two methods in terms of both efficiency and adaptability to the peculiarities of the
integral model under
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------107
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
consideration. Convergence analysis is carried out in both cases.some preliminaries about the
particular linear splines class and to the description and analysis of
the numerical collocation method. describe the Schauder basis correlated to the fixed point method
and to study the related convergence problems. numerical results for both methods are given. some
final remarks on the comparison between the two methods and some open problems.
we present a numerical model suitable to (1) based on a collocation method using approximating
splines,
in particular the so called variation-diminishing Schoenberg (VDS) splines [12].
Firstly, let us recall some background on linear VDS splines (see for example [8]).
If we define
,
̃the values ̅ , approximating the function u in
(
defined in (6 ), is zero in a set of collocation points
(
(6)
)are determined imposing that rn,
) chosen in [a,b]:
(7)
and solving the linear system(7).
we present a numerical model suitable to (1) based on a fixed point method with Schauder bases.
Firstly we recall some necessary background on linear Schauder bases.
we define the operator
,
-
,
- defined as it follows:
(8)
Under the hypotheses of existence and uniqueness of the solution of (1) it is well known that the
fixed point theorem assures
a unique fixed point for the operator
For the collocation method we consider:
_ the mesh points as equidistant points in [0,1] with double nodes in 0 and 1,
_ the mesh points all simple in (0, 1) as the approximation points,
_ the collocation points as a set of distinct points of the same number of the approximation points.
For the fixed point method we consider the subset of [0,1] defined as
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------108
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
supporting the Schauder basis in C[0, 1].
We denote R1 and R2 respectively the max(jerrj) in the fixed point and in the collocation methods,
being err the set of
errors related to the approximation of the unknown function in a suitable subset of points in [0, 1].
Numerical results:
Example. = 15, ( )
and ( )
(
)
For the fixed point method an algorithmic instability is experienced, while in the collocation case the
equations are
more sensitive to the lack of stability of the collocation system. This last effect is currently under
study.
References
1. S. András, Weakly Singular Volterra and Fredholm–Volterra Integral Equations, Mathematica, vol.
XLVIII, Studia Babes-Bolyai, 2003. pp 147–155.
2.K.E. Atkinson, The Numerical Solution of Integral Equations of the Second Kind, Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge, 1997.
3. K.E. Atkinson, H. Weimin, Theoretical Numerical Analysis, Springer-Verlag, New York, 2001.
4. M.I. Berenguer, M.A. Fortes, A.I. Garralda Guillem, M. Ruiz Galán, Linear Volterra integro
differential equation and Schauder bases, Appl. Math. Comput.
159 (2004) 495–507.
5. M.I. Berenguer, M.V. Fernández Muñoz, A.I. Garralda Guillem, M.Ruiz Galán, Numerical Treatment
of Fixed Point Applied to the Nonlinear Fredholm
Integral Equation, Fixed Point Theory Appl. 2009, p. 8. (Article ID 735638).
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------109
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
6. F. Caliò, E. Marchetti, V. Muresan, On some Volterra–Fredholm integral equation, IJPAM 31 (2006)
173–184.
7. F. Caliò, E. Marchetti, V. Muresan, Theoretical and numerical results about some weakly singular
Volterra–Fredholm equations, Rev. Anal. Numer.
Theor. Approx. 37 (2008) 27–36.
8. F. Caliò, E. Marchetti, An algorithm based on q.i. modified splines for singular integral models,
Comput. Math. Appl. 41 (2001) 1579–1588.
9.C. Dagnino, V. Demichelis, E. Santi, A Nodal Spline Collocation Method for Weakly Singular Volterra
Integral Equations, Mathematica, XLVIII, BabesBolyai, 2003. pp. 71–81.
10. M. Domingo, A.I. Garralda Guillem, M. Ruiz Galán, Fredholm integral equations and Schauder
bases, Monogr. Semin. Mat. Garcia Galdeano 31 (2004)
121–128.
11. D. Gamez, A.I. Garralda Guillem, M. Ruiz Galán, Nonlinear initial-value problems and Schauder
bases, Nonlinear Anal. 63 (2005) 97–105.
12. T. Lyche, L.L. Schumaker, Local spline approximation methods, J. Approx. Theory 15 (1975) 294–
325.
13. A. Palomares, M. Ruiz Galán, Isomorphisms, Schauder bases and numerical solution of integral
and differential equation, Numer. Funct. Anal. Optim. 26
(2005) 129–137.
14. P. Rabinowitz, Numerical integration based on approximating splines, JCAM 33 (1990) 73–83.
15. Z. Semadeni, Product Schauder bases and approximation with nodes in spaces of continuous
functions, Bull. Polish Acad. Sci. 11 (1963) 387–391.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------110
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Haar Wavelet Method For
Solving One-dimensional Burger’s equation
M.Zarebnia
R.Parvaz
Department of Mathematics and Applications, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, 56199-11367, Ardabil, Iran
Department of Mathematics and Applications, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, 56199-11367, Ardabil, Iran
Abstract
In this paper, the haar wavelet collocation method is implemented to find numerical solution of the Onedimensional Burger’s equation. The method is based on haar wavelet for space integration and finite difference
formulae for time integration. The numerical results have been compared with the exact solution
Keywords: One-dimensional Burger’s equation, Haar wavelet, Finite difference, Collocation .
1.Introduction
One-dimensional Burger’s equation is used in fluid dynamics, for more details see (Johnson, R.W.). In
recent years, many different methods have been used to estimate the solution of the Onedimensional Burger’s equation; see, for example,( Yang, H.Q., & Przekwas, A.J.). We consider the Onedimensional Burger’s equation as follows:
(
)
( )
with the initial condition and the boundary conditions
where
(
)
( )
(
)
() (
( )
)
()
( )
is the coefficient of kinematic viscosity.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------111
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The balance of this paper is organized as follows. In Section 2, the haar wavelet collocation method
for the numerical solution of the One-dimensional Burger’s equation is described. In Section 3, the
results of numerical experiments are presented. A summary is given at the end of the paper in
Section 4.
2. Haar wavelet collocation method
In the first step we define the haar wavelet family for
( )
( )
,
,
{
,
- as follows
)
)
( )
where
( )
In the above formulae we consider
defined as
( )
,
{
,
and
)
, Also
is
( )
In the next step, by using finite difference scheme we can find
(
(
where
formula
(
)
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
( )
). The nonlinear term in Eq. (7) can be approximated by using the following
(
)
( )
Substituting the approximate Eq. (8) in Eq. (7) and rearranging the terms and simplifying we get
( )
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------112
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
with
(
)
(
)
(
)
and
To continue we define the approximation for
( )
where
( )
( )
∑
( )
as follows
are haar wavelet. Now we introduce the following notations.
∫
()
( )
∫
()
∫
()
(
)
For this collocation method we define the following collocation points.
We integrate Eq. (12) from
( )
)
)
(
)
(
)
to .
∑
Again, we integrate of Eq. (15)from
(
(
( )
to .
∑
By using boundary conditions we can find
( ) as
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------113
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
(
)
(
Therefore we can rewrite
)
∑
and
(
)
( (
(
)
(
(
)
(
)
(
)
as follows
)
(
)
∑
))
(
∑
( )
( )
(
)
)
Now with Substituting (12), (18) and (19) into (9), we obtain system of equations. Solving this
system we get the unknown the Haar coefficients. We note that if ,
,
-, , - must be
changed into , - before applying above method.
3. Numerical example
Consider the One-dimensional Burger’s equation with
assume that exact solution is
(
where
in the interval ,
(
)
-. In this case we
)
(
)
. For this example we consider boundary conditions as
(
)
(
)
The initial condition is taken from the exact solution. Table 1 shows
in different times with
,
,
and
. Table 1 shows that the solution obtained by our method is close
to the exact solution.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------114
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Table1
Numerical result
time
time
0.1
0.6
0.2
0.7
0.3
0.8
0.4
0.9
0.5
1
4. Conclusion
In this paper, the haar wavelet method is used to solve the one-dimensional Burger’s equation. The
method is tested on problem. And the obtained numerical results are compared with the exact
solution. Also, obtained results showed that this approach can solve the problem effectively.
References
1.Johnson, R.W. (1998). The Handbook of Fluid Dynamics, CRC Press, Springer.
2.Yang, H.Q., & Przekwas, A.J. , (1999) , Numerical solution of one-dimensional Burgers equation:
explicit and exact-explicit finite difference methods, Journal of Computational and Applied
Mathematics,103 (2) 251-261.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------115
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The impact of Russian and Chechen conflicts on the
Caucasus crisis
Morteza Ebrahimi
Sed Ali Mortazavi Emami Zavare
Fahime Oleiki
Mehdy Jahantab
AssiProfessor,Department of Political Science, University of Mohaghegh Ardebili, Ardabil, Iran.
Department of Education and Theology of, University of Esfahan, Iran
M.Sc.Department of Humanities, University of Mohaghegh Ardebili, Ardabil, Iran.
Department of Member of the ahl-Bayt World Assembly, Tehran, Iran
Abstract
The collapse of the former Soviet Union caused a geopolitical vacuum in the Caucasus, Central Asia.
In such a way that it make it competitive in terms of regional and international powers. The presence
of regional and trans-regional powers take impact on the region behavioral pattern. The question
that lies ahead is that what is the impact of conflicts of Chechnya and Russia on Caucasus region
crisis? The aim of this study is to engage the Caucasus with a historical attitude and the rule of
regional and trans-regional powers in Caucasus crisis and specially Chechnya. In the North Caucasus,
Chechnya declared independence from Russia in 1991 and this was the most important
developments, which later led to a long war with the central government. It seems that the wrong
policies of Moscow and local governments are the main cause of violence in Chechnya. However,
operating inland should be considered. Russians historically have always been against Muslims.
Russians lose a part of its territory with losing Chechnya, because if this first strong and
incompatible republic with the independence of Russia managed, turn immediately to reach the
other republics of the Caucasus and elsewhere in the region is symmetrical
Keywords: Chechnya, Caucasus, Russians, Caucasus crisis
1.Introduction
The Caucasus region is one of the oldest centers of human civilization. Caucasus land, the land of
diverse people, different geographical landscapes, in the northwest neighborhood of Iran, despite of
religious and cultural common interests was separated after the signing of the Treaty of Golestan
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------116
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
and Turkmenchay during the reign of Fath Ali Shah Qajar from Iran. (Amirahmadian, 1376) By
collapsing of Russian empire and invasion of small and big regional and international powers to fill
the vacuum resulting from the collapse in the first place Caucasus changed, but its adjacent areas,
including North West border areas of Iran, effected by the impact of these developments. Whether or
not the South Caucasus North Caucasus both were the center of different tensions and conflicts.
Chechens violent tensions with Russia and their independence-seeking, the quarrel between
Kabardinoes and Balkars, Karachays and Cherkessiya ... all shows the instability of area (Kazemzade,
1393). In new security studies has added many dimensions to the concept of security, and security
has become a "multidimensional” concept that has included economic and environmental topics till
money and military threats.( Vaezi, 1382) This problem has caused this research explores the
regional powers and their role in creating unrests and insecurities in the North Caucasus region,
particularly Chechen.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------117
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Following the end of the Cold War, world geographical situation had changed, subsequently
developments in the Middle East was considered more important than the past., separatist efforts in
Georgia and Chechen, which also makes the region susceptible to new conflicts, Non-peaceful
changes and Beyond the law in some countries governance structures, and organized crime gangs
and trespassers bands Beside many other security problems, disrupted normal life in the region. And
the possibility of positive interaction among regional countries and economically productive
activities neighbors is minimized (Vaezi: 1382, p. 2). Some of the questions that is ahead of the
Caucasus region is that where is the root of insecurity? , what role Chechen-Russian’s conflict in zone
crisis play? In this study with historical view to Caucasus region, as well as the strategic importance
of the Caucasus region's security issues and the role of regional and Trans-regional powers in the
Caucasus conflict in Chechnya, were investigated.
Geographical situation and Caucasus's geo-strategically importance
Caucasus's Mountains are dividing Caucasus region into two distinct parts, North Caucasus and
South Caucasus. Nowadays, South Caucasus includes three independent countries of Azerbaijan,
Georgia and Armenia and the Republic of Karabakh, Nakhichevan, Ajaria, Abkhazia and South Ossetia
(in the heart of Georgia that still depends on Russia). And the North Caucasus includes three
province, two cites and eight autonomous republic of Russia that are still politically depended to
Russia.
Some of the factors that has made Caucasus important: Connection ring between the Europe and
Asia, relational bridge between north and south and east and west, junction or confluence of great
and ancient civilizations, neighboring Muslim world and the world of Christianity, one of the oil and
gas transit routes to Europe. (Vaezi, 1382, S5-3)
Perspectives of Russia and The roots of political behavior
Russian’s attention to the Caucasus has been long history and has been done for various reasons. One
of the most important cause of Russian’s colonial expansion in the Caucasus is the reign’s geostrategic importance and value. (Ozcan turgut, 2011: 13) Caucasians almost never looked to
Russians as a friend, and have shown this in numerous historical events such as World War I and II
to the Russians by not cooperating with them, Although in these wars , Russia imperialism in the
socialism and Czarist form has attracted a large number of Caucasians population by force and
persuasion and threats to itself, but after the collapse of the Soviet Union, Caucasian had shown
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------118
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
their hatred to the Russians and their puppet local governments, by asking political and economic
independence from Moscow, However, despite all the efforts of Russia, the Caucasus in general and
in particular the North Caucasus has always been prone to conflict and instability because the roots
of such conflicts very deep and intertwined, and as long as the demands of ethnic conflict are not
provided in an acceptable form, they can make Russia's interests violently beaten. (Jahantab: 1387,
p: 23)
The internal factors of instability in the Caucasus
Condition and situations that the South Caucasus and North Caucasus are faced implies to threats
and divergence that the region is facing are very diverse and numerous. Types of Security threats can
be searched in Ethnocentrism types of threats, border's disputes, extreme nationalism, separatism,
economic inequality and high inflation. (Jahantab: 1387)
The role of regional and trans-regional powers in the Caucasus crisis:
Regional impact by the independence of the Caucasus and Central Asia and disordering of previous
regularity causes the region's geopolitics irregularities. That changed somewhat as a result of
geopolitics. This set of factors and developments which have arisen since the coexistence of the
republics in the Soviet Union has been associated conditions in the region and has made region more
complex. The situation in the independence countries have faced these countries with some threats
that could destabilize. Internal situations of the Caucasus and foreign relations can alter the balance
of power between countries in the region. (Vaezi, 1382) Russia has always been a land power,
Russia's approach to the Caucasus and play an intermediary role between the Western powers and
some Eastern countries or north and south groups, as a European-Asian non-ideological power, as an
older brother ultimately, has made this country as a smart power. (Sheikh Attar, 1371)
Islam in Chechen and regional issues and roots of political behavior
Chechen Muslims' religious beliefs have two distinctive character: firstly, most of them are Hanafi
religious Muslim, and the other that Sufi's beliefs have a special place in their beliefs and have had a
significant impact in itself. According to official Soviet authorities, Chechen have started the religious
worries activities from mid-eighties. When coincides with the impact of Islamic Revolution in the
Muslim world and on the other hand shake the foundations of the Soviet Communist had been heard.
In the North Caucasus, Chechen’s independence declaring from Russia and its separatism in 1991,
was the important development which later led to the long war with the Russians central
government. In November 1992, a year after the Chechen’s independence, Russia has declared a
state of emergency in North Ossetia and Ingush, due to territorial conflicts and crisis, and
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------119
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
significantly strengthened its military presence in the region. The clashes were the first sign of ethnic
clashes after the collapse. (Jahantab, 1387, p: 28-31) Chechen -Ingush republic of the Soviet Union at
the beginning of 1991 divided into two separate republics, Chechen and Ingush and asking for
independency from Moscow, but after the crises that happened at the war in 1994 and the first half
of 1995, , Chechen could not achieve its independency from the Russian Federation. Chechens
battles with Russian central government for independency and separation, has begun again from
1999, but couldn’t get it again .According to the new Russian Constitution, Adopted in 1993
,autonomous provinces Adige and Kabarda- Balkar were upgraded to the level of Autonomous
Republic.(Jahantab)
Why Russia does not want to lose Chechnya and the surrounding republics? The reasons of Russia's
insistence on keeping Chechen even at the expense of ruining of cities, villages and a million
Chechens is ,Chechen‘s geographic strategic location, that the south side of it relies on the ridge of
North Caucasus Mountains and it keeps Russia from the threat situation .
(http://mahoseyni.blogfa.com/post-45.aspx)
3.Conclusion
Due to the nature of Caucasus region and its dependence on one of the regional powers , and with
the rise of Communists in the Russia, Caucasus region dominated the Soviet Union had continued ,
Until the 1991's by collapsing of mentioned union , southern parts of the Caucasus in format of
three countries , Azerbaijan, Armenia and Georgia gained their independence, Although the
mentioned three countries had got their independency , and are as a members of the members of
international community .but have not yet rid of historical ties to another power. Today Islamic
extremists is mentioned as the main difficulty in Chechen , which has extended in the entire region .
But the fact is that Islam isn't the only agent / features of Islamic extremism in the Caucasus It
seems the flawed policies of Moscow and local governments is the main cause of violence in Chechen.
However, inland features should be to be considered. Historically Russians have always been
against Muslims and if in certain periods Muslims have been treated smoothly, it was as a historical
inevitability.Russians by losing Chechen, will lose the part of their territory, also they are afraid that
it goes like the game of dominoes, because there is no guarantee that the others won’t follow the
Chechen’s success. In the meantime, we can mention republics of Dagestan, Tatarstan, Ingushetia,
North Ossetia, Adike , Karachay, Circassia , Kabardin, and Balkar, Kalmuk etc .hypothetical and
probable Alliance between Chechen and Dagestan can also exclude Russia from access to some
strategic opportunities and also considerable part of Caspian sea , and it effect negatively on
interests of Russia . Thus, considering this reasons, the Russians strongly attempt to suppress Proindependence movement in Chechnya and keeping collection the political geography of Russia.
Mutually, the Chechens attempt strongly to embrace their longtime political aspirations of
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------120
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
independence of the Slavic collection - North orthodoxy that does not feel their dissimilarity to it. So
there is a hard struggle between them.
References
1.Amirahmadian , Bahram , (1376) The geography of the Caucasus , print and publications of Foreign
Ministry , Tehran
2.Bayat, Kaveh, (1388) storm over the Caucasus (regional relations of the Republic of Azerbaijan,
Armenia and Georgia in the first period of independence 1921-1917), publications printing center of
the Foreign Ministry, Tehran
3.Sheikh Attar, Alireza (1371) The roots of political behavior in Central Asia and Caucasus, printing
and publication the Ministry of Foreign Affairs Institute, Tehran
4.Kazemzade Moses; kazemzade Akbar (1393) article Caucasus's regional and trans-regional power,
the cultural center of the Caucasus Research Journal, No. 18-17 fifth year
5.Jahantab, Mahdi, (1387) Islamic heritage of Iran in the North Caucasus, the International provided
to the World Assembly of Ahl al-Bayt (AS)
6.Vaezi, Mahmoud (1382) factors of instability in the Caucasus and security approaches, Journal of
Central Asia and the Caucasus journal studies, publications printing center of the Ministry of Foreign
Affairs, Tehran
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------121
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
7.Ozcan
turgut,onur,2011Bagimsiz
kuzeybkafkasya
www.kousamysmyazilim.com
8.http://mahoseyni.blogfa.com/post-45.aspx
cumhuuiyeti
(1918-1920)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------122
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The America's Role in the Georgia Crisis
Morteza Ebrahimi
Somayeh Abbasi
Hamzeh Ganji
Abstract
The Background of the emergence of the crisis in Georgia for a long time due to ethnic and
geographic and political conditions existed in Southern Caucasus. Since the independence of the
Republic of Georgia so far, the crisis caused by territorial disputes and two region of Abkhazia and
Vavstya several times get out of control and have led to war. The aim of this study was to draw a
pattern of America behavior in the current political developments in the Caucasus, especially in the
Georgia crisis. What Georgia really can play a role in the United States of America geopolitical
calculations that the West has been so highly regarded?
It seems that importance of geopolitical and geo of Georgia for America is that Georgia allows the
possibility of connecting pipelines of Azerbaijan to Turkey. As well as for America, existence of
political stability in Georgia and coordinate security is of utmost importance. Achievement of
Heartland region and marginal areas of the Russian defense shield in order to prevent the re
hegemony of this country's gate locations in the North Caucasus, prepare the ground for the
presence of West, in the north of Iran in order to harness and further isolation and so on are reasons
that seems Georgia's position on geopolitical calculations West, especially for the United States of
America is critical important.
Key words: the crisis in Georgia, America, the regional situation
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------123
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
1.Introduction
Perhaps it could be called the 2008 crisis in Georgia, one of the most important events after 2000.
The crisis that led to the limited war between Russia and Georgia resulted in swordplay two old
superpowers (Russia and the US) as well as new European players against each other (Soleymani,
1386, p. 18). During the velvet revolution in Georgia lot of discussion was raised about the amount
and how America's involvement in the transfer of power among analysts. Soviet collapse divided
Caucasus into two parts. Azerbaijan, Armenia and Georgia in the South Caucasus and remaining
territories as the North Caucasus were within the borders of Russia. North Caucasus is located in
remote and undeveloped area, but has a strategic importance (kazemzadeh, 1386, p. 30). The climax
the presence of America, in the field of political and security should be especially considered in
developments in Georgia after the tulip revolution in this country, especially in the August 2008
crisis. Result of these developments is proximity of Georgia to America that the strategic partnership
pact between the two countries is the symbol of proximity. During the Tulip Revolution, America
provided broad support from West-leaning Georgian leaders.
This support was enough that in the mind of Mikheil Saakashvili makes this believe that Georgia
enjoys for obvious security guarantees from America. Contrary to the impression of Saakashvili,
Washington in the crisis of Georgia and Russia in August 2008, did not provide certain operational
support from Tbilisi (www.eurasianet.org). Problem statement: In 1922, the three countries of
Azerbaijan, Georgia and Armenia formed "federation of socialist republics of the South Caucasus,"
and this regional union lasted until 1936. (Cis statistical committee year book1998)). In addition,
Georgia has the extensive participation of Nagorno-Karabakh peace talks that with mediation
between the two countries of Azerbaijan and Armenia restores peace and stability and security into
the Caucasus. (Vahedi, 1382, p. 247). Caucasus region is considered as a critical point and at the same
time one of important points of world due to geographic, political, and geopolitical, political,
historical, sociological and military matters. Republic of Georgia due to being located in the Caucasus
region has always paramount importance. Great powers tried to dominate these areas in order to
exploit from its resources. Conflict of interest of Russia and America, along with internal conflicts in
Georgia, faced the country with multiple crises. Whatever happened in August 2008 was resulting
from internal conflicts and also opposed the interests of America and Russia in this small Caucasus
country. The crisis had many causes including the most important of them was the America's role in
provoking Russia, and finally, Russia's entry under the pretext of supporting of Ossetian into the
arena of conflict. America that had put its preferred government with Rose Revolution in Georgia,
with its support of Georgia in August 2008 has played the most important role in the crisis. The aim
of this study was not to investigate the incident of August 2008, in this research attempts to
investigate the most important actions of America that provoke Russia and the underlying crisis on
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------124
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
2008 in Georgia. A summary of the geography of the Republic of Georgia: Georgia is mostly
mountainous. More than 80 percent of the country's territory is covered by mountains, foothills.
Georgia is divided into different areas based on the characteristics of Ups and downs of their land; in
the north, the mountains of the Great Caucasus have been drawn as a huge wall. In the south-high
volcanic plateau are located along the longitude, strings of volcanic extinguishers and cavities
accumulated of lava of Javakheti highlands. Also in Georgia, there are rivers, lakes, glaciers and
mineral fountains (Amir Ahmadian, 1376, p.78-79). Georgia, is one of the fragile states in the region,
whose economy has been devastated by civil unrest, the hidden economy forms 85 percent of the
country's economy. 60% of the population live below the poverty line, this entry illustrates the fact
that the South Caucasus is highly dependent on the support of foreign forces and because of that the
United States has sent flood of aid to the region (IRAS, 1389).
The importance of the South Caucasus in regional politics America: South Caucasus is important for
several reasons for America's national security interests, of which it can be pointed to energy
security, access to Central Asia, the fight against terrorism. In terms of geopolitics of the region's
proximity to Russia, Iran and the Middle East are at the forefront of importance (Cornell, 2005).
America early action in this area was moderate and cautious. America's positions on regional issues
were limited to protecting democratic values, with fear of the Islamization of the Muslim republics of
the region and nuclear weapons but gradually the interests of this country became more in the
region (Baba 1374: 129). It seems two major concerns of America after the collapse of the Soviet
Union was to prevent the spread of fundamentalism and Islamic extremism. To do this, the Clinton
administration decided to strengthen relations between countries in the region with its regional
allies, particularly Turkey and Israel.
The US approach to the Caucasus: after the independence of the Caucasus, oil companies, who were
the first US group that entered the region and the presence of rich oil and gas resources, attention of
the US government get more to countries in the region and it was the first time that the United States
had the opportunity to direct intervention in this area. Some of the factors that according to US
government give importance to the region include:
1. Due to the increased requirements of future energy, existence of resources of oil and gas has
increased the importance of this area
2. The oil producing countries in the region have no way to open sea and this is an obstacle in the
way of delivering oil and gas to other parts of the world that have complicated the political situation
in the region.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------125
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
3. Competition of regional and trans-regional power for participating in and influencing on region,
including countries: Russia, Iran, Turkey, Israel and some European Union countries.
4. Geopolitical importance of the region, particularly after the September 11 attacks and the US
invasion of Afghanistan and Iraq, the region in terms of military and security has become a special
place in US politics.
According to material presented, goals and instruments of the US in the Caucasus can be categorized
as follows:
A) access to oil and gas and controls of extraction and export; b) access to regional markets and
expand business in it; c) Maintain the status quo and strengthen the institutions of the region
countries towards long-term goals; d) to counter the influence of Russia; f) counter Iranian influence;
n) support the expansion of Turkish influence n) strengthening security ties with regional countries;
e) long-term presence in the region; y) the exploitation of political institutions, economic and
strategic western security to achieve strategic goals; US grand objective is widespread influence and
the reliable and long-term presence of in the Caucasus (Kazemzadeh, 1386, p. 42).
United States of America approach to the the Georgia: Central Asia and the Caucasus as part of the
Eurasia was political and Geopolitics territory of Soviet in the Cold War era. The area constituted
southern part of the territory of the Heartland in Theory of Makender, it is possible that it is the
dimension of balance of power and power system in the world. With the collapse of the bipolar
system of the said areas, by means of independent states they found independent geographicalpolitical identity. And with form of space that experiencing power vacuum, emerged an arena of
multi-level competition. Contraction of Soviet space and its adaptation on Russia's borders and the
advent of open spaces with the power vacuum provided opportunities for expansion space power
rival America (Basiri and Yazidi, 1383: 101).
In the second term of President Clinton, America's goals and policies in these areas was somewhat
transparent and increased importance of this area with American politicians, the presence especially
in Georgia despite the absence of fossil energy resources, so that significant if not, cannot be
overlooked. Financial and military aid, train and equip military forces by the US and Israeli advisers,
accept this country as a member of NATO's Partnership for Peace and assistance promised to accept
in NATO, the country's selection as the main route for Central Asian oil and gas regions - the Caspian
and Caucasus (although other routes, such as Iran and Russia that sometimes is safer and cheaper as
well) are some of aids. This attention especially after the Rose Revolution and the establishment of
the pro-Western Mikhail Saakashvili has been more, so that Rumsfeld was the America's first highranking official who arrived in Tbilisi after the resignation of Shevardnadze and the opposition
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------126
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
victory and expressed strong support for America in the political, economic and military dimensions
stated that Georgia enjoys a strategic position in the foreign policy of America (Asgari, 1384: 87).
Conclusion
Based on what Brzezinski have wrote in his book, we can say that the purpose of America's presence
in Georgia is not only energy transfer, or the fight against terrorism, but the important point is that
the Republic of Georgia in the geopolitical arena, has a unique position. Republic of Georgia due to a
key position in the Caucasus is the center of gravity in the relationship between the East and South
West. Achievement to Heartland region and marginal areas, defend shield of Russia to prevent its re
hegemony of this country in the region, controlling interests of containing hydrocarbon and oil and
gas pipelines, a buffer between Russia and South areas, particularly Armenia and Iran, the gateway
and the expansion of NATO toward the East, the establishment of the North Caucasus entry gates,
prepare the ground for the West's presence in North Front of Iran to contain and further isolation,
prepare the ground for linking allies such as Turkey and Israel with the aforementioned area,
prepare the ground for the exit of Azerbaijan from geographical isolation, untapped regional
potential market, and most importantly, prevent the creation of strategic alliances with
combinations such as Russia, China, India or Russia, China, Pakistan, India and Iran all are reasons
seems to have made vital the place of Georgia in the geopolitical calculations of West, especially the
United States.
References
1.Amirahmdyan, Bahram. (1376), The geography of the Caucasus, printing of publications Ministry of
Foreign Affairs IRAS (1389 December) economic growth of Azerbaijan, www.iras.ir
2.Noor Ahmad Baba (1373) inherited constraints and the prospects for stability in Central Asia,
translated by Qasem Maleki, Studies Quarterly of Central Asia and Caucasus
3.Basiri, Mohammad Ali; Izadi Zaman Abadi, Mojgan (1383) America's foreign policy objectives in
Central Asia, Caucasus and Central Asian Studies Quarterly Tehran (45)
4.Kazem Zadeh, Hamed (1386). Islamic heritage of Iran in the North Caucasus, presented to the
World Assembly of Ahl al-Bayt, reported field studies symbols of the Islamic Iranian culture and
civilization in the North Caucasus
5.Asgari,Hassan (1384).The role of external actors in the color revolutions: the revolution in Georgia
Tehran: Quarterly Central Asia and the Caucasus (51)
6.Alizadeh,Ali (1380) security look at the issues in the Caspian Sea basin and Central Asian Studies
Quarterly of the Caucasus (35)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------127
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
7.Vahedi, Elias (1382) Azerbaijan strategic assessment, monitoring and implementation, and
Research Studies Institute of Contemporary Abrar International Tehran
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------128
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Qarabag, Reasons of the Formation and Prolongation of
the Crisis
Morteza Ebrahimi
Naser Rahmani
Parisa Asgari
Abstract
We are living in a time period with complex global developments. New intellectual phenomena is
surrounded us and we are faced with different challenges in many fields due to these phenomena
and developments. One of these phenomena's is Qarabag problem. The Caucasus region is one of the
most sensitive and crisis-prone regions in the world, which after the collapse of the Soviet Union,
several bloody conflicts and tensions has been seen in this region. Qarabag conflict is one of the
deepest crisis since the collapse of the Soviet republics and Declaration of Independence of its
republics. As a result of the increasing tensions thousands of people killed, injured and displaced
from their homes and were wandering. The crisis of the beginning of the competition between the
major powers is a competitive carrier. The two countries, Armenia and Azerbaijan are faced with
multiple issues to peace and stability. Thus, security and sustainable development of them depends
on the solving crisis like this. The main purpose of this paper is analyzing the reasons of the
formation and prolongation of the Qarabag crisis. In other words, the current work tries to
identifying the events and conflicts occurred between Armenia and Azerbaijan since the 80s in
Qarabag region and the effect of this problem on their other relationships.
Keywords: Qarabag, Caucasus, Armenia, Azerbaijan.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------129
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
1.Introduction
The historical territory of Qarabag had been one of the primary and very old housing places for
humans. The "ICE" cave, which is human biological marker in the past is situated in this region
(Mollazadeh, H). Qarabag region of Azerbaijan in the south Caucasus Mountains small in the West
Azerbaijan formed from two part plain and mountain. the plain section of karabag is called" Sofla" or
historical karabag. The mountains section of karabag is called "Olya" or mountains karabag. The
region mountainous Qarabag is that disputed now, from the first century AD, part of the historical
province "Artsakh" had been Alban lands of the Caucasus. The people of this region until the fourth
century AD were idolatrous. . With the accept of Christianity by "Avranyr" In the fourth century
paganism worship is closed. With the accept of Christianity by "Avranyr" In the fourth century
paganism worship is closed. But Christianity in this region, unlike surrounding areas Such as
Armenia and Georgia not developed. Groups of people continued to paganism along with
Christianity, SHUH AS (sun, sky, and moon).and part of the People Religion Mazdean Iran (http:
www. Ses-az.com). with the arrival of Islam in the eight century to the Nagorno-Qarabag region, the
Soviet Union was a lot of ethnic diversity, religious. In such a way that the number of this different
tribes to fifty looks. This ethnic disputes is one of the main reasons of the occurrence of conflicts and
crises in the Caucasus following the collapse of the Soviet Union were. Therefore, this article is a brief
description of the current position of the first garbage to the causes of the formation of the long crisis
in the region. And in the end also proposed to end the Ngoro no- Qarabag region in crisis find. The
name of the Qarabag in the historical resources starts of the century-12 Ad. The section "Sofla" is
located in the north.
Discussion and reviews
1-History of Qarabag
Qarabag which is an ancient land area, divided into two major parts, mountains and plains. The
center of this city is called “Ganga”. The mountainous part of the Qarabag is known as “the
autonomous mountain Qarabag province (Bakıxanov, A.2004). In other words, Qarabag is a historical
province in the Azerbaijan. This province starts from small Caucasus and surrounds the territorial
between two "Ores" and "Cur" rivers. This two areas, plain and mountains, always have been
together throughout history and have a close relationship together (Behrad, A, 1993).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------130
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
2- The geographic position of Qarabag
Autonomous Qarabag province is located in the southeastern mountains of the Caucasus with an
area approximately equal to 4388 square meters. This region is called “Nagorno-Qarabag” in the
Russian language which means mountains Qarabag. The Armenians use “Artsakh” phrase for this
region. The Qarabag’s forest is very rich in possessing wood, raw materials, turnkey parquet,
musical instruments, and etc. Also, Qarabag has perspective landscapes (Arend, L, 1980).
In general, it can be noted, contrary to public opinion, the status of the Qarabag does not have the
features of a strategic area. Because if it has global and regional importance, had returned to a stable
situation after this problem. For example, the state Kuwait can be mentioned. Iraq at the beginning of
the 1990s attempted to occupation of Kuwait. The response of the international community to meet
the Kuwait, was quite different from the Qarabag’s problem. While both were the same in terms of
nature, i.e. both cases have occurred in Muslim lands.
3- The causes and origins crisis of Qarabag
Qarabag conflict:
Christianity were accepted in the fourth century ad in Qarabag by "Ornayer". In the same time, this
area was taken by the Muslims (http://news.ft.com, Oct. 23, 2003). Azeri people are the majority of
this region’s population and when one of the Armenian took power, they didn’t revolt (Vahedi, E.
2003). In 1985 the Armenian requested Mikhail Gorbachev to annex the Qarabag to Armenia. In gune
1985 the supereme council of Armenia, announced the incorporation of Qarabag in to the Armenian
lands. On behalf of the people of the Azerbaijan were overturned. Since 1988 conflict began again
between the two groups (Vahedi, E). Conflict of Qarabag can be considered as one of the first and
longest ethnic war in the Soviet Union. There are inner and outer factors in Qarabag conflict. The
internal factor is among Azerbaijan and Armenia about the autonomous region of Qarabag. The
conflict, which would be in the nature of this autonomous region (Foreman, D). The Armenian
situation in the nagorno Qarabag autonomous region similar to situation of the Germans in Poland,
the situation of Muslims in Kashmir, Somalia in Ethiopia, and Serbs in Croatia and Bosnia (Abrar
newspaper).
The most important external factor can be pointed as the following (Vaezi, M. 2007).
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------131
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
1-The new generation
now a young generation stepped in to the growing arena in Azerbaijan and Armenia that of course is
not the memory of the Soviet Union and did not lived theirs patterns. The ideological conflicts that
today's youth and there is the old generation, on the factor is crisis continue in the Nagorno-Qarabag.
2- The existence of dignity and the taboo of having for both countries
Each of the parties to the conflict, consider the Qarabag’s conflict as a reputational problem for
themselves. Because in each country, national identity and restoring it is tied with this issue. One of
the advertising slogans used by both side to seize the candidate of Nagorno-Qarabag in the rule it
again.
3- The competition of influential powers
Geographical location of the Caucasus during recent century, power absorption center always has
been opposed to the political. Each of this forces look at the area from different views. With
increasing the involvement powers, this conflict took quite a political respective.
Levon Ter-Petrossian, "Armenia's former president" believes that, "disagreements between Russia
and Organization for Security and Cooperation in Europe (CSCE), is the main obstacle to ending the
crisis is long-term (roundtable, 2003).
4- Ethnic crisis
Ethnic refers to a group of people who throughout history in certain lands have established relation
together such economic, cultural, and kinship. Believed to be ethnic nationalism as a stress factor
element to be known in the international system (Mollazadeh, H.). In other words, ethnic and
religious diversity is also one of the causes of the crisis in Nagorno-Qarabag.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------132
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Conclusion
Nagorno-Qarabag conflict has become a Gordian knot and Azeris and nor Armenians can not stop it.
Thay don’t abandon this problem easily which became a reputational problem. Of course it was out
of shape and has spread to the disturbed international system. The regional players and Transregional have been enter the game. Russia from one hand and on the other hand, the US and its allies
were a serious deterioration in the situation. Armenian were predicting that the Qarabag issue will
be resolved in 2009 or 2010. Armen Ashotyan (MP Armenia) on 11 October 2006 stated that the
Qarabag problem in 2006, is not solved. According to his statement the "opening" of this window
depends on who is in power in Armenia (quoting Aras news). The proposed solution to this crisis,
needs the cooperation of all actors in this conflict.
The severity of the crisis will be reduced, if actors reach their desired condition. Because in this
situation, understanding and interaction are the only fruitful options. In this way, firstly Azerbaijan
in its legal form should give the highest level autonomy to Armenians, Secondly, Armenia and the
international community to recognize the territorial integrity of Azerbaijan. And thirdly, through the
competent international authorities the security of the Qarabag’s Armenians should to be ensured
(Javanshir gharabaghi, M. 2003).
References
1.Abrar newspaper, No. 1673, dated 16/8/1994 (Persian).
2.Arend Lijphart, “Democracy in Plural Societies”, (New Haven and London 1980), pp. 51-203, and
E.A. Nordlinger, “Conflict Regulation in Divided Socities”, (Cambridge, 1977), pp. 21 FF.
3.Bakıxanov, A. Golestan Eram: Shirvan and Dagestan history since the beginning until ending of the
Russo-Iranian wars. Tehran, 2004, ISBN: 9643114325, 197 pages (Persian)
4.Behrad, A. Garabag in historical perspective, 1993 spring (Persian)
5.Ethnicity and threats external", roundtable, center for strategic research, March 2003.
6.Foreman, D. Garabag conflict transformation, Former, P.313
7.Http: www. Ses-az.com
8.http://news.ft.com, Oct. 23, 2003.
9.Javanshir gharabaghi, M. Garabag history, Press centre of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs,
2003(Persian).
10.Mollazadeh, H. Republic of Azerbaijan the look to the future, pp. 50-56. (In Persian)
11.Online news site Regnum Russia, quoting Aras, Wednesday, 11/10/2006
12.Vaezi, M. Geopolitical crisis in Central Asia and the Caucasus, Institute for Political and
International Studies, print 2007(Persian).
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------133
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
13.Vahedi, E. same source, p.210 (Persian)
14.Vahedi, E. Strategic assessment of Azerbaijan, Publications and Research Studies Institute of
Contemporary Abrar International Tehran, print 2003.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------134
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Determine and Evaluate the Aerobic and Anaerobic
Threshold Heart Rate of Maximum Heart Rate Threshold
in Sedentary Female
Negar Asghari Moghaddam
Marefat Siahkouhian
Nasrin Azizian
Faculty of Physical Education and Sport Sciences, Mohaghegh Ardabili university,Ardabil
Professor of Sport Physiology, Mohaghegh Ardabili university, Ardabil
Department of Physical Education and Sport Sciences, Mohaghegh Ardabili university, Ardabil
Abstract
The aim of this study was to answer this question Vastanh aerobic, anaerobic threshold heart rate in
the percentage of maximum heart rate in girls is disabled? For this purpose, 16 disabled students
with an average age of 19/46 ±1/12 years, weight 57/73 ± 7/87 kg, height 161/9 ± 6/08 cm And
body mass index 22/93 ± 3/02 kg per square meter, with no history of heart disease, pulmonary, on
a voluntary basis, were selected. When you increase the work load of low intensity to high blood
lactate levels almost 2 mmol / l increases as well as the VE / VO2 increases disproportionately as the
aerobic threshold is defined. As well as during incremental exercise a certain intensity, blood lactate
concentration increases for non-linear, or intensity of activity which blood lactate concentration4
mmol / l is defined as anaerobic threshold. The aerobic threshold and anaerobic threshold in this
study, the first and second point has to do with heart rate curve breaks.Changes in participants' heart
rate during exercise protocol implementations, using telemetry minute was recorded. To avoid any
error when the minute heart rate telemetry was used, two-hour special on the subject, one of which
was closed and the other was given to researchers. When the subject is the point of exhaustion, the
heart rate was at maximum value that was recorded as maximum heart rate. Results showed that the
mean maximal heart rate subjects 189/46 aerobic threshold heart rate of 135/66 was, So the aerobic
threshold heart rate at 71/60% maximum heart rate is disabled students And given that the average
maximum heart rate for subjects 189/46 anaerobic threshold heart rate of 189/46, so anaerobic
threshold heart rate at 100% maximum heart rate is disabled students. The share of aerobic system
for energy increases, the person's heart rate less to operate. When we increase the exercise intensity,
heart rate increases and the share is reduced aerobic machines and other energy supplier to assume
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------135
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
the duty of energy supply,especially glycolytic devices that use the anaerobic glycolysis to produce
of the energy.
Keywords: Aerobic threshold heart rate, Anaerobic threshold heart rate, Maximum heart rate
1.Introduction
Exercise any purpose that requires attention to three principles: intensity, duration and frequency
of exercise. Sports activities such as those found in some texts referred. In case of application of the
severity and duration of work, biological adaptations in the form of increased maximal oxygen
consumption (VO2max), anaerobic threshold is manifested. Generally, for exercise activities are
closely related and hence the combination of the two to achieve the desired biological adaptations,
is one of the following methods: 1. Moderate-intensity activity (60 -30 minutes) and high intensity
(anaerobic threshold slightly below, approximately 85-75% of maximum heart rate) 2. Activities of
moderate intensity (10 -4 min) and high intensity (anaerobic threshold slightly above,
approximately 95% to 75% of maximum heart rate) 3. Short-term activities (30 seconds to 3
minutes) and severe (in the VO2max, almost 100% of maximum heart rate) In an increasingly
physical activity, blood lactate increased workload Azshdt the bottom up, when amounts of 2 mmol
/ l increases, the amount of carbon dioxide as well as the pulmonary ventilation (VE / VO2)
increased disproportionately, as anaerobic threshold or lactate first break point (LTP1) defined [2].
In continuation of intensive training with the blood lactate almost 4 mmol / l increase, as well as
VE /VO2 rise further decreases known as anaerobic threshold or LTP2 called [8].The phenomenon
of lactate break point (LTP2), beginning accumulation of blood lactate (OBLA) and anaerobic
threshold as synonymous terms can be used interchangeably. Anaerobic threshold during the run,
also defined as MLSS ]4[, can be used as a tool used to predict the performance in endurance
athletes [5]. Based on the intensity of the activity areas can be established in a maximal exercise
blood lactate accumulation [9]. In this regard, the lactate threshold intensity less than the first
phase, the first and second lactate threshold intensity, phase two and higher than the second
threshold, lactate, classified phase III [11].In the first phase, blood lactate remains close to the
surface rest,But then with increased activity, increased lactate production and harvest is balanced
in phase two and phase three more in production will lead to withdrawal. Between phase one and
two, the lactate threshold is the equivalent of 40 to 60% of maximum oxygen consumption. And
between phases two and three, the second lactate threshold is the equivalent of 60 to 90% of
maximum oxygen consumption, is located.The anaerobic threshold between 60 to 80% of
maximum heart rate and anaerobic threshold between maximum heart rate is 80 to 90% [1].
Anaerobic threshold as the intensity of the work or the amount of oxygen consumption (VO2) is set
to start metabolic acidosis and respiratory gas exchange is associated with changes in [10].
Anaerobic threshold for detailed planning exercise intensity, always one of the important topics of
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------136
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
interest to researchers and scientists have been sports. Various methods are used to estimate the
anaerobic threshold generally is non-invasive and invasive procedures, but the consensus on this
matter which of these methods is better there. The most accurate method to determine the
anaerobic threshold, invasive procedures that require multiple blood samples during the
incremental test standards and determine the amount of lactate in the blood. On the other hand,
non-invasive methods for estimating anaerobic threshold that these methods are based on the
relationship between heart rate heartbeat-time work and determining break point (HRDP)
is[4,10].When a certain work activity or workload gradually increases, the increase in heart rate
associated with the work load during the recorded activity and heart rate curve - time work, is
drawn. The curve associated with an increased work load, heart rate also increases linearly must, in
the exercise intensity, with increasing work load, heart rate did not increase with the previous
harsh and deviate from a straight line is known as the point of failure, heart rate ( HRDP) is
called[6]. Anaerobic threshold intensity exercise that takes place is different from the athlete to
athlete. For example, non-prepared athletes and non-athletes anaerobic threshold, maximal oxygen
consumption between 55 to 65 percent or 70 to 77 percent of maximum heart rate, While
endurance athletes and athletic, anaerobic threshold may be more than 80% of maximal oxygen
uptake or to reach more than 88 percent of maximum heart rate. A study was conducted to
investigate how to control physiological observation that with increasing distance endurance
athletes practice with a smaller percentage of maximum heart rate work ,To the final haul to end its
practice [7]. So given that little information about the percentage of maximum heart rate for
aerobic and anaerobic threshold heart rate, especially in young people there, this study was
conducted to answer this question.
2.Method
The research method, quasi-experimental designs within the team it has been a repeated test. For
this purpose, 16 disabled students with no history of heart disease, pulmonary, on a voluntary basis,
were selected.The aerobic threshold and anaerobic threshold in this study, the first and second point
has to do with heart rate curve breaks. Changes in participants' heart rate during exercise protocol
implementations, using telemetry polar minute was recorded. To avoid any error when the minute
heart rate telemetry was used, two-hour special on the subject, one of which was closed and the
other was given to researchers. When the patient reaches the stage of exhaustion, the heart rate was
at maximum value that was recorded as maximum heart rate.
In this study, subjects during the last six months at least not any regular exercise. All subjects in
terms of public health and health status, health records and diseases, drug materials and energy, the
diet and level of physical sleep and motility were evaluated and homogeneity. As the age and sex also
plays a role in the identification of aerobic and anaerobic threshold and time to exhaustion, so for age
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------137
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
and sex were homogeneously. In addition, according to the study objectives and the impact of
physical inactivity and food on the variable, all subjects were asked to 48 hours before performing
any heavy physical exercise or 1-2 hours before eating fatty food and heavy refrain. Aerobic
threshold determined by the subjects Narita (74/8+(0/76×resting heart rate )_0/27× age+ 7/3×1)
was determined. Then for each subject were scheduled day and hour deadline for the
implementation of the first subjects in the study protocol, participated in the laboratory. In the
second phase the participants after the warm-up, Aerobic threshold for the calculation of heart rate
intensity running protocol, performed. Then, for each subject, date and time of the next steps in the
research laboratory to perform at least 72 hours from the scheduled time. In the third stage the
subjects after the warm-up, depending on individual protocols carried out to determine the
anaerobic threshold. To determine the anaerobic threshold increasingly dependent on individual
subjects, the protocol was used. After closing the Polar subjects, for 5 to 10 minutes to warm up to 70
percent of maximum heart rate activity until they reached their MHR. uivalent to 70 percent of MHR
test speed for 1 minute. Then with the passing of each minute, two kilometers an hour on the
treadmill speed increased. This practice continued to exhaustion .Heart rate Deflection point (HRDP)
in the protocol depends on the individual anaerobic threshold were considered as an indicator
estimate. HRDP using the short maximum distance (SDmax) was determined. The protocol depends
on the rate of subjects from the beginning to 70 percent of maximum heart rate by the end of
protocol collected using a computer program, curve polynomial function (Polynamial) set of points
(heartbeat-time) drawing and then baseline and end of the curve using a straight line connected to
each other. Most are the heartbeat of straight lines to curves. Heart rate as a point of failure
(anaerobic threshold) was determined using the slope of the parallel line[3]. Then at the last minute
maximum heart rate program also records the time spent in the laboratory protocol for the next step
was to research the subject. Finally, the participants after jogging warm-up protocol for the
calculation of the anaerobic threshold intensity were performed at the time exhaustion. Heart rate
and time to the minute treadmill speed was recorded at all stages. All measurements were
performed in laboratory conditions in terms of temperature and humidity. During the execution of
this study was to motivate more participants, was hosted them and in the end the gifts were donated
to them. In this study, descriptive statistics in categories of data mean, standard deviation, minimum
and maximum amount Variables charts to determine the anaerobic threshold SDMAX software was
used. Statistical analysis was performed using SPSS version 16.
The results of the students inactive with a mean age of19/46 ± 1/12 years,weight57/73± 7/87 kg,
height161/9 ± 6/08 cm and body mass index22/39 ±3/02 kg per square meter , showed that the
average maximum heart rate for subjects 189/46 Aerobic threshold heart rate of 135/66 was, So
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------138
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Aerobic threshold heart rate at 71/60% maximum heart rate is disabled students and Considering
that the average maximum heart rate for subjects 189/46anaerobic threshold heart rate of 175, so
the anaerobic threshold heart rate at 92/36% maximum heart rate is disabled students. The share of
aerobic system for energy increases, the person's heart rate less to operate. When we increase the
exercise intensity, heart rate increases and the share is reduced aerobic machines and other energy
supplier to assume the duty of energy supply, Glycolytic system that uses anaerobic glycolysis for
energy production deals. or anaerobic energy production from glycogen produced in the body that
causes the fatigue in the body and prevents the person from activities ,The most important of which
is to lactate, which causes fatigue and exhaustion Of course, this is not your lactate person, but
acidosis due to the accumulation of lactate in the blood and skeletal muscles that cause it to be.
These acids cause the blood to create disturbances in muscle contraction and is, thus, a substance
that is secreted at the end of neural synapses (Asytl choline), affects. And as the material plays an
important role in his contracting operation has been disrupted, contraction is quite good. Other
factors glycogen depletion and exhaustion include muscle, reducing energy phosphate (ATP), the
increase in hydrogen ions, ADP and Pi increase in the skeletal muscles and other factors reducing
training volume by increasing the amount of exercise.
References
1.Binder ,R., Wonisch, M.,Corra, U.,Cohen-Solal, A. 2008. Methodological approach to the first and
second lactate threshold in incremental cardiopulmonary exercise testing. European Journal of
Cardiovascular Prevention and Rehabilitation, 15: 726-734.
2.Bodner, M., Rhodes, E., Langill, R.1999.Heart rate threshold:Relationship to steady state cycling at
ventilatory threshold in trained cyclists.Jounal of Medicine& Science in Sports,31:p313.
3.Bodner M, Rhodes E, Langill R, et al. 2000. Heart rate threshold: relationship to steady state cycling
at ventilatory threshold in trained cyclists [abstract]. Med. Sci. Sports. Exerc. 3,1: 1561.
4.Chmura,J.,Nazar, K. 2010. Parallel changes in the onset of blood lactate accumulation (OBLA) and
threshold of psychomotor performance deterioration during incremental exercise after trainin in
athletes. International Journal of Psychology &Physiology,75: 287–290.
5. Coen, B., Urhausen, A., Kindermann, W. 2001. Individual anaerobic threshold:
Methological aspects of its assessment in running. International Journal of Sports Medicine, 20: 86. Conconi F, Ferrarti G, et al. 1982. Determination of the anaerobic threshold by a noninvasive field
test in runner. J. Appl. Physiol. 52, 4: 869-873.
7.Esteve-Lanao, J., Lucia A., deKoning, J., Foster, C.2008. How do humans control physiological strain
during strenuous endurance exercise.Journal of Medicine and Science in Sports,20: 29- 43.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------139
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
8 .Ghosh,AK.2004.Anaerobic threshold:Its concept and role in endurance sport. Malays Journal of
Medicine Science,11:24-36.
9. Kindermann,W., Simon, G., Keul,J. 1979. The significance of the aerobic–anaerobic transition for
the determination of work load intensities during endurance training. European Journal of Exercise
Sport, 51:234-248.
10. Rogers D, Turley K, et al. 1995. Allometric scaling factors for oxygen uptake during exercise in
children. Ped. Ex. Sci. 7: 12-25.
11. Seiler, S.,Tonnessen, E. 2009. Intervals thresholds and long slow distance: The role of intensity
and duration in endurance training.International Journal of Sports Physiological Performance, 15:
27-34.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------140
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The Effect of Noticing and Input Enhancement in Reading
on Speaking Skill by Intermediate Learners
Reza Abdi
Golnaz Tarbali
Department of ELT, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran,
Department of ELT, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran.
Abstract
This study was to determine the effect of noticing and input enhancement in reading on speaking skill. The
participants of this study were 30 learners attending a language learning institute in Ardebil in the form of two
groups. Two of the groups were at the intermediate level based on the proficiency test. The two groups at the
institute were assigned to one experimental group (enhanced input) and one control group (unenhanced input).
First we used the pre-test of speaking, then we had ten reading passages for each session. During the classroom,
we had some in-class instructional activities and finally a post-test of speaking was given to the learners and for
the assessment of learners' oral production, we used TOEFL speaking rubric. The analysis and comparison
between pre-test and post-test through paired sample t-test showed that noticing and input enhancement had
helped learners in the experimental group on intermediate level to learn more vocabulary items and improve
their oral production.
Keywords: Noticing, Enhanced input, Unenhanced input, Experimental group, Control group
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------141
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
1.Introduction
Speaking is being capable of speech, expressing or exchanging thoughts through using language.
“Speaking is a productive aural/oral skill and it consists of producing systematic verbal utterances to
convey meaning (Nunan, 2003).” Harmer (2001) notes down that from the communicative point of
view, speaking has many different aspects including two major categories – accuracy, involving the
correct use of vocabulary, grammar and pronunciation practiced through controlled and guided
activities; and fluency considered to be ‘the ability to keep going when speaking spontaneously’.
Among the elements necessary for spoken production, are the following (Harmer, 2001):
1.Connected Speech: effective learners of English need to be able not only to produce the individual
phonemes of English (as in saying I would have gone) but also to use fluent ‘connected speech’ as in
(I’d ‘ve gone). In connected speech sounds are modified, omitted, added or weakened.
2. Expressive Devices: native speakers of English change the pitch and stress of particular parts of
utterances, vary volume and speed, and show by other physical and non-verbal means how they are
feeling.
3. Lexis: spontaneous speech is marked by the use of number of common lexical phrases, especially
in the performance of certain language functions.
4. Negotiation and language: effective speaking benefits from the negotiator language we use to seek
clarification and to show the structure of what we are saying.
This study highlights vocabulary knowledge among these elements. Reading will enable learners to
develop their vocabulary knowledge which will effectively contribute to their speaking skills.
Reading is one of the most effective ways of foreign language learning. Reading simply is the
interpretation of a written message. Walter R. Hill (1979) briefly defines reading as what the reader
does to get the meaning he needs from contextual resources. Reading will add to learners’
conversational performance. Reading will help learners to decipher new words that they need for
conversations.
There is increasing high relationship between reading and speaking skill. People who develop larger
vocabulary capacity through reading tend to develop larger speaking vocabulary capacity. Indeed,
reading power relies on continuous improvement in vocabulary knowledge that provides
communication. Therefore fostering improvement in word knowledge through wide reading has the
potential for fostering improvement in speaking skills. Reading can play a big part in successful
language learning. It can develop speaking skills. It needs to be noted that speaking holds a very
significant place in foreign language learning because through speech messages are conveyed.
Noticing and input enhancement are necessary for changing input to intake and refers to conscious
attention to the occurrence of input and its storage in the long term memory(Schmidt, 1995). So in
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------142
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
order for learning to take place, learners must attend to and notice certain language features which
are crucial to the target system. Noticing involves conscious registration of an event; understanding
entails recognition of general principle, rule or pattern. According to Schmidt, it is awareness at the
level of noticing that is crucial for language learning. Conscious attention to the linguistic input
facilitates the restructuring of the learners' interlanguage system (Schmidt, 1995). Intake is that part
of the input that the learner notices (Schmidt, 1990).
Significantly, Homer combs (2005) claims that the greater saliency a particular form has in the input
to which the learner is exposed, the greater chances are for it to be selected by the L2 learner.
Although in the pedagogical arena of second language learning (L2) much of the input enhancement
and noticing research (Sharwood smith, 1993) has focused on different parts of grammar such as
conditional sentences and past simple sentences, or how noticing can influence intonation pattern,
the impact of this pedagogical technique addressed how noticing and input enhancement through
reading help learners improve their oral production and vocabulary learning in the second language
learning environment.
2. Method
The participants of this study were 30 English learners in the form of two classes. Two of the classes
were at the intermediate level. After the proficiency test these two classes assigned to one
experimental group (enhanced input) and one control group ( unenhanced input).The classes met
three times a week and instruction on reading passage in any of the two classes was took place in
last 30 minutes of each session. This study lasted for about two months with ten sessions; therefore,
ten reading passages were given to the leaners. For experimental group the reading passages with
highlighted vocabulary items were given to the learners but for the control group the reading
passages without highlighted vocabulary items were given to the learners. In the treatment part, the
highlighted vocabulary items were taught explicitly by the teacher for learners in experimental
group. We had some in-class instructional activities such as synonym and antonym for each
vocabulary item and also we had discussion about the topic of each reading passage by the teacher
and learners to engage the learners and promote their attention to notice those vocabulary items.
After ten session, the post-test of speaking was given to the learners and leraners'oral production
was recorded and assessed through speaking rubric. Finally the analysis of data was done through
the paired sample t-test.
3. Results
The first research question sought to investigate the efficiency of noticing and input enhancement in
reading on developing learners' oral production. To answer this question, a paired-sample t-test was
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------143
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
run to compare the mean scores on the pre-test and post-test of speaking to measure the effect of
noticing and input enhancement in reading on speaking. As displayed in Table 1, the mean score for
the control group was 7.97 and for the experimental group was 8.70.
Table 1
The Results of Paired Samples Statistics for Speaking Pre-test and Post-test
N
Std.
Std. Deviation Mean
Pair 1 speaking 7.97
30
1.564
.286
speaking 8.70
30
1.705
.311
Mean
Error
Statistically speaking, the first research question was rejected, indicating that noticing and input
enhancement had significant effect on developing students' oral production. We could also say that
there was a significant difference between control and experimental group according to the means of
the both groups.
Moreover, as table 2 showed, the significant of differences between two group was 0, so we could say
that there was a significant differences between the control group and experimental group and also
we could say that noticing and input enhancement had a significant effect on oral production of
students and through the improvement of students' oral production we could answer to the second
research question that noticing and input enhancement had a great effect on learning the vocabulary
items' of students. Table 2
The Results of Paired Sample T-test for Speaking Post-test
Paired Differences
Std.
Std.
Error
Mean Deviation Mean
Pair 1
speaking
-.733 .740
speaking
.135
95% Confidence
Interval of the
Difference
Lower Upper
t
df
-1.010 -.457
-5.430 29
Sig.
tailed)
(2-
.000
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------144
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
4. Discussion
The positive answer to the first research question showed that input enhancement had a significant
effect on the oral production of students. The performance of the two groups of students on the
achievement post-test indicated that the Enhanced group could outperform the Unenhanced group
on the developing their oral production. It was signified that the learners' ability to speak and learn
vocabulary would increase when the learners' attention was focused on a particular vocabulary in
the course of doing different reading texts. Furthermore, this study suggested that for learning
vocabulary and speaking in English noticing and awareness of the vocabulary items were
necessary.It was worth mentioning that the result of the present study was in line with Schmidt's
(1995) claim that noticing was necessary and effective in language learning. The finding also
supported other input enhancement studies that have reported the ability of the learners in
recognizing and producing vocabulary items correctly when their attention was focused on a
particular vocabulary items while doing reading texts (White, Spada, Lightbown, & Ranta, 1991;
White, 1998).
5. Conclusion
The result of this study might help teachers and practitioners in improving speaking skill and
learning vocabulary items. Input enhancement was a technique which can be used for drawing
students' attention to certain vocabulary items of input and increase the perceptual salience of these
vocabulary items and use them in their speaking in the second language environment. This, also,
would help students to focus on certain vocabulary items and increase the span of their lexical items.
Paying attention to language vocabulary items through input enhancement would be facilitative and
could assist learners in improving their language fluency.
6.References
1.Hammer, T. (2001). Teaching and learning in the language classroom. Oxford: Oxford University
Press.
2.Homber Combs, H. (2005). The push toward communication. Curriculum, Competence, and the
Foreign Language Teacher, 11, 57–79.
3.Nunan, D. (2003). Practical English language teaching. Boston: McGraw till.
4.Schmidt, R. (1990). The role of consciousness in second language learning. Applied Linguistic, 11,
129–158.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------145
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
5.Schmidt, R. (1993). Awareness and second language acquisition. Annual Review of Applied
Linguistic, 13, 206–226.
6.Schmidt, R. (1995). Consciousness and foreign language learning. A tutorial on the Role of Attention
and Awareness in Learning, 10, 1–63.
7.Walter, R.Hill. (1979), M. (2006). Games for language learning. Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press.
8.White, L., Spada, N., Lightbown, P., & Ranta, L. (1991). Input enhancement and L2 question
formation. Applied Linguistics, 12, 416–432.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------146
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The Effect of Collaboration Conditions on Learning
Requesting Functions
Reza Abdi
Rokhsareh Haghjoo
Associate Professor (Department of English Language Teaching, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil)
MA Student (Department of English Language Teaching, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil)
Abstract
Second language learners‟ poor knowledge of pragmatics has recently received attention among
researchers in language learning classrooms. The current study examined the effect of collaboration
conditions on requesting functions. To this purpose, sixty Iranian students were divided into three groups.
The proficiency test and a dialogue construction task as a pretest were administrated. Based on the result of
the proficiency test, participants were divided to three groups: two experimental groups(homogenous
collaborative group, heterogeneous collaborative group) and a control group. The experimental groups
received explicit metapragmatic information on request followed by a dialogue construction task in pairs
during 6 sessions of treatment. The control group received the same information but completed the task
individually. Results of One-way ANOVA of the post-test scores revealed that both experimental groups
outperformed the control group in producing request making.
Keywords: requesting functions, collaboration conditionsIntroduction
1.Introduction
Communicative competence is required for effective language use and communication (Johnson &
Johnson, 1998, p. 62). Pragmatic competence is an aspect of communicative competence and is included in
Canale and Swain's (1980) and Bachman‟s (1990) model of communicative competence. Ellis (2008)
defines pragmatic competence as consisting of the "knowledge of what constitutes appropriate linguistic
behavior in a particular situation" (p. 956).
An important part of educational systems is learning a foreign language. One of the problems of language
learners is that they cannot use their knowledge of language in real situations. This problem is even worse
in EFL setting, where learners have little chance of using language outside the classroom. One possible
solutions is using communicative methods in teaching.
Schmidt‟s (2001) noticing hypothesis and explicit vs. implicit teaching motivated by the hypothesis
recently dominates the field of instructed pragmatics. The noticing hypothesis claims that the attention of
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------147
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
learners to linguistic forms, functions and contextual factors are necessary for pragmatic input to become
intake.
Although implicit and explicit teaching have predominated in recent studies, new framework for pragmatic
instruction have been added to this field. The concept that is relevant to this study is collaboration
conditions. Collaborative dialogue is for the construction of linguistic knowledge, which is often
operationalized as language-related episodes (Swain and Lapkin 1998; Swain 2006). Collaborative
dialogue is a form of output, but it is an output used for a cognitive function because language mediates
learners‟ process of working together to solve linguistic problems and jointly construct knowledge (Swain
and Lapkin 1998). According to Swain and Lapkin (1998), students talk about the language the language
they are producing, question their language use, or correct each other. vite, permit, and advise.
In Searle‟s taxonomy (1969), command and order are categorized under request. Request can be defined
as attempts by the speakers to get the hearer to do something‟ or as an illocutionary act whereby a speaker
(requester) conveys to a hearer (requestee) that he/she wants the requestee to perform an act, which is for
the benefit of the speaker” (Searle 1976). Politeness is an aspect of pragmatics and concerns linguistic
forms that language users employ to display respect and consideration for their addressees. According to
Holmes (2006), linguistic politeness "is a matter of specific linguistic choices from a range of available
ways of saying something" and "has generally been considered the proper concern of pragmatics" (p. 711).
However, politeness has not been considered thoroughly in interlanguage pragmatics (ILP), as ILP has
mainly focused on what Kasper and Dahl (1991, p. 216) called the "narrow sense" of ILP, that is,
“nonnative speakers‟ comprehension and production of speech acts, and how their L2-related speech act
knowledge is acquired”.
Although implicit and explicit teaching have predominated in recent studies, new framework for pragmatic
instruction have been added to this field. The concept that is relevant to this study is collaboration
conditions in the construction of request functions.
The role of instruction and the teachability of specific pragmatic aspects (e.g. comprehension of
implicature, complimenting, apologising, and requests) have been investigated by scholars like Billmyer
(1990), Bouton (1994), Olshtain and Cohen (1993) and Tateyama (2001). Findings from these studies have
highlighted the positive effect of instruction on the learners‟ use of particular pragmatic items. Many
studies have investigated the effect of collaboration conditions on learning pragmatics. In Leeser‟s (2004)
study, twenty one pairs of adult L2 Spanish learners from a content-based course completed collaborative
task to see how focus on form can be both effective and appropriate. This article grouping learners on the
basis of proficiency (high–high, high–low, or low–low) for investigating the amount, type (lexical or
grammatical) and outcome (correct, unresolved, or incorrect) of language related episodes produced during
a passage reconstruction task. The findings revealed that the proficiency of the dyad members affected
how much the dyads focused on form, the types of forms they focused on as well as how successful they
were at resolving the language problems when they encountered problems (Leeser, 2004).
There are some studies about the role of collaboration conditions on learning vocabulary and grammar. But
to the best of my knowledge, previous studies have failed to explore the role of collaboration conditions on
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------148
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
request functions. This study intends to shed some light on the influence of collaborative conditions when
learners are heterogeneous or homogenous in learning request making.
The current study seeks to answer the following question:
1. Does collaborative dialogue has any effect on request making?
2.Method
The experimental sequence of the study was carried out over a period of around ten sessions. For the
groups to be comparable and for an experiment like this to be meaningful and for being sure that the
learners in the experimental and control groups enjoyed the same level of knowledge a proficiency test was
administrated in session one. Then based on the results of the proficiency test, participants divided into
three groups: two experimental groups (homogenous collaborative group, heterogeneous collaborative
group) and a control group. In session two a pre-test was given to all three groups which was a ten item
Discourse Completion Task (DCT) designed to elicit the request speech act in different situations and
assess the learners‟ knowledge of these prior to any type of treatment.
Task treatment sessions started with a dialogue. They listened to a short conversation including the
requests in focus. Then, they received a scripted version of the conversations in bold. After receiving the
direct metapragmatic information, the two treatment groups proceeding to the dialogue construction task,
during which learners will be asked to create a request based on given scenarios. The teacher explained to
the participants that a speaker, when speaking with an interlocutor, has to consider the social status and role
relationship of the participants and the imposition of the speech act and determine the degree of formality
and indirectness required for each situation (sociopragmatic points) and accordingly choose an appropriate
politeness strategy. The collaborative groups created a request in pairs. The control group did request
making individually. After the treatment, immediate posttests with the same procedure and order of test
presentations as the pretests were administered to the participating learners.
The current study was an attempt to demonstrate whether collaboration conditions had any impact on Iranian
EFL learner‟s production of request functions. In brief, it was denoted that treatment had a positive impact
on the production of request functions. Having gained some information about the differences in the
performance of the members of the three groups on the post-test to determine whether or not the observed
differences were significant at the critical value (Sig.) of p<0.05. Therefore, a one-way between-groups
ANOVA was conducted. Table 1 provides the results of the ANOVA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------149
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Table 1
The Results of One–way ANOVA for the Post-test
Between groups
Within groups
Total 2549.367
SS
2036.742
512.625
24
Df
2
27
MS
1018.371
18.986
F
53.638
Sig
.000
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------150
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
On a closer inspection of Table 1, one can conclude that the three groups differed significantly with respect
to their mean scores on the post-test because the significant value is observed to be 0.000, which is less
than the critical value (0.05). Although the information presented in Table 7 is very revealing, it does not
show where the observed differences lie. The researchers, therefore, had to run a Scheffe Post-hoc test.
This post-hoc test indicates where the differences among the three groups occur.
The fact that those who were in the homogenous group did significantly better on the posttest suggests that
collaboration conditions in homogenous group were effective in leading learners to produce linguistically
accurate and pragmatically appropriate requests. Findings in this study lend further support to those studies
on the positive effects of explicit instruction which employed explanation and discussion of rules as their
approach to provide learners with metapragmatic information (Kubota, 1995; LoCastro, 1997; Trosborg,
2003; Yoshimi, 2001; Wishnoff, 2000). Another findings contribute to the task-based literature by
demonstrating the benefits of collaborative tasks in improving pragmatics knowledge. Takimoto (2012)
found that collaborative dialogue in a form of metapragmatic discussion gave learners access to
information about pragmatic features, which eventually led to better control of pragmatic knowledge than
the condition where learners completed the task alone, with or without verbalization of the target features.
References
1.Billmyer, K. (1990). 'I really like your lifestyle.' Learning how to compliment in English. Working
Papers in Educational Linguistics, 6 (2), 31 48.
2.Bachman, L. (1990). Fundamental considerations in language testing. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
3.Canale, M., & Swain, M. (1980). Theoretical bases of communicative approaches to second language
teaching and testing. Applied Linguistics, 1(1), 1-47.
4.Ellis, R. (2008). The study of second language acquisition (2nd ed.). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
5.Holmes, J. (2006). Politeness strategies as linguistic variables. In J. L. Mey (Ed.), Concise encyclopedia
of pragmatics (711-723). Elsevier Ltd.
6.Johnson, K., & Johnson, H. (1998). „Encyclopedic dictionary of applied linguistics‟. Oxford: Blackwell
Publishers.
7.Kasper, G., & Dahl, M. (1991). Research methods in interlanguage pragmatics. Studies in Second
Language Acquisition, 13(2), 215-247.
8.Kubota, M. (1995). Teachability of conversational implicature to Japanese EFL learners. The Institute for
Research in Language Teaching Bulletin, 9, 35–67.
9.Olshtain, E. & A. Cohen (1990). “Thelearning of complex speech act behaviour”. TESL Canada Journal,
7, 45 65.
10.Schmidt, R. (2001). „Attention‟ in P. Robinson (ed.): Cognition and Second Language Instruction.
Cambridge University Press, pp. 3–32.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------151
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
11.Searle, J. (1969). Speech acts: Am essay in the philosophy of language. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
12.Swain, M. (2006). „Languaging, agency and collaboration in advanced second language Proficiency‟ in
H. Byrnes (ed.): Advanced Language Learning: The Contribution of Halliday and Vygotsky. Continuum,
pp. 95–108.
13.Swain, M. and S. Lapkin. (1998). Interaction and second language learning: Two adolescent French
immersion students working together. Modern Language Journal, 82, 320–37.
14.Tateyama, Y. (2001). Explicit and implicit teaching of pragmatic routines: Japanese sumimasen in Rose
& Kasper (eds.), 200-222.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------152
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The Effect of Teaching Compositional, Semi-compositional,
and Non-compositional Idioms on Intake of EFL Learners
Reza Abdi
Ghazal Farangizade
Department of ELT, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran
Department of ELT, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran
Abstract
This study aimed at investigating how 30 Persian learners of English at intermediate level used their
first language knowledge to comprehend and produce three types of English idioms, which were
included as compositional, semi-compositional, and non-compositional idioms. The learners were
divided into two groups; one experimental and one control. A pre-test which included both
comprehension and production tests were administered to each group. Then, experimental group
was received treatment in the form of small conversations, but control group was not received any
treatment. In the last session both groups were received immediate post-test and after one month, a
delayed post-test was taken. For the analysis of data a t-test and ANOVA were employed. Results in
both groups showed that compositional idioms had the highest correct responses, followed by semicompositional idioms, and non-compositional idioms were the most difficult to comprehend and
produce. In addition, in both groups learners performed better in comprehension rather than
production test.
Keywords: Idiomatic expressions, Compositional, Semi-compositional, Non-compositional idiom,
Idiom comprehension, Idiom production
1. Introduction
Language plays a crucial role in humans' life, and the ability to learn a language is one of the greatest
cognitive and mental gains among humankind. Although language can be learned and achieved from
various points of view, but showing a satisfactory picture of how human beings gain a native or
foreign language and specially their specific expressions can be difficult. However, in recent years
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------153
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
many researchers and linguists have been found a lot of information about what is language and
how it is used as a first or second language.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------154
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
In second language research, there has a much less attention paid to the lexicon than the other parts
of language, although this picture is quickly changing (Nation, 2001). In reality the lexicon are
important and essential parts of the language that without them the L2 learners cannot produce
sentences to understand them. Second language learners have difficulty in vocabulary learning since
many English words have two or more meanings especially when they occur in idioms or
expressions and deciding the correct meaning is demanding for learners.
Idioms cannot be defined clearly and comprehensively. This lack of clear and exact definition of
idioms causes teachers and learners some difficulty dealing with idioms (Grant & Bauer, 2004). To
overcome this problem, idioms should be taught and defined very clearly.
Mäntylä (2004) argued that in the past, when language was studied through its structure rather than
meaning, idioms were studied on the basis of their form, and from was on the basis of idioms
definition. Idioms were considered as frozen and multi-word expressions that have little or no
structural variation. Idioms were also seen as dead expressions because there was no relationship
between their meaning and origin. But after the emergence of functionalist approach to the study of
language, the focus shifted from idiom structures to idiom meaning.
Not only are idioms commonly and frequently used in all forms of discourse such as conversations,
lectures, movies, television programs, and so on, but also they are very difficult for L2 learners to
comprehend and produce effectively (Fotovatnia & Khaki, 2012).
Gibbs study stated that idioms are found in all of the languages and some types of the idioms are
culture-specific; it means that these idioms express the same meaning but the way they used and
words which are included in them is different from one culture to another. This explanation opens
some ways to make a classification for idioms in different cultures.
Idioms are classified into three types based on their translation according to the learners’ mother
tongue, which is the purpose of the current study.
The first type which was named as compositional, literal (Fernando, 1996), transparent (Gibbs,
1987), identical idioms, refers to the word by word translation of idioms. For example; English
idiom: He is only skin and bone. Persian idiom: ‫فقط پوست و استخوان است‬.
The second type was known as semi-compositional, similar, and semi (Fernando, 1996) idioms. This
type refers to the idioms that are similar in some words. For example; English idioms: rainy day.
Persian idiom: ‫روز مبادا‬.
The last type was addressed as non-compositional, transparent (Gibbs, 1987), different and pure
(Fernando, 1996) idioms, which are totally different but express the same meaning. For example;
English idiom: pulling his leg. Persian idiom: ‫او را دست انذاختن‬.
In recent years many works have been done in the area of language transfer and that they have
emphasized on the importance of transfer strategy in the process of second language acquisition, but
a very little work has been done on the role of transfer in the acquisition of English idioms EFL
English language learners especially in Iran. So the findings of the current study open some ways for
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------155
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
researchers to explain the power of transfer strategy with regard to Iranian English language
learners' performance in comprehension and production of English idioms. Generally, the result of
this study help linguists and language teachers to gain some knowledge about which types of idioms
show positive and which type of idioms show negative transfer. In addition, this study will help
language teachers to make a comparison between teaching idioms to different students with
different proficiency levels.
This study intended to address the following research questions:
1) Which of the three kinds of idioms, including compositional, semi-compositional, and noncompositional idioms will be comprehended and produced easily by intermediate EFL English
language learners?
2) Do learners perform better in comprehension or production of English idioms?
Based on the above research questions we come up with the following null hypothesis
H01: There are no significant differences between the comprehension and production of three
different idioms by intermediate EFL English language learners.
H02: There are no significant differences between the Iranian students’ performance in
comprehension and production of English idioms.
2. Method
Participants
The participants in this study were 30 Persian, English language learners at intermediate level. They
were randomly divided into two groups; 15 students in experimental and 15 students in control
group. Both men and woman were selected for this study.
Instrument
The materials that were used for this study included as: a pre-test, immediate post-test, and a
delayed post-test. The idioms and conversations were selected from the books entitled as 101
American English Idioms; speak English like an American and thesis of Sirus Izadpanah (1996). The
pre-test consisted 15 multiple choice questions and 15 production questions and immediate and
delayed post-test which were exactly the same, had 30 multiple choice questions and 30 production
questions and all of the tests were selected from the thesis of Sirus Izadpanah. For the analysis of
data a t-test and ANOVA were employed.
Procedure
This experiment was lasted for about 10 sessions; a pre-test which included both comprehension
and production tests were administered to both groups at first and second session. Then, from
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------156
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
session 3 until session 10, experimental group was received treatment in the form of small
conversions which included these three kinds of idioms. The total numbers of idioms were 60 and
they were received 6 of them each session. But control group was not received any treatment. On
session 10 both groups were received immediate post-test and after two weeks or one month, a
delayed post-test was taken. In all of the tests content of comprehension and production tests were
exactly the same.
Data Analysis
For the analysis of data a t-test and ANOVA were employed through the SPSS program.
Before answering research question, first of all the normality was checked in order to demonstrate
that whether our data were normal or not, or in the other words they were normally distributed. As
shown in Table 2 in the following, all four groups in each test showed normality since the sig of
Kolmogorov-smirnov in all of them is greater than 0.05.
The first research question aimed to examine which three types of idioms in each exam such as pre,
post, and delay test were comprehended and produced easily by high school English language
learners. For answering this question repeated measure ANOVA was used followed by post hoc for
determining the relation between three types of idioms. For both, multiple choice and production
test, correct answers were awarded 1 point, whereas wrong answers received 0 points.
The empirical results in SPSS showed that in both groups and in both tests of comprehension and
production, identical or compositional idioms were the easiest to comprehend and produce,
followed by similar or semi-compositional idioms which were well comprehended , and different
and non-compositional idioms were the most difficult to comprehend and produce. In the other
words, there is a significant difference between three types of idioms (sig<0.05) in both groups. So
in here the null hypothesis is rejected because there is a significant difference between the
comprehension and production of three different idioms by intermediate English language learner.
The purpose of the second question was to find whether the students performed better in
comprehension or production test of idioms. For answering this question a paired t-test was used.
The results showed that both groups in three tests performed better in comprehension rather than
production test. The null hypothesis is rejected since there is a significant difference between the
students’ performance in comprehension and production of English idioms.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------157
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
What we conclude from the previous part is that, compositional idioms are the easiest one to
comprehend and produce since they are word by word translation of students’ mother tongue
idioms, so comprehension and production and in the other words, their remembrance is easier for
students which is followed by semi-compositional idioms which are a bit difficult than
compositional idioms and differ in some small details and words and well comprehend by students;
and finally non-compositional idioms which are totally different from the students mother tongue
idioms, are the most difficult one for students to remember in order to comprehend and produce.
On the other hand, comprehension of idioms is easier for learners rather than production of idioms,
since in comprehension the learners just understand its meaning and relates it to their mother
tongue idioms but in production they should be able to produce a new expression by using new
words.
This study had following limitations and delimitations:
1. The participants in this study were 30 students, so the generalizability of the results must be
treated curiously.
2. The background knowledge of the learners could have affected their answering to the
comprehension and production test; however this was not the concern for this study. For example
they might have passed an idiom course in institutes.
3. In this study only intermediate English language learners involved.
4.References
1.Fernando, C. (1994). Idioms and Idiomaticity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
2.Fotovatnia, Z., Khaki, Gh. (2012). The effect of three techniques for teaching English idioms to
Iranian TEFL undergraduates. Theory and practice in language studies, 2(2), 272–281.
3.Gibbs, R. W., Jr. (1987). Linguistic factors in children’s understanding of idioms. Journal of Child
Language, 14, 569–586.
4.Grant, L., & Bauer, L. (2004). Criteria for re-defining idioms: Are we braking up the wrong tree?
Applied linguistics, 25(1), 38–61.
5. Izadpanah, S. (1996). A study of the effects of transfer on the acquisition of idioms in a foreign
language by Iranian FL learners. M.A. thesis, Islamic Azad University of Tabriz.
6.Mäntylä, K. (2004). Idioms and language users: The effect of the characteristics of idioms on their
recognition and interpretation by native and non-native speakers of English. Jyvaskyla: University of
Jyvaskyla.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------158
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
7.Nation, I.S. P. (2001). Learning vocabulary in another language. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge
University Press.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------159
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Exercise and Diabetes: A Review of the Evidence
Sajjad Azizkhah Alanagh
Marefat Siahkohian
Afshin Dalir
MA student of Sport physiology, physical education and sports science, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran
Full Profesor of Sport physiology, physical education and sports science, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran
MA student of Sport physiology , physical education and sports science, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran
Abstract
Diabetes or Diabetes is a big problem in public health communities. More than 300/000 people
worldwide have the disease. According to the World Health Organization, nearly two million Iranians
in the year 2000 deaths have been diagnosed with the disease. Projections indicate that by the year
2030 the number of people with diabetes 6/5 million people increases. This is followed by
hyperglycaemia occur. Sports critical role in the prevention and control of diabetes plays. . Since the
role of exercise in controlling this disease has been shown, Exercise can prevent the development of
diabetes. Therefore, should exercise appropriate clinical care systems people be at risk of diabetes.
In this article, we briefly review the pathophysiological diabetes. The more detailed the benefits of
exercise therapy on glycaemic control and cardiovascular risk factors in diabetes, Along with
recommendations and instructions sports programs will be discussed.
Keywords: diabetes, hyperglycemia, pathophysiological, glycemic control
1.Introduction
Diabetes is a disease that is based on the apidemik metabolici estimation of the offered about five to
eight percent of adults in the world to it is suffering. The risk of death and premature morbidity,
cardiac diseases, renal, neurologic, and blindness in people with double the non-diabetic people (1).
Although regular physical activity may have occurred in the prevention and treatment of Diabetes
and complications involved, but most of the people in the prone to diabetes are disabled.In this
Review article on this is after trying to provide knowledge about the beneficial effects of exercise in
diabetes some instructions about the administration of the training program for these individuals
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------160
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
offering. Two General forms of Diabetes mellitus and Diabetes insipidus classified. No taste in
diabetes sugar absorbed in indigent there is no blood and urine volume increased only due to
diabetes there is a resemblance. The two main forms of diabetes mellitus type 1 and type 2 classified.
The other type is less common, Gestational diabetes and this in the happens during pregnancy. The
risk of diabetes increases with age, obesity and inactivity (2).
The immediate effects of exercise
Fuel metabolism during exercise: Muscle contraction absorbed blood glucose to the muscles.
Physical activity causes a change in the substrate of the free fatty acids (the dominant fuel during the
rest) to mitochondrium, glycogen, glucose, fat, muscle, and amino acids may be less than the amount
(4). Classification of evidence-based Gatherer: physical activity increased the uptake of active
glucose to the muscles and liver glucose production to maintain blood glucose helps. Of the story,
with increasing exercise intensity relying on high carbohydrate to active muscles.
Insulin dependent glucose absorption and no dependent insulin during exercise: Evidencebased conclusions: the absorption of glucose into skeletal muscle insulin stimulation during rest,
mostly by the enumerator is disturbed in diabetic individuals, while Contracting muscle transfer of
glucose insulin sensitivity through improved and more mechanisms stimulation of separate.
The effects of aerobic exercise: During moderate intensity exercise in non-diabetic, glucose uptake,
climbing by peripheral tissues (skeletal muscle) with increased liver glucose production.The result is
that blood glucose during long-term exercise does not change (3).Evidence-based conclusions:
Moderate intensity aerobic exercise, insulin action and glucose uptake by skeletal muscles to
improve temporarily. In these conditions and without the use of in these conditions and without the
use of insulin causing poor blood glucose risk of outsourcing.
The effects of resistance training: In the immediate effects of resistance training on blood glucose
levels in diabetic patients compared to aerobic exercise there is little evidence. In people with prediabetes conditions (level glucose 100 to 125 mg per deciliter) resistance training resulting in a
decrease in fasting blood glucose for up to 24 hours thereafter.
Evidence-based conclusions: Report about the immediate effects of resistance training in diabetic
patients is limited, but the people before diabetes is a resistance exercise to reduce blood glucose for
24 hour.
Instantaneous changes in muscle insulin resistance: Gorman and Partners showed up to 16
hours after a aerobic exercise reduces blood glucose and paths signal are actively involved in glucose
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------161
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
uptake into the skeletal muscle (5). In one study showed immediate improvements in insulin
sensitivity in women low-intensity and high-intensity diabetes walk (with the same amount of
energy consumed) were similar (6). Evidence-based conclusions: Physical activity enhances
insulin action instantaneously, which will last from two to 72 hours.
Long-term effects of exercise training
Blood glucose levels and insulin resistance: Traditionally prescribed for the prevention and
treatment of diabetes aerobic exercise.Even an hour of aerobic exercise a week can Sensitivity
improve insulin in diabetic patients. Exercise can skeletal muscle response to insulin by increasing
expression or he activity of proteins involved in metabolism and insulin signaling lift. Practicing a
person's status, the use of carbohydrate during exercise aerobic is affected. A few weeks of aerobic
training increased use of fat during the same activity this action saves muscle glycogen and blood
glucose and finally, reduction of glycogen after exercise is less immediate (7). Evidence-based
conclusions: Both aerobic and resistance training action of insulin, improves glucose control and
lipid oxidation them. At the same time, however, resistance training increases muscle mass effects as
well.
Evidence-based conclusions: Blood lipid response to exercise is not clear, but may be partial
reduction in LDL cholesterol and no change in HDL cholesterol and triglycerides to be accompanied.
But the combination of weight loss and physical activity compared to exercise alone in improving
lipid profile more effective.
High blood pressure: High blood pressure is a major problem that about 60 percent of diabetics are
faced with hair (9( .In a study by the American Diabetes Association showed injury and weight
reduction in both systolic and diastolic blood pressure in diabetes reduced (10).Evidence-based
conclusions: Aerobic exercise may be systolic blood pressure decreased slightly, but the decrease in
pressure lower diastolic blood injury in diabetic patients is common.
Mortality and risk of cardiovascular disease: Diabetes is one of the main causes of cardiovascular
disease. As the prevalence diabetes, heart attacks and strokes in patients with triple Group is
matched controls (10). Evidence-based conclusions: Studies suggest that physical activity and
physical fitness to reduce the risk of death mortality from cardiovascular disease in people with
diabetes.
Body weight maintenance and loss: Obesity is a risk factor for diabetes and negative effects
significant progress and treatment of diabetes. Studies show that people can be managed to reduce
significantly the weight of which about 7 hours per week of moderate to pay to sports (15).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------162
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Evidence-based conclusions: Evidence suggests to weight loss through exercise alone, at least 60
minutes of activity exercise per day is needed.
Evidence-based conclusions: It seems to do three sessions exercise activities to improve mental
health and quality of life people with diabetes can help.
Physical activity recommendations for diabetics
Aerobic exercise:
Number of training sessions: Aerobic exercise at least three days week with 48 hours of rest
between intervals of exercise done. In most clinical studies, exercise interventions in diabetes three
days a week Intensity: Aerobic exercise should be moderate, about 40 to 60 percent of maximum
aerobic capacity )Vo2max) run.
Duration: Diabetic patients with at least 150 minutes per week do moderate intensity.
Implementation of 150 minutes, intensity exercise aweek of moderate to severe reduction in
mortality in diabetic patients their relatives (12). Evidence-based conclusions: People with
diabetes should at least aerobic exercise for at least 150 minutes per week of moderate to severe
three days a week.
Resistance training
Number of training sessions: resistance training at least two times week (course three times
better) with doing aerobic exercise, This means that a combination of resistance training and aerobic
each session will lead to greater improvement in insulin sensitivity it is possible (12).
Intensity: Resistance training should be moderate intensity (50% repetition maximum, maximum
weight that can be lifted once) or evere (75 to 80% of one repetition maximum) to achieve the goal
improvement in muscle strength and improve insulin action be taken (13).
Duration: at least five to ten movements per training session that includes the large muscles of the
upper and lower trunk and every move must be repeated 10 to 15 times per set (12,13,14).
Evidence-based conclusions: In addition to aerobic exercise, people diabetes need two to three
sessions per week of resistance training moderate to severe (at least six repetitions for each move)
to pay.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------163
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Athletes and clinical considerations:
-Before
and
even
after
exercise
insulin
dose
should
be
reduced.
-Blood
glucose
before,
during
and
after
exercising
to
be.
-With
low
levels
of
blood
glucose
is
not
to
exercise.
-A meal or snack containing carbohydrates 3 hours ago the sport is received.
-Always some carbohydrate compounds such as chocolate, fruit dried (raisins) and fruits is
associated
person.
-Team coach and as a person skilled person aware of the condition of diabetes.
-In order to prevent dehydration always received lots of water (16,17).
2.Method
This study is a documentary research. Using analysis and based on studies and research carried out
in recent years to address the issue of pay.
Sports play a key role in the prevention and control of insulin resistance, pre-diabetes conditions and
problems
Diabetes-related health plays. Both aerobic exercise and insulin resistance and improve glucose
management
Blood, blood lipids, blood pressure, risk of death and cardiovascular mortality and quality of life are.
It should be noted for the advantage of these benefits, exercise regularly and continued to do be.
4.References
1. Thomas GN, Jiang CQ, Taheri S, Xiao ZH, et al. A systematic review of lifestyle modification and
glucose intolerance in the prevention of diabetes. Curr Diabetes Rev. 2010; 6: 378-87.
2. American Diabetes Association. Standards of medical care in diabetes. Diabetes Care. 2011; 34: 1161.
3. Suh SH, Paik IY, Jacobs K. Regulation of blood glucose homeostasis during prolonged exercise. Mol
Cells. 2007; 23:272-9.
4. Goodwin ML. Blood glucose regulation during prolonged, submaximal, continuous exercise: a
guide for clinicians. J Diabetes Sci Technol. 2010; 4(3): 694-705.
5. O'Gorman DJ, Karlsson HK, McQuaid S, Yousif O, et al. Exercise training increases insulinstimulated
glucose disposal and GLUT4 (SLC2A4) protein content in patients with diabetes.Diabetologia. 2006;
49: 2983-92.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------164
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
6. Galbo H, Tobin L, van Loon LJ. Responses to acute exercise in diabetes, with an emphasis
On metabolism and interaction with oral hypoglycemic agents. Appl Physiol Nutr Metab.2007; 32(3):
567-75.
7. Saremi A, Moslehabadi M, Parastesh M. [Effects of Twelve-week Strength Training on Serum
Chemerin, TNF-α and CRP Level in Subjects with the Metabolic Syndrome].IJEM. 2011; 12: 536-43.
8. Saremi A, Gheraati MR. [The effect of resistance training on serum myostatin level and insulin
resistance in obese/overweight men]. HARAKAT. 2010; 4: 93-108.
9. Saremi A. Effects of resistance training on serum chemerin level and cardiometabolic risk factorsin
obesemen. 2nd International Congress of Metabolic Syndrome, Obesity & Diabetes. 2010; Zanjan,
Iran.
10. Stewart KJ. Role of exercise training on cardiovascular disease in persons who have diabetes and
hypertension. Cardiol Clin. 2004; 22: 569-86.
11. Pi-Sunyer X, Blackburn G, Brancati FL, Bray GA, et al. Reduction in weight and cardiovascular
disease risk factors in individuals with diabetes: one-year results of the look AHEAD trial.Diabetes
Care. 2007; 30: 1374-83.
12. Donnelly JE, Blair SN, Jakicic JM, Manore MM, et al. American College of Sports Medicine Position
Stand. Appropriate physical activity intervention strategies for weight loss and prevention of weight
regain for adults. Med Sci Sports Exerc. 2009; 4:459-71.
13. Nelson ME, Rejeski WJ, Blair SN, Duncan PW,et al. Physical activity and public health in older
adults: recommendation from the American College of Sports Medicine and the American Heart
Association. Med Sci Sports Exerc. 2007; 39: 1435- 45.
14. Dunstan DW, Daly RM, Owen N, Jolley D, et al.Home-based resistance training is not sufficient to
maintain improved glycemic control following supervised training in older individuals with diabetes.
Diabetes Care. 2005; 28: 3-9.
15. Gordon BA, Benson AC, Bird SR, Fraser SF. Resistance training improves metabolic health in
diabetes: a systematic review. Diabetes Res Clin Pract. 2009; 83: 157-75.
16. American Diabetes Association. Diabetes mellitus and exercise. Diabetes Care. 2002; 25: 64570.
17. Hornsby WG, Chetlin RD. Management of competitive athletes with diabetes. Diabetes pectrum.
2005; 18: 102-7.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------165
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Optimal Design of PI Controller for Load Frequency
Control in a Two-Area Power System with DFIG Based
Wind Turbine
Samira Fallahi
Hossein Shayeghi
Abdolah Younesi
Abstract
Stability of power system is one of the most important aspects in electric system action in the
presence of wind power. The technological advancements have made it possible for wind generators
to participate in frequency control. This paper shows the optimal design of the PI controller for an
interconnected power system with dynamic participation of doubly fed induction generator based
wind turbines (DFIG) in two case. The Power system model 1 is a two area interconnected power
system without DFIG and the Power system model 2 is a two area interconnected power system with
DFIG. DA algorithm is used for optimal PI controller of two area system and speed controller of DFIG
parameters with considering 2% load disturbance in area 1.
Keywords: Doubly fed induction generator (DFIG), Load frequency control, Inertial control, Wind
energy conversion system.
1. Introduction
Among the various sources of renewable energy, the wind is one of the most promising sources [1].
Frequency regulation in a generation mix having large wind power penetration is a critical issue. The
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------166
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
aim of the LFC in a power system is to provide an acceptable high level of power quality while
maintaining both voltage and frequency within tolerance limits [2]. Wind turbine generation does
not participation in frequency regulation services in power systems. Doubly fed induction generator
(DFIG)-based wind turbines to demonstrate their possibility to provide separate active and reactive
power control [3]. Few methods are reported in the literature on how variable speed wind turbine
(VSWT) can participate in system frequency regulation [4, 5]. The first method is based on inertial
control and other is power reserve (pitch and speed control) and third is control by communication
method. Inertial control is provided by the DFIG through a supplementary inertia control loop with a
suitable gain [6]. That it is sensitive to system frequency and releases kinetic energy from DFIG. DFIG
injected active power during frequency exclusion. That it is proportional to the derivative of system
frequency [7]. Different method is used to maintain the power system in the stability state. In [8] a
nonlinear artificial neural network controller based on µ-synthesis deal with the LFC issue of interconnected power system was proposed. Çam & Kocaarslan in [9] are used a fuzzy game scheduling
proportional and integral controller for improving load frequency dynamic performance of a two
area power system. The objective of this paper is designing optimal PI controller for load frequency
control of a two area interconnected system with DFIG-based wind turbines in both areas.
2.Simulation Model
Fig 1 shows the linearized model of two area interconnected power system. The model includes
system parameters such as damping factor (D), the drop (R), the inertia H, governor time constant
(Th) and turbine time constant (Tt) , power system time constant (Tp) and power system gain (Kp).
The parameter values are presented in [10]. The ∆Pg is the output from which the incremental power
demand ∆PD is sub ducted. The incremental hydraulic valve position change is shown with ∆P h. ∆PNC
is added to the system according to Eq 1.
1 ,
2H
(1)
(2)
Pg  PNC  P12  PD  Pf
K 
T 
P
D
P
fD
Fig 2 shows the model DFIG-based wind turbine control based on frequency change. The base of
emulation control given in Ref [11, 12]. In emulation control of the DFIG, an additional control signal
tries to conform the power set point ∆Pf* as a function of deviation and rate of change of frequency.
The controllers have a duty to keep the turbine at optimal speed in order to generate the maximum
power. The controller provides a power set point ∆PW* that is based on measured speed and
measured electrical power. ∆PNC is consisting of two parts; ∆Pf* and ∆PW* that are based on frequency
change and optimum turbine speed respectively, as is given by:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------167
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Pf*   K df
df
 K Pf f
dt
PW*   KWP W *  W   KWi  W *  W  dt (4)
(3)
(5)
PNC  Pf*  PW*
Where KWP and KWi are constants of the PI controller. The contribution of the DFIG in system inertia is
given by:
2 H d f
 Pf  D f
f dt
 Pg  PNC  P12  PD  Df
(6)
 2H
 d f
 K df 
 Pf  Df

f

 dt
(7)
2H*
 Pg  PNC  P12  PD   K pf  D  f
D*
Freq
B1

K
KP1  I1 
S

12


B2
1 R1

Area  1
PD1

Pg1
1
1
1  sTh1
Ph1
DFIG1
1  sTt1

measurement
f
K P1
1  sTP1
2 T
s
1
K
KP2  I 2
S 
1 R2
P
h2
1
1 sTh2
1
1  sTt 2
sTW
1
1  sTr x1 1  sTW
KP2
KWi
s


*
 

Pg2
Area  2 PD 2
f1
W ashout
filte r
f 2
DFIG1
Fig 1. The model of two area interconnected power system
based frequency change
Reference point ∆Pf* is obtained as follows:
Pf * 
1
(X 2 )
R
1
R
x 2
min
x3

Speed  controller
1  sTP 2
 
Droop
KWP
max
*
Pf
max

*
P

max

min
1
2sH e
1
1  sTr

min
PNC
Wind
Turbine


P NC,ref
Fig 2. DFIG-based wind turbin
(8)
Where ∆X2 is the frequency change measured where the wind turbine is connected to the network.
3. Dragonfly Algorithm
The main inspiration of the DA emanates from the static and dynamic swarming behaviors of
dragonflies. Two basic phases of optimization exploration and exploitation, are designed by
modeling the social in traction of dragonflies in navigating, searching for foods and avoiding enemies
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------168
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
when searching dynamically or statistically. There are five main factors in position updating of
individuals in swarms as follows:
N
N
s i   x x j
(9)
Fi  x   x
(12)
Ai 
j 1
v
j 1
N
j
(10)
N
Ei  x   x
Ci 
x
j 1
j
x
N
(11)
(13)
Where x is the position of the current individual, xj is the j-th neighbouring individual and N is the
number of tham, vj is the velocity of j-th tham, x+ and x- show the position of the food source and
enemy respectively. The position of artificial dragonflies update as follow:
x i 1   sS i  aAi  cC i  fFi  eE i  w x t
(14)
x t 1  x t  x t 1
(15)
Where s, a, c, w show the weight factor, f is the food factor, e is the enemy factor and t is the iteration
counter. To improve the randomness, position of dragonflies is updated as following:
x t 1  x t  levy (d)  xt
(16)
levy (x)  0.01
r1  
r2
1
(17)

Where d is the dimension of the position vectors, r1 and r2 are two random numbers in [0,1], β is a
constant equal to 1.5 in this work. Finally, the algorithm work is completed [13].
x

  x
 1 !
(18)

  
  1     sin 

 2 


  1 



1




2


 
   2
2









1

(19)
3. PI Controller Design
In this paper, the PI controller based on DA algorithm has been investigated for LFC in the two
area interconnected power system with the dynamic participation of DFIG based wind turbine.
To raise the participation of the DFIG in frequency control parameters of speed controller from
DFIG have been obtained. The result has been shown for 10% wind penetration level in table 1.
The ITAE technique is used for obtaining the optimum value of controller as following:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------169
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
J  ITAE 
tsim
  F
1
 F2  Ptie  .tdt
(20)
0
4.Simulation ResultS
Simulations have been done in a two area system check the influence of the DFIG in system
frequency control. The results have been extracted for a load perturbation of 2% in area 1 with 10%
level of wind penetration. DA algorithm to obtain the optimal values of the controller is used. Fig 3-5
show the response of the power system with considering DFIG in both areas and without DFIG.
Tables 2 shows analyze result for power system with and without DFIG based wind turbine. The
result shows effectively presence in frequency control.
Table 1. Optimal parameters of the controller for 10% wind penetration
Controller
Area 1
parameter
Kp1*
Ki1*
Kwi1
Kwp1
Kp2*
Ki2*
Kwi2
values
2 0.8434 -1.2918 1.9813
2 0.9574 1.0278
Area2
Kwp2
2
Table 2. Analyze result for power system with and without DFIG based wind turbine
Power system without DFIG
Power system with DFIG
OS
US
TS
ITAE
OS
US
TS
ITAE
DF1
0.0194 0.0635 40.0513 1.5939
0.0209 0.0468 16.4837 0.4394
DF2
0.0071 0.0240 48.54 1.6679 1.7822e-05 0.0104 17.890 0.2207
DP12 1.4019e-04 0.0053 47.9018 0.2439 8.5980e-06 0.0033 18.054 0.2207
Fig 3. Frequency response with 10% of DFIG; (a): area 1, (b): area 2. Solid (with DFIG), Dashed
(without DFIG)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------170
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Fig 4. Response of ACE with 10% of DFIG; (a): area 1, (b): area 2. Solid (with DFIG), Dashed (without
DFIG)
Fig 5. Response of tıe line power with 10% of DFIG; Solid (with DFIG), Dashed (without DFIG)
Conclusion
This paper shows the optimal design of the PI controller for an interconnected power system with
the dynamic participation of DFIG-based wind turbines.The peak frequency and settling time are
reduced when the DFIG-based wind turbines participate in frequency regulation along with the
conventional generators. Thus, the presence of DFIG can be effective in frequency control.
References
1. Ibraheem, Niazi, K. R., & Sharma, G. (2015). Study on dynamic participation of wind turbines in
automatic generation control of power systems. Electric Power Components and Systems, 43(1), 4455.
2. Pandey, S. K., Mohanty, S. R., & Kishor, N. (2013). A literature survey on load–frequency control for
conventional and distribution generation power systems. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews,
318-334.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------171
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
3. Jalali, M., & Bhattacharya, K. (2013, July). Frequency regulation and AGC in isolated systems with
DFIG-based wind turbines. In Power and Energy Society General Meeting (PES), 2013 IEEE (pp. 1-5).
IEEE.
4. Lalor, G., Mullane, A., & O'Malley, M. (2005). Frequency control and wind turbine technologies.
Power Systems, IEEE Transactions on, 20(4), 1905-1913.
5. Mullane, A., & O'Malley, M. (2005). The inertial response of induction-machine-based wind
turbines. Power Systems, IEEE Transactions on, 20(3), 1496-1503.
6.Yingcheng, X., & Nengling, T. (2011). Review of contribution to frequency control through variable
speed wind turbine. Renewable Energy, 36(6), 1671-1677.
7. De Almeida, R. G., & Lopes, J. (2007). Participation of doubly fed induction wind generators in
system frequency regulation. Power Systems, IEEE Transactions on, 22(3), 944-950.
8. Shayeghi, H., & Shayanfar, H. A. (2006). Application of ANN technique based on μ-synthesis to load
frequency control of interconnected power system. International Journal of Electrical Power & Energy
Systems, 28(7), 503-511.
9. Çam, E., & Kocaarslan, I. (2005). Load frequency control in two area power systems using fuzzy
logic controller. Energy Conversion and Management, 46(2), 233-243.
10. Verma, Y. P., & Kumar, A. (2012). Dynamic contribution of variable-speed wind energy
conversion system in system frequency regulation. Frontiers in Energy, 6(2), 184-192.
11. Morren, J., De Haan, S. W., Kling, W. L., & Ferreira, J. A. (2006). Wind turbines emulating inertia
and supporting primary frequency control. Power Systems, IEEE Transactions on, 21(1), 433-434.
12. Mauricio, J. M., Marano, A., Gómez-Expósito, A., & Ramos, J. L. M. (2009). Frequency regulation
contribution through variable-speed wind energy conversion systems. Power Systems, IEEE
Transactions on, 24(1), 173-180.
13. Mirjalili, S. (2015). Dragonfly algorithm: a new meta-heuristic optimization technique for solving
single-objective, discrete, and multi-objective problems. Neural Computing and Applications, 1-21
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------172
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Macroscopic Quantum Tunneling in SuperconductorInsulator-Superconductor Josephson Junction
Sanaz Zohouri Kakhki
Mohammad Hamdipour
Faculty of Basic Science, Department of Physics, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, 5619911367, Ardabil, Iran.
Faculty of Basic Science, Department of Physics, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, 5619911367, Ardabil, Iran
Abstract
Tunneling effect is a very important phenomenon, which states if a particles with energy less than
the height of a barrier can tunnel and pass though the barrier, which violate the classical physics. In
classical physics a particle can only pass through the barrier when its energy is at least equal to the
height of the barrier. This tunneling phenomenon which is absolutely quantum effect, has essential
role in the decay of unstable nuclei and has many applications including tunnel diode and the
scanning tunneling microscope (STM). In this paper we study the tunneling in Josephson junction.
Josephson junction is a system in which two superconducting layer separated by an insulating layer
with a thickness in the range of nanometers. In this system tunneling occurs collectively in the
macroscopic scale. This case is called macroscopic quantum tunneling and investigating this
phenomenon because of its effect on current-voltage characteristics of system has great importance.
In this paper we consider a Josephson junction connected to the voltage V then we calculate the
quantum tunneling rate.
Keywords: Josephson junction, Quantum tunneling rate, Superconductivity.
1.Introduction
Cuprate high temperature superconductors have layered structure constituting of periodic layer of
Cu
,Ca, Cu
,SrO,BiO,BiO,SrO planes. Where Cu
layers behave as superconducting layer while
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------173
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
other play the role of insulating layers. Such structure can be considered as a system of Josephson
junctions [Kleiner, R., & et al., (1992)]. Cooper pair can move freely inside superconducting layers
while to go to other layers they should pass through insulator layer which is as a barrier. In external
currents height of the barrier is small and cooper pair can pass through by quantum tunneling. While
in superconductor the cooper pairs are coherent the tunneling occur collectively which is called
macroscopic quantum tunneling ( MQT) [ Caldeira, A. O.,
& Leggett, A. J. (1992). Voss, R. F., &
Webb, R. A. (1981). Devoret, M. H., Martinis, J. M., & Clarke, J. (1985), J. Clarke et al (1988)] In this
paper we consider a Josephson junction with a typical parameters and try to find height of barrier for
it as function of external current and the macroscopic quantum tunneling rate versus external
current.
2.Method
We consider a single Josephson junction formed by two superconducting layer separated by an
insulator layer with thickness of few angstroms and has two metal plate at top and bottom of system.
We suppose that an external current Iext flows at the direction perpendicular to layers. This is
schematically showed in figure 1.
Figure 1: This figure schematically shows a single Josephson junction formed by two
superconducting layer separated by a insulator layer with thickness of few angstroms there is two
metal plate at top and bottom of junction. Junction biased by external current I ext . One of the various
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------174
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
ways to describe the quantum tunneling in this system is the path integral formalism. The central
object of the theory is the propagator K which is defined by
( , ; , )
〈
(
|
)
|
〉
(1)
Figure 2: in this figure we showed potential energy versus gauge invariant phase differences of order
parameters of two superconducting layers at three different external current 1.2 (long dashed line),
0.85(dashed line), 0.3 (solid line). In subfigures we enlarged minima’s of potential energy in
mentioned currents which in neighbouring region of minima’s approximately has cubic form which
has a quantum well for currents below 1. Height of barrier of this metastable potential decrease by
creasing bias current.
With use of this propagator one can estimate the tunnelling rate which lead to below relation
(
For our case a and b was 4.956
)
(2)
and 523.44 respectively and
is determined by external
current.
First we need to show the potential energy versus gauge invariant phase differences of order
parameters of two superconducting layers which is itself depend on external current. In three
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------175
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
different external current 1.2, 0.85, 0.3 we showed the potential energy. In subfigures we enlarged
minima’s as of potential energy in that currents which in neighbouring region of minima’s have
approximately cubic form which has well for currents below 1. This is showed in figure 2. As we can
see from this figure the height of the barrier (which is indicated if figure 2.a by V m) of this metastable
potential decrease by increasing bias current. We also can see that for currents greater than 1 there
is no well.
Now we want to study the change of height of barrier as a function of external current. We showed
the result at figure 3 (Left), as it is obvious from this figure the height of the barrier is decreasing by
increasing of external current.
a.
Figure 3:(Left) this figure shows height of barrier described and showed in figure 2.a which shows
that this height decrease by increase of current which leads to exponential growth of quantum
tunnelling rate. (Right) In this figure we presented the escape rate versus bias current.
Finally in figure 3 (Right) we showed the escape rate as a function of external current this figure
shows that increase of external current lead to exponential increase of tunnelling current.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------176
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
References
1.Kleiner, R., & et al., (1992). Intrinsic Josephson effect in
single crystals. phys. Rev.
let. 68, 2394.
2.Caldeira, A. O., & Leggett, A. J. (1992).Influence of dissipation on quantum tunnelling in
macroscopic systems. phys. Rev. Lett. 46, 211.
3.Voss, R. F., & Webb, R. A. (1981).Macroscopic quantum tunnelling in 1Josephson
junctions. phys. Rev. Lett. 47, 265.
4.Devoret, M. H., Martinis, J. M., & Clarke, J. (1985). Measurements of macroscopic quantum
tunnelling out of the zero-voltage state of a current-biased Josephson junction. phys. Rev. Lett. 55,
1908.
5.J. Clarke et al (1988). Quantum Mechanics of a Macroscopic Variable: The Phase Difference of a
Josephson Junction, Science 239, 992.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------177
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The Effect of Planning on Iranian Intermediate EFL
Learners' Mastery of Writing Skill
Sara Mirazi
Asgar Mahmoudi
Department of English language and teaching, Ahar Branch, Islamic Azad University, Ahar,Iran
Department of English language and teaching, Ardabil Branch, Islamic Azad University, Ardabil, Iran
Abstract
This study was concerned with Iranian intermediate EFL learners' writing. Since writing mastery is a
difficult task for EFL learners to accomplish, the present research investigated if both individual and
collaborative planning can facilitate students' mastery of this important skill. The study was also
interested in finding out if any particular component of writing (content, organization, vocabulary use,
language use, mechanics) was affected differently from other components. Using a quasi-experimental
design, two homogenized groups, each with 26 students all having the same first language,
underwent 8 treatment sessions. The results of the Paired-samples T-tests revealed that both
planning types were effective in improving the learners’ writing performance. Moreover, running a
Multivariate Analysis of Variance revealed that all four components of writings were affected with
content of the writings being affected more positively. Findings of the study highlight the significance
of planning before writing tasks. These findings could be beneficial for EFL teachers and learners
alike.
Keywords: writing skill, collaborative planning, individual planning, writing components
1. Introduction
Up to the end of 1960s, writing skill was considered as secondary to speech and reinforcement to
learning vocabulary and grammatical knowledge. Definitely, it was a “vehicle for language practice”
(Silva, 1990). Nevertheless, due to scientific improvements, writing gradually turned to be
synonymous with composing, and the process of composition began to gain importance. In order to
improve learners’ writing skill, models emerged to provide teachers with a theory about how to
teach this neglected skill. The presented models involved three basic systems: Formulation,
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------178
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Execution and Monitoring. According to Kellog’s (1996) model each system has two processes.
Formulation involves planning and translation; execution involves programming and executing; and
monitoring involves reading and editing. As a result of such models, learners could be active and able
to generate thoughts and ideas.
By the emergence of new trends in language learning, writing skill witnessed a great shift from the
strictly product-focused concerns of correctness in grammar, usage, and mechanics to more processfocused concerns. As a process, writing is a meaningful activity for thinking and problem-solving and
involves organizing and expressing one’s thoughts, generating ideas, brainstorming, revision, and
editing.
Bell and Burnaby (1984) point out that writing is an extremely complex cognitive activity in which
the writer is required to demonstrate the control of a number of variables simultaneously. At the
sentence level, these include control of content, format, sentence structure, vocabulary, punctuation,
and spelling. Beyond the sentence, the writer must be able to structure and integrate information
into cohesive and coherent paragraphs and texts. It seems that writing is so intricate and difficult
that even many native speakers of English never truly master it (Celce Murcia & McIntosh, 1979).
Consequently, the majority of learners consider writing as boring and are quite reluctant to produce
written texts. In Iran, this skill should receive more attention because it is a key element in giving
and receiving information in a foreign language and the written output measures learners’ ability in
an academic environment in which they should present their ideas through clear and well-organized
texts. So, as a main activity in language classes, planning time to design the content and outline of a
written text seems essential.
Ellis (2005) states that planning influences the linguistic form in speech. In order to attend to form
and meaning equally, Willis (1991) suggests the pre-, mid- and post-task activities within task-based
approaches to instruction. These kinds of tasks provide opportunities to achieve particular
instructional goals. Some task choices, in other words, may be more effective than others in terms of
targeted pedagogic outcomes.
Planning is one of the task choices that can affect the quality of written assignments. There are three
general types of planning: planning before or during writing, macro and micro planning, and
planning individually or collaboratively. The last type of planning is the focus of this article. Unlike
individual planning, collaborative planning supports group-based methods in instructional settings.
Based on the studies in the field, although positive effects have been found for individual planning,
collaborative planning consistently improves achievement and retention, creates more positive
relationships among students and promotes students psychological health and self-esteem (Johnson
& Johnson, 1992).
In all types of writing, it is useful for students to identify one main idea and some major points to
support that idea, to plan how to organize the writing, and to develop the text through using reasons,
examples, and details. Also they need to express information in an organized manner, to use effective
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------179
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
linking words to connect ideas, and help the reader to understand the flow of ideas by using a range
of grammatical elements and lexical items for effective expression. All the elements should be
integrated in order to create an acceptable written output.
The above paragraph states the tenets of the approach that views text features analytically and is the
basis of the scoring method suggested by Jacobs et al. (1981) called ESL Composition Profile. In this
scoring procedure, writing components are summarized as content, organization, discourse, syntax,
vocabulary, and punctuation. Analytic scoring measures learners’ performance on each component
and helps the writer to find his/her knowledge gap properly.
Two research questions were investigated in this paper:
1. Does planning have any effect on EFL learners' writing ability?
2. Which component of writing (content, organization, vocabulary, language use) is affected most
by planning time?
The two null hypothesis below were driven from the above research questions:
H01. Planning does not have any effect on EFL learners' writing ability.
H02. Planning time does not affect writing components (content, organization, vocabulary, language
use) differentially.
2. Literature Review
Pre-task planning enables learners to encounter the main outline of the task so that they can go
about the complete task. It provides learners with an opportunity to perform the task before the
main performance. Within a task, planning can be manipulated according to the time available to do
the task in which learners engage in rapid planning (Ochs, 1979). In the context of speaking, Yuan
and Ellis (2003) introduced two new types of planning in the literature: macro-planning that is
manageable and productive, and micro-planning that is detailed. These strategic planning times
provide learners with access to more information and increase the complexity in their speech.
Planning engages students in implicit acquisitional processes. It is believed that providing learners
with greater planning opportunities might have beneficial effects on their course of language
development, since a planned second language discourse could push learners to extend what they
are capable of doing with language (Foster & Skehan, 1999).
Recently there have been suggestions in the literature to include the concept of collaboration which
can be productive. It may lead to more effective consideration of form–meaning relationship as
different viewpoints cross-fertilize each other and planning time is used more effectively.
According to Foster and Skehan (1999), in collaborative planning with the group-based condition, it
is argued by the advocates of teacher-led planning that negotiation between group members and an
agreement as to how best to proceed may reduce the amount of time that is needed but lead to
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------180
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
generally lower performance and finally least efficiency. Teacher control might be an efficient
instrument for focusing on relevant items of the task.
Strategies which follow planning typically involve focused and unfocused instructions to students to
plan their performance during the task. Foster and Skehan (1996) explored the influence of planning
on different variables such as personal performance and narrative and decision-making tasks. They
reported that planning without guidance produced greater complexity and fluency of language. They
also reported that the guided planning condition produced greater complexity than the unguided
planning, and slightly greater fluency. They hypothesized that when planning is not guided, learners
use preparation time to rehearse language, in contrast, the guided planners intensify the complexity
of the task and sometimes the accuracy gets less attention (Foster & Skehan, 1996).
Considering the theoretical perspective behind collaborative learning, the theory dates back to the
social constructivist view of Vygotsky (1978) stating that children learn by interacting with adults or
more capable peers who scaffold or mediate learning so that they are able to complete tasks they
could not do alone. Webb and Farivar (1994) observed that some children are often more aware of
what other children do not understand, so by helping them to focus on the relevant features of the
problem, they often can explain it to them in a way that can be readily understood. Moreover, as
children interact with each other, they find opportunities to model thinking, reasoning and problem
solving skills of each other, receive feedback, and as a result, socially construct new understandings,
knowledge and skills (King, 1999, as cited in Gillies & Ashman, 2003). Similar results were found in
the study done by Foster and Ohta (2005) who demonstrated that language development is not
limited to the interactive processes but includes strategies such as negotiation of meaning, coconstruction, other-correction, and continuers. When learners work in groups or pairs, they are
more likely to use the L2 for a range of functions normally reserved for the teacher, such as making
suggestions, asking questions and providing feedback. Thus, group and pair work may provide
learners with an improved quantity and quality of L2 practice. Therefore, assigning learners to work
in groups provides more opportunity to practice L2 (Ohta, 2001).
Kowal and Swain (1994), who worked with both similar and mixed L2 proficiency pairs, suggested
that pairing students of different proficiency may result in the more proficient learner dominating
the interaction, particularly when the proficiency difference between members of the pair is large.
This suggests that mixed proficiency pairing may disadvantage the lower proficiency participant.
Along the same lines, Storch (2013) highlights the effect of collaborative work and suggests that
pairing students of mixed L2 proficiency may benefit both learners, but only if the learners work
collaboratively. In a previous study, Storch (2005) had investigated collaborative writing in a
classroom-based setting. Students were given a choice to write in pairs or individually. The study
compared texts produced by pairs with those produced by individual learners and investigated the
nature of the writing processes evident in the pair talk. The study also elicited the learners’
reflections on the experience of collaborative writing. The study found that pairs produced shorter
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------181
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
but better texts in terms of task fulfilment, grammatical accuracy, and complexity. According to the
interviews from this study, most students were positive about the experience.
In 1981, Johnson and colleagues examined the benefits of cooperative learning in comparison to
individual learning. They reviewed 122 studies to examine the effects of co-operative, competitive,
and individualistic learning on achievement. The results showed that co-operation promotes higher
achievement and productivity (i.e., encouragement to learn) than interpersonal competition or
working individually, and that these results were consistent across all subject areas (language, arts,
reading, mathematics, science, social studies, psychology, physical education), for all age groups
(elementary, secondary, college, adult), and for a variety of cognitively challenging tasks.
Many scholars including Madsen (1983) and McCafferty (1992) assert that there are many elements
to be considered in writing. These factors include form, content, vocabulary, grammatical accuracy,
penmanship, speed, mechanics, relevance, elaboration, originality, dictation, lay out, coherence,
cohesion, unity, organization, and logic. In this regard, Madsen (1983) enumerates a number of
different components and skills to be tested in writing. For Stern (1992), vocabulary, structure,
accuracy, and speed of script writing, spelling, punctuation, content, and organization of material are
all elements of writing. Meanwhile, McCafferty (1992) suggests grammar, coherence, relevance, and
structure of the argument as the attributes of a written task.
Jacobs et al. (1981), proposed five components for writing. In this regard based on ESL Composition
Profile (1981), writing is viewed as a communicative skill with five components namely content,
organization, vocabulary, grammar, and mechanics.
Preparing opportunity to focus on the main elements of written texts seems makes students pay
attention to grammatical and lexical structures and try to include the main components in any kind
of writing. Therefore, planning time to organize an essay first, as a distinctive step in the writing
process, is an important part. Planning provides an opportunity to review writing elements and take
the efficient linguistic knowledge. Directing students at the earlier stage helps them attend to specific
points at the later stage.
Scott (1995, p. 139) argues that "teaching foreign language writing is essential at all levels of
language study" if students are to succeed in managing the time and focusing on content,
organization, language use, vocabulary, and mechanics as the main components.
In general, there are four major methods of scoring in writing assessment. These methods as studied
by Bailey (1984) are:
1) Holistic scoring
2) Analytic method
3) Primary trait scoring
4) Frequency count method
Brown (2001) defined holistic scoring as “an approach in which the teachers use a single general
scale to give a single rating for each student’s language production” (p. 61). The holistic scoring of a
written text provides situations that students will not be aware of their knowledge gap. In contrast,
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------182
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
in analytic scoring each component of the writing is scored according to a descriptor designed for
that purpose. In primary trait scoring, each text is scored based on one trait that is considered to be
primary such as persuading. Frequency count is but based on determining word frequency. Taking
all these scales into account it seems that, the analysis of each feature in a text can help students to
be more aware of their lacks in writing. Therefore, the analytic rubric of Jacobs et al. (1981) was
used in the rating stage of the present study which examined the writing performance of Persian
speakers learning English language. According to this scale, each paper is rated on the writing
components including content, organization, grammar, vocabulary, and mechanics out of 100
(Content 30 points, Organization 20 points, Syntax 25 points, Vocabulary 20 points, Mechanics 5
points).
3. Methodology
3.1. Participants
The present study was conducted on 52 Iranian university students (26 males and 26 females) with
the same mother tongue and an age range of 20 to 25 years old. Prior to taking part in the study, all
participants had studied English for several years at different schools and had completed two or
more English conversation books in private language schools.
3.2. Instruments
A simplified version of a proficiency test—taken from Top Notch/Summit Placement Test A (Saslow
& Asher, 2006)—consisting of listening, reading, vocabulary, and grammar sections was prepared.
The listening section was the first section and contained two conversation passages with a few
multiple-choice and other comprehension check questions. The reading section included one reading
passage with eight true/false questions. The other two parts were intended to test the students’
general knowledge of vocabulary and grammar through items of mixed difficulty. The reliability of
the test had already been established by applying to a similar group of students and statistical
analysis of the results and the test was considered to be valid, because, in addition to its reliability,
the items were all directed at measuring students’ general English proficiency.
Other materials included some writing topics for pretest, posttest and the treatment sessions which
were taken from the book ‘How to Prepare for the TOEFL Essay’ Edited by Abbas Zahedi (2002).
3.3. Data Collection Procedure
Out of 190 randomly chosen students who took the placement test, 52 intermediate students were
included in the study. These students were randomly divided into two groups each with 26 members
of both genders. After dividing the participants into two mixed groups, the groups were further
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------183
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
subdivided into two male and female groups each. That is, there were four groups, two male groups
and two female groups each with 13 students. Then, the pretest for writing was administered. In the
pretest, the students were given two topics and asked to write a text of about 100 to 150 words
about one of them. In order to assure the homogeneity of the groups in terms of writing ability, the
statistical test of One-way ANOVA was conducted on the pretest scores. The result of the Levene’s
Equality of Error Variance test revealed that there was no significant difference across the four
groups (P=.071>.05, df=3, 48, F=2.490).
After these preliminary stages, eight treatment sessions were held in each group. In each gender
category, students in one group worked individually and in the other collaboratively, that is, they
were paired up. In the collaborative groups, the students chose their own partners and had the
opportunity of cooperative planning throughout the treatment sessions and during the posttest.
However, after planning, each learner wrote about the topic individually.
3.4. Treatment Sessions and Scoring Procedure
During the treatment sessions, a topic was given to the students and they were asked to plan (one
male and one female groups individually, and the other two groups in pairs) and produce a 100- to
150-word text about it. The treatments included comprehensive information about the components
of ESL composition including content, organization, vocabulary use, language use, and mechanics.
Then, the teacher provided the learners with analytic feedback about each of the components every
session. Each written text was assessed on each of these multiple dimensions by some qualitative
criteria from Excellent to Very Poor. In this way, the learners had the chance to know about their
strengths and weaknesses.
In addition to actual writing during the first four treatment sessions, learners were also taught about
the structure of topic sentence, supporting sentences, paragraph unity, different kinds of paragraphs
(description, cause & effect, argumentation, and comparison & contrast) and the required
expressions for each of these paragraph types.
During the two following sessions the students were taught on how to appropriately use mechanics
including indentation, capitalization, comma, semicolon, etc. Finally, in the last two sessions, the
learners were provided with some useful grammatical information, as well as word formation, and
appropriate formulaic expressions.
Since assessing written texts in terms of quantitative results needs precision, scoring the
participants’ written productions in this study was done on the basis of Jacobs et al.'s (1981) scoring
profile. According to this assessment profile, each text is scored out of 100. This analytic scoring
measures learners’ performance on each of the five components of writing including content,
organization, vocabulary use, language use, and mechanics. The maximum score assigned to each
component based on Jacobs et al.'s descriptor is as the following: Content 30 points, Organization 20
points, Language use 25 points, Vocabulary use 20 points, and finally Mechanics 5 points.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------184
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
4. Data Analysis
To investigate the effects of the treatments, some statistical analyses were performed. First of all, the
normality of scores in pretest, which is an important assumption of parametric tests, was checked by
running a 1-sample K-S test. The following table shows the results of this test for all four groups.
Table 1.
Tests of Normality of Scores' Distributions at Pretest
One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test
male
individual
pretest
male
female
female
collaborative individuals collaborative
pretest
pretest
pretest
N
13
13
13
13
Test Statistic
.135
.118
.133
.215
Asymp. Sig. (2-tailed)
.200c,d
.200c,d
.200c,d
.102c
a. Test distribution is Normal.
Then, a One-way ANOVA accompanied by a Levene’s homogeneity test was run. The purposes of
running these tests were to first ascertain that the mean scores of the groups were not substantially
different from each other and second to make sure that the participants were almost at the same level
of proficiency before the beginning of the study.
Table 2
ANOVA Test Run on Pretest Scores
pretest scores
Sum
Squares
Between
961.135
Groups
Within Groups 6175.846
Total
7136.981
of
df
Mean
Square
3
320.378
48
51
128.663
F
Sig.
2.490 .07
1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------185
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The ANOVA test conducted on the pretest scores showed no significant difference among the groups’
pretest scores at P=.07 >.05 level. The accompanying Levene’s test of equality of error variances or
the homogeneity test also revealed that the groups of this study were comparable with each other,
since the Sig value calculated, as represented in Table 3, was larger than .05.
Table 3
Levene’s Test of Equality of Variances
Levene’s Statistic
df1
df2
Sig.
.554
3
48
.648
One of the main objectives of this study was to see if planning had any effect on the participating EFL
learners’ writing ability. To test the related hypothesis, the participants’ posttest scores were also
entered into the statistical program and Paired-samples T-tests were run. The purpose of these tests
was to compare groups' pretest and posttest means. The results of these tests are given in Table 4
below. The Sig. values in Table 4 clearly show significant differences between the pretest and
posttest scores of the all four groups at P<0.001 level. In other words, there had been statistically
significant increases in the participants' scores from the pretests to the posttests as a result of
treatment. To understand about the strength of the differences between the pretest and posttest
results, it was also necessary to calculate the effect sizes. The formula for the effect size calculation
for paired-samples T-tests is t2/t2 + (N-1). The calculated effect sizes for the groups in this study
using information from Table 4 are given below the same Table. As can be seen, the strength of the
differences in individual planning situations both for male and female students are slightly higher
than the strength of the differences in collaborative groups but in both conditions the differences are
very strong according to Cohen's (1988) criteria for interpreting effect sizes.
Table 4
Paired-samples T-tests Showing Groups Progress from Pretest to Posttest Paired Samples t-test
Paired Differences
Pair 1
Mean
male individual pretest -male individual posttest
17.61538
95%
Confidence
Interval
of
the
Difference
Std.
Deviation Lower
Upper
t
df
6.62745 -21.62031 -13.61046 -9.583 12
Sig. (2tailed)
.000
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------186
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Pair 2
Pair 3
Pair 4
male collaborative pretest -10.05689 -25.23116 -13.07653 -6.867 12
male collaborative posttest 19.15385
female individuals pretest -8.49887 -24.44351 -14.17188 -8.191 12
female individual posttest 19.30769
female
collaborative7.50385 -19.68837 -10.61932 -7.281 12
pretest
female15.15385
collaborative posttest
.000
.000
.000
Effect size for male individual planning group: 91.78/91.78 + (14) = .87
Effect size for male collaborative planning group: 47.61/47.61+ (14) = .77
Effect size for female individual planning group: 67.24/67.24 + (14) = .83
Effect size for female collaborative planning group: 53/53 + (14) = .79
Another purpose of this study was to see which component of writing was affected more by planning
time or whether they were affected differently at all. It should be noted that during the treatment
sessions some detailed data were collected from the participants in terms of their performance on
different components or aspects of writing. These aspects included content, organization,
vocabulary, and language use. Tables 5 and 6, that is, Multivariate Tests and Tests of BetweenSubjects Effects show the results of a One-way MANOVA which was used to investigate this
hypothesis. Needless to say that all assumptions of MANOVA were met even though they are not
reported here for space limitation.
Table 5
Difference between Groups on a Linear Combination of Dependent Variables
Multivariate Testsa
Hypothesis
Effect
Value
F
df
Error df Sig.
Planning Type
Pillai's Trace
.254
4.008
4.000
47.000
.007
4.000
47.000
.007
4.000
47.000
.007
4.000
47.000
.007
b
Wilks' Lambda
.746
4.008
b
Hotelling's Trace
.341
4.008
b
Roy's Largest Root
.341
4.008
b
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------187
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Table 6
Tests of Between-Subjects Effects
Source
Type III
Dependent Sum of
Variable
Squares df
1
1
99.692 15.359 .000 .235
6.942 6.958 .011 .122
Planning
Type
content
99.692
organizatio 6.942
n
vocabulary 3.769
1
3.769
9.280
.004 .157
language
use
1
23.558 9.311
.004 .157
23.558
Mean
Square F
Sig.
Partial Eta
Squared
According to the results in Table 5, there had indeed been an effect for planning. But, it is clear only
from Table 6 that content had been affected the most followed by language use, vocabulary, and
organization. These comparisons can be made by looking at F, Sig, and Partial Eta Squared values in
the relevant columns in Table 6. The results, therefore, force us to reject the second null hypothesis
of the study which had assumed no difference in the effect of planning time on writing components.
5. Discussions and Conclusion
The present study was performed in order to find out if planning has any effect on EFL learners'
writing ability, as well as to see which component of writing (content, organization, vocabulary,
language use) is affected most by planning time.
The results of the analysis showed a significant difference between pre and posttest scores which meant
planning had had positive effects on EFL learners’ writing performance. This suggests that planning
before a writing activity is effective in leading learners to produce linguistically more accurate and
appropriate texts. These results are in line with the previous studies (e.g., Foster and Skehan, 1996;
Mehnert, 1998; Storch, 2005; Ojima, 2006) which report benefits for planning. The findings of the
study but contradict some of the previous studies (e.g., Nixon, 2007; Wigglesworth & Storch, 2009;
Elola & Oskoz, 2010) which report more effect for collaborative planning in comparison with
individual planning. In general, the findings of the study revealed that through planning EFL learners
are able to create more organized texts with better content, grammatical accuracy, vocabulary, and
organization regardless of what type of planning they are involved in.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------188
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Concerning second hypothesis of the study, it is said that when learners are allowed to plan, they
choose to focus on meaning and plan what they want to say rather than plan grammatical forms (e.g.,
Crookes, 1989; Gilabert, 2005; Ortega, 1999; Wigglesworth, 1997). Even though the grammatical
accuracy of the students in this study was improved, the most highly affected aspect of their writing
was content which is in a way in conformity with the findings of these studies. In brief, in the present
study all planners improved a lot in going through the writing tasks. More specifically, they tended to
focus on meaning and planed the content of their writings more than any other component. Because
of the lack of control groups no comparison was made between planners and non-planners.
However, from the very strong effect sizes, it can be speculated that planners would perform better
than non-planners. This, of course, needs empirical proof.
References
1.Ashman, A., & Gillies, R. (Eds.). (2003). Cooperative learning: The social and intellectual outcomes of
learning in groups. London: Routledge.
2.Bailey, E. P. (1984). Writing clearly: A contemporary approach. Ohio: Charles E. Merrill publishing.
Bell, J., & Burnaby, B. (1984). A handbook for ESL literacy. Toronto: OISE Press.
3.Celce-Murcia, M., & McIntosh, L. (1991). Teaching English as a second or foreign language. Boston,
MA: Heinle & Heinle.
4.Cohen, J. (1988). The effect size index: Statistical power analysis for the behavioral sciences. (2nd
ed.). New Jersey: Lawrence Erl-baum Associates.
5.Crookes, G. (1989). Planning and interlanguage variation. Studies in Second Language Acquisition,
11(04), 367–383.
6.Ellis, R. (2005). Planning and task performance in a second language. Amsterdam: Benjamins.
7.Ellis, N. C. (2008). The dynamics of second language emergence: Cycles of language use, language
change, and language acquisition. The Modern Language Journal, 92(2), 232–249.
8.Elola, I., & Oskoz, A. (2010). Collaborative writing: Fostering foreign language and writing
conventions development. Language Learning & Technology, 14(3), 51–71.
9.Foster, P., & Ohta, A. S. (2005). Negotiation for meaning and peer assistance in second language
classrooms. Applied linguistics, 26(3), 402–430.
10.Foster, P., & Skehan, P. (1996). The influence of planning and task type on second language
performance. Studies in Second language acquisition, 18(03), 299–323.
11.Foster, P., & Skehan, P. (1999). The influence of source of planning and focus of planning on taskbased performance. Language Teaching Research, 3(3), 215-247.
12.Jacobs, H. L. (1981). Testing ESL Composition: A Practical Approach. English Composition Program.
Newbury House Publishers, Inc., Rowley, MA 01969.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------189
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
13.Johnson, D. W., & Johnson, R. T. (1992). Approaches to implementing cooperative learning in the
social studies classroom. Cooperative Learning in Social Studies Classroom, an Introduction to Social
Study, 44–51.
14.Kellogg, R. T. (1996). A model of working memory in writing. The science of writing (pp. 57-71).
15.Kowal, M., & Swain, M. (1994). Using collaborative language production tasks to promote
students’ language awareness 1. Language Awareness, 3(2), 73–93.
16.Madsen, H. S. (1983). Techniques in Testing. Oxford University Press, 200 Madison Ave., New York,
NY 10016 (ISBN-0-19-434132-1)
17.McCafferty, S. G. (1992). The Use of Private Speech by Adult Second Language Learners: A
Cross‐Cultural Study. The Modern Language Journal, 76(2), 179–189.
18.Mehnert, U. (1998). The effects of different lengths of time for planning on second language
performance. Studies in Second Language Acquisition, 20(01), 83–108.
19.Nixon, R. M. (2007). Collaborative and independent writing among adult Thai EFL learners: Verbal
interactions, compositions, and attitudes. Toronto, Canada: ProQuest.
20.Ochs, E. (1979). Transcription as theory. Developmental Pragmatics, 10(1), 43–72.
21.Ohta, A. S. (2001). Second language acquisition processes in the classroom: Learning Japanese.
Retrieved from tesl-ej.org/ej19/r13.html.
22.Ojima, M. (2006). Concept mapping as pre-task planning: A case study of three Japanese ESL
writers. System, 34(4), 566–585.
23.Ortega, L. (1999). Planning and focus on form in L2 oral performance. Studies in Second Language
Acquisition, 21(01), 109–148.
24.Scott, J. B. (1995). Sophistic ethics in the technical writing classroom: Teaching, deliberation, and
action. Technical Communication Quarterly, 4(2), 187–199.
25.Silva, T. (1990). Second language composition instruction: Developments, issues, and directions
in ESL. Second Language Writing: Research Insights for the Classroom, 11–23.
26.Stern, H. H. (1992). Issues and options in language teaching. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
27.Storch, N. (2005). Collaborative writing: Product, process, and students’ reflections. Journal of
Second Language Writing, 14(3), 153–173.
28.Vygotsky, L. (1978). Interaction between learning and development. Readings on the
Development of Children, 23(3), 34–41.
29.Webb, N. M., & Farivar, S. (1994). Promoting helping behavior in cooperative small groups in
middle school mathematics. American Educational Research Journal, 31(2), 369–395.
30.Wigglesworth, G. (1997). An investigation of planning time and proficiency level on oral test
discourse. Language Testing, 14(1), 85–106.
31.Wigglesworth, G., & Storch, N. (2009). Pair versus individual writing: Effects on fluency,
complexity and accuracy. Language Testing, 26(3), 445–466.
32.Willis, D. (1991). The lexical syllabus: A new approach to language teaching. London:
Harper Collins Publishers.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------190
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
33.Yuan, F., & Ellis, R. (2003). The Effects of Pre‐Task Planning and On‐Line Planning on Fluency,
Complexity and Accuracy in L2 Monologic Oral Production. Applied Linguistics, 24(1), 1–27.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------191
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Task Scheduling in Cloud Computing Using Particle Swarm
Optimization
Shahram Jamali
Fatemeh Alizadeh
Soheila Sadeqi
Department of Engineering, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili , Iran
Abstract
Cloud computing is the growth of distributed computing, parallel computing, utility computing and
grid computing, or defined as the commercial implementation of these computer science theories.
One of the fundamental issues in cloud environment is the task scheduling which plays the key role
of efficiency of the whole cloud computing facilities. Scheduling maps the user’s tasks to resources
to be executed efficiently in order to benefit both the service providers and customers. Since the
cloud task scheduling is an NP-hard optimization problem, many meta-heuristic algorithms have
been proposed to solve it. In this paper a policy based on particle swarm optimization compared
with genetic algorithm and FCFS, has been introduced. PSO is a population-based search algorithm
based on the simulation of the social behaviour of birds within the flock. The main goal in this
research is minimizing the makespan and waiting time of a given tasks set. Proposed policy and two
other algorithms have been simulated using Cloudsim toolkit package. The results showed that PSO
performed better than genetic and FCFS algorithms.
Keywords: Cloud computing, task scheduling, particle swarm optimization, makespan.
1.Introduction
Cloud computing is developed based on various recent progressions in virtualization, heterogeneous
distributed computing, grid computing, web computing, utility computing and autonomic computing.
Also by definition, a cloud computing environment has a large pool of easily usable and accessible
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------192
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
virtualized resources (such as hardware, development platforms and/or services). These resources
can be dynamically re-configured to adjust to a variable load (scale), allowing also for an optimum
resource utilization.
Millions of user send your request to cloud resource. Scheduling these jobs is a challenge to cloud
system. Different scheduling method are discussed in [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7] and [8]. Although cloud
computing systems these days provide a better way to perform the submitted jobs in terms of
responsiveness, scalability, and flexibility, most job scheduling problems on cloud environment are
still either NP-hard or NP-complete. The rule-based scheduling algorithm (e.g., exhaustive and
deterministic scheduling algorithm) are simple and easy to implement, therefore they are widely
used on nowadays cloud computing systems, but in large- scale scheduling problems the result of
these scheduling method are often far from optimal and are not appropriate. We want to use a metaheuristic algorithm for solving this problem, because the heuristic algorithm are working better in
large-scale scheduling.
Some of these meta-heuristic algorithms are nature-inspired, e.g., Simulated Annealing (SA) [9],
Genetic Algorithm (GA) [10], Ant Colony Optimization (ACO) [11], etc. There are also non-natureinspired metaheuristics, such as Tabu Search [12] and Threshold Accepting (TA) [13]. One of the
newest heuristic algorithms is PSO (particle swarm optimization). This algorithm that has developed
by Kennedy and Eberhart [14] is one of the evolutionary algorithms which simulates social
behaviour of flock of birds or groups of fishes toward their desired destination. In addition to
benefits of heuristic algorithms, such as flexibility and acceptable calculations, PSO has consistent
performance and easy implementation.
The rest of the paper is organized as follow: In section 2, we present our approach for scheduling
problem. In section 3 experimental results are represented, and in section 4 conclusions are
presented.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------193
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
2.Method
To generalize the discussion, the assumption is that there is a set of cloud customer tasks and each
task that is submitted by user is independent from other tasks. Each task is allowed to be processed
on any given available resource. A task is processed on one resource at a time and given resource are
available continuously. In this paper we suppose that number of tasks is more than number of
resources. The cloud computing discussion in this study highlighted the fact that cloud task
scheduling scenario is actual either NP-hard or NP-complete problems. The problem description can
be presented as follows.
Inputs: Set of tasks is defined as T = {
independent tasks. Set of resource is defined as
+, where
{
,
- and
is the number of
}, in which
,
- and
is the number of available resource.
Output: An efficient Gantt chart of scheduling, including the assignment of tasks on available
resource and makespan.
Constraints: The processing time of each task is resource-dependent. Each task must be completed
without interruption once started. Resource cannot perform more than one task at a time. The tasks
is executed on machines for sequential form. When task
is assigned to machine ,
become 1
otherwise it become 0. In this part two fundamental conditions are considered:
∑
( )
*
+
( )
First limitation ensures that each task is assigned to only one processing resource.
Objectives: The aim is to mapping tasks to appropriate virtual machines in order to minimizing
makespan and waiting time. The makespan is the completion time of tasks and waiting time is sum of
wait time of all tasks in each machine for execution.
PSO is an algorithm proposed by Kennedy and Eberhart in 1995, which is a population-based search
algorithm inspired by bird flocking and fish schooling. Social behaviour of these organisms
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------194
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
motivated them to look into the effect of collaboration of species on to achieving their goals as a
group. A large number of birds or fishes flock synchronously, change direction suddenly, and scatter
and regroup together according to the particle and social experience. The discrete, binary version of
the algorithm was presented also by Kennedy and Eberhart to operate on discrete binary variables
[15]. The binary PSO was implemented by [16] to solve task scheduling problem and used by [17]
and [18] to job scheduling in grid computing. This algorithm works by having a population (swarm)
of candidate solutions (particles) that travels in the problem space searching for an optimum
solution.
Each solution is evaluated by the fitness function to be optimized. Position of each particle
represents a potential solution in the problem space. Each particle has D-dimensional velocities
which are calculated as probabilities that change during the time particles move in space. At each
iteration the velocity and position of each particle is stochastically updated by combining the
particle’s current solution, the particle’s personal best solution or pbest, and the global best solution
or gbest over all particles. In the following, the formulas that exists for updating position and
velocity:
(3)
(
)
(
)
(4)
At first we should have an accurate mapping between particles of PSO and problem solutions. If we
suppose that there are 𝓃 tasks and we aim to distribute them on 𝓂 processing machines then
particles should be defined in form of 𝓂 𝓃 matrixes. All elements of position matrix are 0 or 1 and
in each Column there is only one 1 and other elements are zero.
Velocity matrix dimensions, Pbest and gbest are 𝓂 𝓃 matrixes with 0 and 1 elements exactly
similar to position. Pbest matrix represents the best position of particle from beginning of the
algorithm and gbest owns the best position between all particles. In each step of the algorithm
particles are evaluated by fitness function of the algorithm and update pbest, gbest and position and
velocity matrixes in terms of fitness value. Fitness function is defined based on our objective. We
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------195
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
want to minimize makespan and waiting time. This process is repeated until stop criterion of
algorithm is satisfied which in our algorithm it is equal to number of iterations. Flowchart of PSO
algorithm is as Fig. 1. The objective function of our approach are formulated as follows:
Minimize F(s) = α
( ) + β W(s)
(5)
( ) is the completion time of the last job (also called makespan); W(s) is sum of the
Where
waiting time of each task which waits for execute.
∑
,
(6)
Suppose that execution time of task on computational node j is known, and it is equal to
load of each machine is
W(s)
∑
. The
.
∑
(7)
Table 1
The parameter setup of VMs in datacentre
Parameter
Value
CPU
2500, 2000, 1000, 500
MIPS
Ram
870, 1740, 1740, 613 MB
BW
100 M/S
The number of
PEs
1, 1 ,1, 1
Fig. 1 Flowchart of PSO algorithm
Table 2
The parameter setup of Tasks in
datacentre
Parameter
Value
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------[100, 6000]
196 Length
File size
300
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The proposed scheduling policy has been implemented in Cloudsim toolkit. Our experiments
generated a data center with 50 host and 50 virtual machines. The parameter setup of hosts, VMs in
the data center and tasks is shown in Table1 and Table2, respectively. In order to examine the
performance of the proposed algorithm we have implemented Genetic algorithm and FCFS too and
then compared the three mentioned policy in terms of Markesan and waiting time minimization.
Our experiments depicts that even if both Genetic algorithm and PSO algorithm show acceptable
results, it can be said in large scale problem PSO algorithm shows better results than Genetic
algorithm and FCFS policy. This algorithm can be used in cloud computing environment for efficient
scheduling of tasks on existing resources, so that completion time of tasks and waiting time become
minimized. Final results for three algorithms are shown in Fig. 2, Fig. 3 and Fig. 4.
Fig 2. Comparing performance of different algorithms Fig. 3. Comparing performance of different
algorithms based on Makespan
based on fitness
Fig 4. Comparing performance of different algorithms
based on waiting time
References
1.Mell. P., & Grance. T. (2011). The NIST Definition of Cloud Computing-Recommendations of the
National Institute of Standards and Technology. NIST. NIST Special Publication, 800-145, pp. 1–3.
2.Paul, M., & Sanyal, G. (2012). Survey and analysis of optimal scheduling strategies in cloud
environment. IEEE.
3.Jeyarani, R., & Ram, R., & Versants, Nagaveni, N. (2010). Design and Implementation of an Efficient
Two Level Scheduler for Cloud Computing Environment. IEEE.
4.Qi-yi, H., & Ting-lei, H. (2010). An optimistic job scheduling strategy based on QoS for Cloud
Computing. IEEE.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------197
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
5.Lee, K., & Fu, M., & Kuo, Y. (2011). A hierarchical scheduling strategy for the composition services
architecture based on cloud computing. IEEE.
6.Leey, G., & Chunz, B., & Randy H. Heterogeneity-Aware Resource Allocation and Scheduling in the
Cloud. University of California.
7.Wang, Sh., & Yan, K., & Wang, Sh. (2011). Ching-Wei Chen, "A Three-Phases Scheduling in a
Hierarchical Cloud Computing Network. IEEE.
8.Peixoto, M.L.M., & Santana, M.J., & Estrella, J.C., & Tavares, T.C., & Kuehne, B.T., and Santana, R.H.C.
(2010). A Metascheduler architecture to provide QoS on the cloud computing. IEEE.
9.Kirkpatrick, S., & Gelatt Jr, C.D., and Vecchi, M.P. (1983. Optimization by Simulated Annealing.
Science, vol. 220, no. 4598, pp. 671-680.
10.Holland, J.H. (1975). Adaptation in Natural and Artificial Systems. Univ. of Michigan Press.
11.Bonabeau, E., & Dorigo, M., and Theraulaz, G. (2000). Inspiration for Optimization from Social
Insect Behavior. Nature, vol. 406, pp. 39-42.
12.Glover, F., & Laguna, M. (1997). Tabu Search. Kluwer Academic Publishers.
13.Dueck, G., & Scheuer, T. (1990). Threshold Accepting: A General Purpose Optimization Algorithm
Appearing Superior to Simulated Annealing. J. Computational Physics, vol. 90, pp. 161-175.
14.Kennedy, J., & Eberhart, R.C. (1995). Particle swarm optimization. Proc, IEEE Conf. Neural Netw.,
vol. IV, IEEE, Piscataway, NJ, pp. 1942-1948.
15.Kennedy, J., & Eberhart, R. Particle swarm optimization. Proceedings of ICNN’95 - International
Conference on Neural Networks, vol. 4, pp. 1942–1948.
16.Pierobom, J. L., & Delgado, M. R., and Kaestner C. A. (2011). Particle swarm optimization for task
assignment problem. 10th Brazilian Congress on Computational Intelligence (CBIC2011), vol. 10, pp.
1–8.
17.Zhang, L., & Chen, Y., and Sun, R. (2008). A task scheduling algorithm based on PSO for grid
computing. International Journal of Computational Intelligence Research. vol. 4, no. 1, pp. 37–43.
18. Izakian, H., & Ladani, B. T., & Zamanifar, K., and Abraham, A. (2009). A novel particle swarm
optimization approach for grid job scheduling. Information Systems, Technology and Management Communications in Computer and Information Science, vol. 31, pp. 100–109.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------198
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Forecast Record-Distance Running and Speed of Both the
100m and 10,000m Record
Soheil Mosavi
Marefat siahkohian
Hamed mosavi
Akram ebdi
Nurse , Medical Sciences ardebil(Salamat Meshgin shahr), Iran
Abstract
One of the most stress-distance for runners, selected material is for training and matches. Because of
the privilege of being track and field and runners of matches and earn points for your team win is
necessary that runners select the Best Top Rated material and the material practice and race day.
Fox and Matthews in his book as well as energy systems for run Harrow said, according to the chart
below The aim of this study is to predict the outcome of both the 100m and 10,000 meters.
Methodology: from 24 runners amateur record was 100 meters and 10,000 meters. Then randomly
divided into four groups of six. 400m record from one group, record 800 meters from group Two,
record 1500 meters from three group and both groups of four record was 5,000 meters. Given by
the formula A × Arb + B × Anb × X with record results 400, 800, 1500, 3000 m, with spss software
and graphical model Bland - Altman analysis was. The results showed that one can use the formula A
× Arb + B × Anb × X record 200m(p=0.04), 400m (p=0.07), 800m(0.011), 1500m(p=0.001)
,300m(p=.0001) and 5000m(p=0.001).meters before predicted.
A= Aerobic percent share of the graph is taken.
Arb = Over 10,000 meters averaging 100 yards a person has.
B = Percent share of anaerobic shown in Fig.
Anb = 100 meters individual record.
X = 100 meter distance record that we want to predict.
Keywords: Forecast record,400m, 1500m, 800m, 3000m
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------199
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
1.Introduction
To predict two records in track and field there are many ways, most of which are based on the record
of the various sprints among them, the forecast record 150 to 600 meter sprints on the running of
150 to 600 meters, a person running a two run to predict the run could realize another record (17).
It also uses a potential athletes and sizes that can at the same speed and frequency with perfect
rhythm and total mileage to over 1500 meters and 800 meters record has been predicted the need to
go through a specific protocol is ,800 meters runners to predict their record should warm up for 10
minutes after for one minute sprints should know and record the distance the three-minute break
and again a minute to quickly run the total mileage put on its own formula the total mileage put on
its own formula(18).These provisions only on running out and no attention was given to energy
systems used in run. The important thing is that such predictions require protocol properties and
can only run one or predict the properties. According to override the system of energy used in the
runs and differences as well as a general formula for all runs that it can be for the entire two are
used, the purpose of the present study using two runs 100 and 10,000 meters for the record nose
runs, the system will power will help.
2.Method
Of 24 subjects randomly from the student's school of physical education were selected city Meshgin
shahr ,100m and 10,000m record at the sports stadium was their record was recorded and then
subjects were randomly divided into six groups of four. 200m from the band and record a record that
was recorded, of Group 1, 200m record and record it was recorded. Of Group 2, 400m record and
record it was recorded. Of Group 3, 800m record and record it was recorded. Of Group 4, 1500m
record and record it was recorded. Of Group 5, 3000m record and record it was recorded. Of Group
6, 5000m record and record it was recorded. Then all records with predictions that the formula A ×
Arb + B × Anb × X and graph energy system by spss software and graphical model Bland-Altman
analysis was and the degree of significance for each of records was 200m(p=0.04), 400m (p=0.07),
800m(0.011), 1500m(p=0.001) ,300m(p=.0001) and 5000m(p=0.001).
A= Aerobic percent share of the graph is taken.
Arb = Over 10,000 meters averaging 100 yards a person has.
B = Percent share of anaerobic shown in Fig.
Anb = 100 meters individual record.
X = 100 meter distance record that we want to predict.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------200
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
To predict two records in track and field there are many ways, most of which are based on the record
of the various sprints among them, the forecast record 150 to 600 meter sprints on the running of
150 to 600 meters, a person running a two run to predict the run could realize another record (17).
It also uses a potential athletes and sizes that can at the same speed and frequency with perfect
rhythm and total mileage to over 1500 meters and 800 meters record has been predicted the need to
go through a specific protocol is ,800 meters runners to predict their record should warm up for 10
minutes after for one minute sprints should know and record the distance the three-minute break
and again a minute to quickly run the total mileage put on its own formula the total mileage put on
its own formula(18).These provisions only on running out and no attention was given to energy
systems used in run. The important thing is that such predictions require protocol properties and
can only run one or predict the properties. According to override the system of energy used in the
runs and differences as well as a general formula for all runs that it can be for the entire two are
used, the purpose of the present study using two runs 100 and 10,000 meters for the record nose
runs, the system will power will help. Bland-Altman graphical model results showed that the above
formula can predict correctly the record.
References
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
NOAKES, T. D. (1988) Implications of exercise testing for prediction of athletic performance: a
contemporary perspective. Medicine and Science in Sports and Exercise, 20 (4), p. 319-330
HOPKINS, W. G. (2004) How to interpret changes in an athletic performance test. Sportscience, 8,
p. 1-7
HOFFMAN, J. R. et al. (1996) Relationship between athletic performance tests and playing time in
elite college basketball players. The Journal of Strength & Conditioning Research, 10 (2), p. 67-71
MACKENZIE,
B.
(2001)
400
metres
Training
[WWW]
Available
from:
http://www.brianmac.co.uk/sprints/tp400.htm [Accessed 5/5/2016]
MACKENZIE,
B.
(2001)
Middle
Distance
Running
[WWW]
Available
from:
http://www.brianmac.co.uk/middist/index.htm [Accessed 5/5/2016]
MACKENZIE,
B.
(2001)
5km
Training
Program
[WWW]
Available
from:
http://www.brianmac.co.uk/longdist/tp5k.htm [Accessed 5/5/2016]
MACKENZIE,
B.
(2002)
3km
Training
[WWW]
Available
from:
MACKENZIE,
B.
(2001)
Long
Distance
Running
[WWW]
Available
from:
http://www.brianmac.co.uk/longdist/index.htm [Accessele5/5/2016]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------201
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
MACKENZIE,
B.
(2001)
10km
Training
Program
[WWW]
Available
from:
BEASHEL, P. & TAYLOR, J. (1996) Advanced Studies in Physical Education and Sport. UK: Thomas
Nelson & Sons Ltd.
BEASHEL, P. & TAYLOR, J. (1997) The World of Sport Examined. UK: Thomas Nelson & Sons Ltd.
BIZLEY, K. (1994) Examining Physical Education. Oxford; Heinemann Educational Publishers
DAVIS, B. et al. (2000) Physical Education and the Study of Sport. UK: Harcourt Publishers Ltd.
GALLIGAN, F. et al. (2000) Advanced PE for Edexcel. Oxford; Heinemann Educational Publishers
McARDLE, W. et al. (2000) Essentials of Exercise Physiology. 2nd ed. Philadelphia: Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins
CHU, D. (1996) Explosive Power and Strength. USA; Human Kinetics Publishers, Inc.
DICK, F. (1987) Sprints and Relays. 5th ed. London: BAAB. p. 22-23
MACKENZIE,
B.
(1997)
Kosmin
Test
[WWW]
Available
from:
http://www.brianmac.co.uk/kosmin.htm [Accessed 3/6/2016]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------202
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The Effect of Submaximal Exercise Combined with Weight
Training and Muscle Hypertrophy Limits Blood Flow to the
Arm
Soheil Mosavi
Marefat siahkohian
Hamed mosavi
Akram ebdi
Nurse , Medical Sciences ardebil(Salamat Meshgin shahr), Iran
Abstract
Increase muscle size for most people is a goal for fitness that many people act in any way to increase
muscle size. American college and many researchers suggested exercises is caused hypertrophy But
submaximal exercises with restriction of blood flow can also cause muscle hypertrophy? Which
method is better performance? The aim of this study was to evaluate the effect of combined strength
and submaximal exercise congestion on the hypertrophy of the muscles of the arms reaction
students physical education city Meshgin Shahr. Methods: 24 students selected randomly and were
divided into four groups of six that one group students with 20%1RM with restriction of blood
flow(cut off blood flow to the arm with a tourniquet during move), two group with 20%1RM, three
group with 70%1RM , four group without doing any exercise (control group) were selected. sessions
of three weeks each with three sets of ten repetitions were. They were the pre-test and post-test and
data using spss software and repeated measure (P≤0.05) and ANCOVA analysis was performed to
remove the Type I error. Results showed that in one group (P = 0.145), two group (P = 0.811), three
group (P = 0.061) and four group (0.363) were that there was no significant impact. But increasing
muscle size were observed in groups of three and one that the people who worked with 70% of one
repetition maximum was evident.
Keywords: hypertrophy, submaximal exercise, limits blood flow, weight training
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------203
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
1.Introduction
Resistance Training activities are being incorporated in nearly all comprehensive exercise programs.
While most health and fitness professionals recognize the acute program variables utilized in
Resistance Training activities (sets, reps, intensity/load, volume, rest, exercise selection, exercise
order, etc.) One of the most important research and propose to increase muscle mass and strength
by America College (ACSM) is that the minimum weight and pressure to increase strength and
muscle mass 65 to 70% of one repetition maximum (1 RM) is. The new method used to increase
muscle size and strength exercises are very low intensity loads (20% 1RM) with limits blow follow.
A growing body of research has demonstrated the effectiveness of exercise (low-intensity
resistance training) combined with blood flow restriction for increased muscular strength
and hypertrophy.
Blood flow restriction as an accessory to a variety of different exercise modes(lowintensityresistance
exercise)has recently become a popular research topic.
Hypothetically speaking, the potential mechanisms for these adaptations may Include,
hypoxia
induced additional or preferential recruitment of fasttwitch muscle fibers, greater duration of metabolic acidosis via the trapping and accumulation of intr
amuscular protons (H+ ions) and stimulation of metaboreceptors, possibly eliciting an exaggerated a
cute systemic hormonal response.
external pressureinduced differences in contractile mechanics and sarcolemma
deformation,
resulting in enhanced growth factor expression and intracellular signalling , metabolic adaptations
to the fast glycolytic system that stem from compromised oxygen delivery,
production of reactive
oxygen species that promotes tissue growth, such
gradient-induced reactive hyperemia after
removal
of the external pressure, which induces intracellular swelling and stretches cytoskeletal
structures that may promote tissue growth, and activation of myogenic stem cells with subsequent
myonuclear fusion with mature muscle fibers and etc (3). Low-intensity (20 –50% of 1 RM)
resistance training, combined with restricted venous blood flow from the working muscle (Kaatsu
resistance training), may provide an alternative training method to the traditional high-intensity
resistance training programs currently being used(4). In recent years, a number of publications have
reported that Kaatsu resistance training can result in significant and rapid increases in muscle
hypertrophy (5,6,7). A previous study reported that increased leg circumference, an index of muscle
swelling, was more pronounced in blood flow restriction than in non- blood flow restriction
immediately after low- intensity knee extension exercise(8). Because blood flow restriction requires
the use of an elastic cuff that is placed at the proximal end of the limbs, the restricted blood flow is
only applicable to appendicular muscles. Consequently, previous blood flow restriction training
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------204
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Weight (kg)
Height(cm)
Age(year)
Subjects
Features
23.91±3.85
75±10
172±9
16.5±0.5
20%1RM
with
Restriction
of
blood flow
22.86±5.82
7405±6.5
176±6
16.5±0.5
20% 1 RM
22.96±4.44
71±11
172.5±7.5
16.5±0.5
70% 1 RM
20.91±4.01
64.5±14.5
171.5±6.5
16.5±0.5
Without
exercise
BMI
any
studies have focused on the physiological adaptations of appendicular muscles. However, the effect
of low-intensity blood flow restriction training on non-flow-restricted trunk musculature has not
been explored. Our previous study indicated that neuromuscular activity during low-intensity
blood flow restriction bench press exercise increases not only in the blood flow restricted arm
muscle (triceps brachii) but also in non-restricted chest muscle (pectoralis major) compared with
same exercise without blood flow restriction (12).
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------205
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Method
A quasi-experimental methods that for this the effect of the independent variable (submaximal
exercise with blood flow restriction) in the experimental group on the dependent variable
(maximum strength and arm size) was measured with pre-test and post-test. The sample of the
study, 24 students were Meshgin shahr city school physical education that randomly selected and
randomly divided into 4 groups of 6 student where Group 1 Exercises 20% of one repetition
maximum per person with restricted blood flow, group 2 with 20% of one repetition maximum any
individual, group 3 with 70% of one repetition maximum for each student, group 4 without any
resistance training for 3 weeks and 5 days a week and each session 3 repeat 10, In the biceps with
dumbbells and only trained with the right arm. 48 hours ago maximal strength and size right arm,
height, weight, age as one repetition maximum test was measured as before.
Table 1 Separation of categories
After three weeks of training were taken again after the test . According to the normal distribution
(Kolmogorov-Smirnov test) were used for the analysis of parametric tests and to changes within the
group and between groups and between pre- and post-test by repeated measures was used for the
condition existed sphericity and a significant degree of pre and post-test groups, in one group (P =
0.145), two group (P = 0.811), three group (P = 0.061) and four group (0.363) were that there was
no significant impact. Statistically significant difference was set at p≤0.05.
One of the most important concerns of athletes increase muscle mass and non-athletes and those
looking for a suitable organ is the ACSM is very useful recommendations that the intensity of 65% to
70% of one repetition maximum pressure to increase muscle mass is at least as well as many studies
have shown that high intensity 65% of one repetition maximum increases muscle size. So can you
see by limiting blood and very low-intensity exercise the same results can be achieved than 70% of
maximal strength training achieved? Practice with 20% of one repetition maximum by limiting blood
flow to the muscles of the arm with a tourniquet When Hyprtrfy no significant effect on motor
performance. The findings show that the restriction of blood flow with submaximal exercise and high
intensity workouts and ACSM recommend that a minimum intensity to increase to 65 to 70% of one
repetition maximum in three weeks would not be. But training with the nearest group to 20% of one
repetition maximum was at 70% of one repetition maximum. Perhaps if we continue the exercises
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------206
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
for a longer time than the significance level is significant. Although the training was not significantly
limit blood flow levels (p = 0.145) but this method can be used in the course of the training is to
increase muscle mass.
References
1.
Blood flow restriction during lowintensity resistance exercise increases S6K1
phosphorylation and muscle protein synthesis. J Appl Physiol 103: 903–910, 2007. First published
June 14, 2007; doi:10.1152/japplphysiol.00195.2007
2.
Intramuscular metabolism during low-intensity resistance exercise with blood flow
restriction. J Appl Physiol 106: 1119–1124, 2009. First published February 12, 2009;
doi:10.1152/japplphysiol.90368.2008.
3.
Nielsen, JL, Aagaard, P, Bech, RD, Nygaard, T, Hyid, LG, Wernborn, M, Suetta, C, and Frandsen,
U. Proliferation of myogenic stem cells in human skeletal muscle in response to lowload resistance tr
aining with blood flow restriction. J Physiol 590: 4351–4361, 2012.
4.
Muscle size and strength are increased following walk training with restricted venous blood
flow from the leg muscle, Kaatsu-walk training. J Appl Physiol 100: 1460–1466, 2006. First published
December 8, 2005 doi:10.1152/japplphysiol.01267.2005.
5.
Takarada Y, Takazawa H, Sato Y, Takenoshita S, Tanaka Y, and Ishii N. Effects of resistance
exercise combined with moderate vascular occlusion on muscular function in humans. J Appl Physiol
88: 2097–2106, 2000.
6.
Takarada Y, Sato Y, and Ishii N. Effects of resistance exercise combined with vascular
occlusion on muscle function in athletes. Eur J Appl Physiol 86: 308–314, 2002.
7.
Abe T, Yasuda Midorikawa T T, Sato Y, Kearns CF, Inoue K, Koizumi K, and Ishii N. Skeletal
muscle size and circulating IGF-1 are increased after two weeks of twice daily Kaatsu resistance
training. Int J KAATSU Training Res 1: 6–12, 2005.
8.
Fry CS, Glynn EL, Drummond MJ, Timmerman KL, Fujita S, et al. (2010) Blood flow
restriction exercise stimulates mTORC1 signaling and muscle protein synthesis in older men. J Appl
Physiol 108: 1199–209.
9.
flow from the leg muscle, Kaatsu-walk training. J Appl Physiol 100: 1460–1466, 2006. First published
December 8, 2005; doi:10.1152/japplphysiol.01267.2005
10.
Todd A. Maugans, Chad Farley, Mekibib Altaye, James Leach and Kim M. Cecil Pediatric
Sports-Related Concussion Produces Cerebral Blood Flow Alterations DOI: 10.1542/peds.20112083; originally published online November 30, 2011; 2012;129;28
11.
Pope, ZK, Willardson, JM, and Schoenfeld, BJ. Exercise and blood flow restriction. J Strength C
ond Res 27(10): 2914–2926, 2013
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------207
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
12.
Yasuda T, Brechue WF, Fujita T, Sato Y, Abe T. Muscle activation during low-intensity muscle
contractions with restricted blood flow. J Sports Sci (2009); 27: 479–489.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------208
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The Effect of Combination of Strength Arm Muscles
Following Exercise Maximum Congestion Backlash
Soheil Mosavi
Marefat Siahkohian
Lotfali bolboli
Hamed Mosavi
Nurse , Medical Sciences ardebil, Salamat Meshgin shahr, Iran
Abstract
Strength muscle, increased volume muscle and keep it is one of the most important factors in
athletes and sports. Thus, as a result of injury, aging, disease and intolerance more pressure to
increase strength, use the following exercises to increase muscle size and strength recommended
maximum. The aim of this study was to evaluate the effect of combined strength and sub maximal
exercise congestion arm strength muscle in response to students' physical education city Meshgin
Shahr. Methods: 24 students selected randomly and were divided into four groups of six that one
group students with 20%1RM with restriction of blood flow(cut off blood flow to the arm with a
tourniquet during move), two group with 20%1RM, three group with 70%1RM , four group without
doing any exercise (control group) were selected. Sessions of three weeks each with three sets of ten
repetitions were. They were the pre-test and post-test and data using spss software and repeated
measure (P≤0.05) and ANCOVA analysis was performed to remove the Type I error. Results showed
that in the one group (P = 0.001) and three group (P = 0.003) were significant impact, but in two
group (P = 0.102) and four group (P = 0.060) showed no significant effect. The findings suggest that
sub maximal exercise with blood limits can also be like 70% of one repetition maximum increases
muscle strength.
Keywords: hypertrophy, submaximal exercise, limits blood flow, weight training
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------209
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
1.Introduction
Resistance Training activities are being incorporated in nearly all comprehensive exercise programs.
While most health and fitness professionals recognize the acute program variables utilized in
Resistance Training activities (sets, reps, intensity/load, volume, rest, exercise selection, exercise
order, etc.) One of the most important research and propose to increase muscle mass and strength
by America College (ACSM) is that the minimum weight and pressure to increase strength and
muscle mass 65 to 70% of one repetition maximum (1 RM) is. The new method used to increase
muscle size and strength exercises are very low intensity loads (20% 1RM) with limits blow follow.
A growing body of research has demonstrated the effectiveness of exercise (low-intensity
resistance training) combined with blood flow restriction for increased muscular strength
and
hypertrophy. Blood flow restriction as an accessory to a variety of different exercise modes (lowintensity
resistance exercise)
has recently become a popular research topic.
Hypothetically speaking, the potential mechanisms for these adaptations may Include,
hypoxiainduced additional or preferential recruitment of fast-twitch muscle fibers,
greater duration
of
metabolic acidosis via the trapping and accumulation of intramuscular protons (H+ ions) and stimula
tion of metaboreceptors, possibly eliciting an exaggerated acute systemic hormonal response.
external pressure-induced differences in contractile mechanics and sarcolemma
deformation,
resulting in enhanced growth factor expression and intracellular signalling , metabolic adaptations
to the fast glycolytic system that stem from compromised oxygen delivery,
production of reactive
oxygen species that promotes tissue growth, such
gradient-induced reactive hyperemia after
removal
of the external pressure, which induces intracellular swelling and stretches cytoskeletal
structures that may promote tissue growth, and activation of myogenic stem cells with subsequent
myonuclear fusion with mature muscle fibers and etc (3).
Low-intensity (20 –50% of 1 RM) resistance training, combined with restricted venous blood flow
from the working muscle (Kaatsu resistance training), may provide an alternative training method to
the traditional high-intensity resistance training programs currently being used(4). In recent years,
a number of publications have reported that Kaatsu resistance training can result in significant and
rapid increases in muscle hypertrophy (5,6,7). A previous study reported that increased leg
circumference, an index of muscle swelling, was more pronounced in blood flow restriction than in
non- blood flow restriction immediately after low- intensity knee extension exercise(8). Because
blood flow restriction requires the use of an elastic cuff that is placed at the proximal end of the
limbs, the restricted blood flow is only applicable to appendicular muscles. Consequently, previous
blood flow restriction training studies have focused on the physiological adaptations of
appendicular muscles. However, the effect of low-intensity blood flow restriction training on nonflow-restricted trunk musculature has not been explored. Our previous study indicated that
neuromuscular activity during low-intensity blood flow restriction bench press exercise increases
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------210
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
not only in the blood flow restricted arm muscle (triceps brachii) but also in non-restricted chest
muscle (pectoralis major) compared with same exercise without blood flow restriction (12).
2.Method
A quasi-experimental methods that for this the effect of the independent variable (submaximal
exercise with blood flow restriction) in the experimental group on the dependent variable
(maximum strength) was measured with pre-test and post-test. The sample of the study, 24 students
were Meshgin shahr city school physical education that randomly selected and randomly divided
into 4 groups of 6 student where Group 1 Exercises 20% of one repetition maximum per person with
restricted blood flow, group 2 with 20% of one repetition maximum any individual, group 3 with
70% of one repetition maximum for each student, group 4 without any resistance training for 3
weeks and 5 days a week and each session 3 repeat 10, In the biceps with dumbbells and only
trained with the right arm. 48 hours ago maximal strength right arm, height, weight, age as one
repetition maximum test was measured as before.
Table 1 Separation of categories
BMI
Weight (kg)
Height(cm)
Age(year)
Subjects Features
23.91±3.85
75±10
172±9
16.5±0.5
20%1RM
Restriction
blood flow
22.86±5.82
7405±6.5
176±6
16.5±0.5
20% 1 RM
22.96±4.44
71±11
172.5±7.5
16.5±0.5
70% 1 RM
20.91±4.01
64.5±14.5
171.5±6.5
16.5±0.5
Without
exercise
with
of
any
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------211
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
After three weeks of training were taken again after the test . According to the normal distribution
(Kolmogorov-Smirnov test) were used for the analysis of parametric tests and to changes within the
group and between groups and between pre- and post-test by repeated measures was used for the
condition existed sphericity and a significant degree of pre and post-test groups, group 1 (p = 0.001)
and group 3 (p = 0.003) were significant effects of exercise. But the group 2(p = 0.102) and group 4(p
= 0.060) were not significant training effect. Statistically significant difference was set at p≤0.05.
Increase muscle strength when old age, disease and injury, one of the most important concerns of
athletes and non-athletes and those who are looking for a better life. The ACSM is very useful
recommendations that the intensity of at least 65 al 70% of one repetition maximum pressure is to
increase muscle strength. As well as many studies have shown that high intensity 65% of one
repetition maximum increases muscle size and strength to be increased. It can restrict blood and
very low-intensity exercise to the same conclusions that 70 percent of maximal strength training will
result achieved. Practice with 20% of one repetition maximum by limiting blood flow to the
hemostatic when running increases the maximum power that can be replaced by other strength
training.
The findings show that the restriction of blood flow with submaximal exercise increases muscle
strength as well as high intensity workouts and ACSM recommend that a minimum intensity to
increase to 65 to 70% of one repetition maximum was announced that the cause. For people such as
sports injuries, the elderly and those who can not tolerate high-intensity this method it is proposed
to increase the maximum power. 70% of one repetition maximum-intensity exercises also increases
muscle strength, but those exercises practiced with intensity 20 percent experienced a significant
increase in muscle strength arm as well as those who did not exercise any power in these three
weeks had not done any significant increase in power did not (control group). This method of
strength training to increase muscle strength, body parts can be cut off or restrict the flow of blood
to be used. It should be noted that when implementing the restrictions only apply bloodstream.
References
13.
Blood flow restriction during lowintensity resistance exercise increases S6K1
phosphorylation and muscle protein synthesis. J Appl Physiol 103: 903–910, 2007. First published
June 14, 2007; doi:10.1152/japplphysiol.00195.2007
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------212
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
14.
Intramuscular metabolism during low-intensity resistance exercise with blood flow
restriction. J Appl Physiol 106: 1119–1124, 2009. First published February 12, 2009;
doi:10.1152/japplphysiol.90368.2008.
15.
Nielsen, JL, Aagaard, P, Bech, RD, Nygaard, T, Hyid, LG, Wernborn, M, Suetta, C, and Frandsen,
U. Proliferation of myogenic stem cells in human skeletal muscle in response to lowload resistance
training with blood flow restriction. J Physiol 590: 4351–4361, 2012.
16.
flow from the leg muscle, Kaatsu-walk training. J Appl Physiol 100: 1460–1466, 2006. First
published December 8, 2005 doi:10.1152/japplphysiol.01267.2005.
17.
Takarada Y, Takazawa H, Sato Y, Takenoshita S, Tanaka Y, and Ishii N. Effects of resistance
exercise combined with moderate vascular occlusion on muscular function in humans. J Appl
Physiol 88: 2097–2106, 2000.
18.
Takarada Y, Sato Y, and Ishii N. Effects of resistance exercise combined with vascular
occlusion on muscle function in athletes. Eur J Appl Physiol 86: 308–314, 2002.
19.
Abe T, Yasuda Midorikawa T T, Sato Y, Kearns CF, Inoue K, Koizumi K, and Ishii N. Skeletal
muscle size and circulating IGF-1 are increased after two weeks of twice daily Kaatsu resistance
training. Int J KAATSU Training Res 1: 6–12, 2005.
20.
Fry CS, Glynn EL, Drummond MJ, Timmerman KL, Fujita S, et al. (2010) Blood flow
restriction exercise stimulates mTORC1 signaling and muscle protein synthesis in older men. J Appl
Physiol 108: 1199–209.
21.
flow from the leg muscle, Kaatsu-walk training. J Appl Physiol 100: 1460–1466, 2006. First
published December 8, 2005; doi:10.1152/japplphysiol.01267.2005
22.
Todd A. Maugans, Chad Farley, Mekibib Altaye, James Leach and Kim M. Cecil Pediatric
Sports-Related Concussion Produces Cerebral Blood Flow Alterations DOI: 10.1542/peds.20112083; originally published online November 30, 2011; 2012;129;28
23.
Pope, ZK, Willardson, JM, and Schoenfeld, BJ. Exercise and blood flow restriction. J Strength C
ond Res 27(10): 2914–2926, 2013
24.
Yasuda T, Brechue WF, Fujita T, Sato Y, Abe T. Muscle activation during low-intensity muscle
contractions with restricted blood flow. J Sports Sci (2009); 27: 479–489.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------213
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
A study of domestication and foreignization strategies in
the Persian translation of "IL GROTTESCO QUOTIDIANO"
Tohid Siami
Laleh Mousavi
Academic staff member, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran
MA student of TPSOL,University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran
Abstract
The purpose of the present study was to investigate the use of Venuti’s domestication and
foreignization strategies in the translation of the book "il grottesco quotidiano" from Italian into
Persian. All cases of domestication and foreignization were identified and organized as single lexical
items, expressions and idiomatic expressions. The data then were analyzed according to the criteria
introduced by Venuti. In this study, Newmark's methods are also used for translating culture-specific
concepts. The results of the data analysis revealed domestication to be the dominant strategy in
rendering culture-bound lexical items or expressions.
Keywords: domestication, foreignization,
Venuti,Newmark, il grottesco quotidiano
culture-bound
lexical
items
or
expressions,
1.Introduction
The terms foreignization and domestication were introduced into translation studies (TS) by
Lawrence Venuti (1995). Generally speaking, domestication designates the type of translation in
which a transparent, fluent style is adopted to minimize the strangeness of the foreign text for target
language readers, while foreignization means a target text is produced which deliberately breaks
target conventions by retaining something of the foreignness of the original (Shuttleworth & Cowie
1997:59).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------214
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
The conflict between domestication and foreignization as opposite translation strategies can be
regarded as the cultural and political rather than linguistic extension of the time-worn controversy
over free translation and literal translation (Wang Dongfeng 2002：24). That is to say, only when
there are differences in both linguistic presentation and cultural connotation, domestication and
foreignization exist. The present paper seeks an objective way to test the plausibility and practical
applicability of the domestication/foreignization in the translation of culture specific lexical items
and idiomatic expression in the Persian Translation of "IL GROTTESCO QUOTIDIANO."
3. Theoretical Foundations
Domestication is a translation strategy of using “a transparent, fluent, ‘invisible’ style in order to
minimize the foreignness of the target text (TT)” (Munday 2008: 144). By contrast, foreignization is
not transparent and it eschews fluency for a more heterogeneous mix of discourses in order to
signify the difference of the foreign text (Venuti 1995).
The domestication vs. foreignization dichotomy is comparable to another age-old dichotomy, namely
that between free and literal translation. However, those two dichotomies are not synonymous. The
free vs. literal dichotomy refers to linguistic form, while the domestication vs. foreignization
dichotomy concerns the two cultures involved, i.e. whether an ST is adapted to the target culture, or
the foreign cultural elements are preserved.
In the German culture of the Classical and Romantic periods, Friedrich Schleiermacher proposed two
paths that ‘der eigentliche Uebersetzer’ can take: “Either the translator leaves the author in peace, as
much as possible, and moves the reader towards him; or he leaves the reader in peace, as much as
possible, and moves the author towards him.” (1813: 241–242). The first path is similar to Venuti's
foreignizing translation, whereas the second path is similar to Venuti's domesticating translation.
Schleiermacher sees foreignization and domestication as binary opposites, and he explicitly claims
they must not be mixed; the translator has to opt for one or the other method and then be consistent
in its use. Combining the two methods would lead to unreliable results; the author and the reader
could completely miss each other (Schleiermacher 1813: 47). By contrast, Venuti states that
domestication and foreignization are ‘heuristic concepts designed to promote thinking and research’
rather than binary opposites (Munday: 145–146).
Both Schleiermacher and Venuti advocate foreignizing translation, but for different reasons.
Schleiermacher advocates foreignizing method because it puts the language in motion (1813: 69).
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------215
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Schleiermacher is explicitly against the domesticating method because he thinks that the thought
and its expression cannot be separated. There is no way to make a foreign author speak the domestic
language as if it were his own.
The reason Venuti is opposed to domestication is not because it is impossible, but because it is
unfair. According to Venuti (1995: 20), domestication involves ‘an ethnocentric reduction of the
foreign text to target-language cultural values.’ Another negative consequence of domestication,
according to Venuti, is that it makes the translator invisible because the translation reads like an
original. Venuti therefore prefers foreignization as a form of resistance to the ‘violent, ethnocentric’
(Anglo-American) cultural values.
In the contemporary international translation field, it was Eugene Nida who first advocated
domestication (Yang 2010: 78). Nida differentiated between ‘formal’ and ‘dynamic’ (functional)
equivalence. While ‘formal equivalence’ strives to preserve form as well as content, ‘dynamic
equivalence’ aims at producing in translation an equivalent effect on the target readers that the
original text had on the original readers. Nida preferred ‘dynamic equivalence,’ mostly because he
was dealing with Bible translation, where the most important thing is to successfully carry the
message through, disregarding the form of the message.
Both domestication and foreignization implicate manipulation of the text. Whether one or the
other strategy will be applied depends on variables such as the purpose of the translation (Skopos),
the status of the receiving literary system (polysystem theory), i.e. the power relations between the
source and the target literary systems, and other variables of the historical, social and cultural
setting in which the translation takes place. In order to see why a certain strategy is used in a certain
context, we have to turn to the analysis of real translations in the following sections of the paper.
3. Methods of translation
Newmark (1988b) mentions the difference between translation methods and translation
procedures. He writes that, "while translation methods relate to whole texts, translation procedures
are used for sentences and the smaller units of language". He goes on to refer to the following
methods of translation:

Word-for-word translation: in which the SL word order is preserved and the words
translated singly by their most common meanings, out of context.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------216
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016

Literal translation: in which the SL grammatical constructions are converted to their nearest
TL equivalents, but the lexical words are again translated singly, out of context.

Faithful translation: it attempts to produce the precise contextual meaning of the original
within the constraints of the TL grammatical structures.

Semantic translation: which differs from 'faithful translation' only in as far as it must take
more account of the aesthetic value of the SL text.

Adaptation: which is the freest form of translation, and is used mainly for plays (comedies)
and poetry; the themes, characters, plots are usually preserved, the SL culture is converted to the TL
culture and the text is rewritten.

Free translation: it produces the TL text without the style, form, or content of the original.

Idiomatic translation: it reproduces the 'message' of the original but tends to distort nuances
of meaning by preferring colloquialisms and idioms where these do not exist in the original.

Communicative translation: it attempts to render the exact contextual meaning of the
original in such a way that both content and language are readily acceptable and comprehensible to
the readership (1988b: 45-47).
4. Methodology
Different scholars have analyzed the strategies and procedures involved in the translation of CSIs ,
suggesting various classifications of such strategies. For the purpose of this paper, we draw upon one
of the pioneers in this field, Newmark (1988). He suggests a number of procedures for translating
CSIs, namely transference, naturalization, cultural equivalence, functional equivalence, descriptive
equivalence, synonymy, through-translation, shift or transposition, modulation, recognized
translation, translation label, compensation, componential analysis, reduction and expansion,
paraphrase, couplet, and notes. The Cultural specific concepts were culled from the ST and TT and
were classified based on The following categories: Toponyms, Anthroponyms, Means of
transportation, Date, Food and Drink, Idioms, Measuring system, Scholastic reference.
5. Data Analysis
The collected data were analysed according to the following criteria.
Transference: According to Newmark, "Transference is the process of transferring a SL word to a TL
text as a translation procedure" 1. When the translators face the following cases, they should use the
1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------217
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
method of transference: name of all living or dead people, geographical names, name of the periodical
and newspapers, plays, films, etc.
Source
language
Floro
d'Avanza
San
martino
di
Costrozza
Target
language
‫فلورو داو نتسا‬
CSCs1
Method of
translation
Anthropon
Word –for
word
Toponym
Word –for
word
ym
‫سن مرتینو‬
‫دی کاسترتسا‬
Naturalization: "This procedure succeeds transference and adapts the SL word first to the
normal pronunciation, then to the normal morphology of the TL".
Source language
Target language
CSCs
Teresa
‫ترزا‬
Anthroponym
Method of
translation
Word –for word
La Carta
‫کارت پستال‬
Object
Word –for word
La Limonata calda
‫لیووناد گرم‬
Drink
Word –for word
Cultural Equivalent: This strategy is "an approximate translation where a SL cultural word
is translated by a TL cultural word" 1.
Cultural specific concepts 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------218
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Source
language
In bianco
Il vino
Target
language
‫برنج سفیذ‬
‫هشروبات‬
CSCs
Food
Drink
‫الکلی‬
Method of
translation
Communica
tive translation
Communica
tive translation
Functional equivalent: According to Newmark, functional equivalent "applied to cultural
words, requires the use of a culture-free word, sometimes with a new specific term" 2.
Source
language
Una buona
bottiglia
Target
language
‫بطری‬
‫یک‬
CSCs
Drink
‫نوشیذنی عالی‬
Method of
translation
Literal
translation
Descriptive equivalent: In this strategy the translator uses some descriptions to clarify the
meaning for his audience. Using this strategy enable us to have a correct perception of CSIs
by using other words and phrases.
Source
language
Il
luogo
rinomato
Target
language
‫هکاى هقذس‬
CSCs
Religious
celebration
Method of
translation
Literal
translation
Componential analysis: Componential analysis is defined as "comparing an SL word with a TL word
which has a similar meaning but is not an obvious one-to-one equivalent, by demonstrating first
1
2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------219
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
their common and then their differing sense components. Normally the SL word has more specific
meaning than the TL word"1
Source language
Pullman
Target language
‫اتوبوس‬
CSCs
Means
of
transportation
Communica
tive translation
Synonymy: According to Newmark, synonymy is defined as a "near TL equivalent to a SL
word"2.
Source language
L'uovo
Target language
‫تخن هرغ‬
CSCs
Food
Word-for
word
Modulation: In this strategy the translators try to create the message of the SL in the TL in
conformity with the current norms of the TL.3
Source language
Un aspetto sinistro
Target language
‫چهره شوم‬
CSCs
concept
Method
of
translation
Literal translation
Paraphrase: "This is an amplification or explanation of the meaning of a segment of the
text”4.
1
Newmark (1988, p.114)
2
3
4
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------220
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Source
language
Convogliare verso sè
quel fiume di miele
Target
language
‫ورق را به نفع‬
CSCs
Idiom
Method of
translation
Idiomatic translation
‫خود برگردانذ‬
Through-translation: It concerns mostly the literal translation of common collocations,
names of organizations and some popular phrases.
Source language
Target language
CSCs
Una scenata
‫جارو جنجال‬
Concept
Method
of
translation
Literal translation
L'ansante
‫نفس‬
Concept
Literal translation
‫نفس‬
‫زناى‬
References
English
1.Baker, Mona. 1998. Routledge Encyclopedia of Translation Studies. London and New York:
Routledge. pp.240-242.
2.Lefevere, André, ed. (1992). Translation/History/Culture: A Sourcebook. Edition 2003, Taylor &
Francis e-Library. London – New York: Routledge.
3.Munday, Jeremy (2008). Introducing Translation Studies: Theories and Applications. 2nd Edition.
London – New York: Routledge.
4.Newmark, Peter (1988). Approaches to Translation. New York – London: Prentice Hall
International.
5.Nida, Eugene. 2001. Language and Culture-Contexts in Translation. Shanghai: Shanghai Foreign
Language Education Press.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------221
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
6.Schleiermacher, Friedrich (1813). Ueber die verschiedenen Methoden des Uebersezens.
7.Reproduced in Das Problem des Übersetzens 1963, ed. Hans Joachim Störig. Stuttgart: Henry
Goverts Verlag, 38–69.
8.Shuttleworth, M. & M. Cowie. 1997. Dictionary of Translation Studies. Manchester, UK: St Jerome
Publishing.
9.Venuti, Lawrence (1995). The Translator’s Invisibility: A History of Translation. London - New York:
Routledge.
10.Venuti, Lawrence (1998a). The Scandals of Translation: Towards an Ethics of Difference. London New York: Routledge.
11.Venuti, Lawrence (1998b). Strategies of translation. Baker, Mona, ed. Routledge Encyclopedia of
Translation Studies. Edition 2003, Taylor & Francis e-Library. London – New York: Routledge, 240–
244.
‫فارسی‬
)‫ دیروز و امروز (دانشگبه فردوسی مشهد‬،‫ " نظریه ترجمه‬،‫ علی‬،‫ خساعی فر‬-12
‫ اجتمبعی به بررسی مسئله برابری در ترجمه ادبیبت داستبنی از انگلیسی به‬-‫ "رویکردی نشبنه شنبختی‬،1386 ،‫ توحید‬،‫ صیبمی‬-13
.‫رسبله دوره دکترای زببنشنبسی همگبنی‬،"‫فبرسی‬
،22 ‫ شمبره‬,6 ‫ دوره‬،‫ مطبلعبت ترجمه‬،"‫ "برخورد بب هم آیی هب در ترجمه هبی انگلیسی به فبرسی‬،1387 ‫ تببستبن‬،‫ گیتی‬،‫ کریم خبنلویی‬-14
9 -22 ‫از صفحه‬
55-63‫ صص‬،32 ‫ شمبره‬،‫ سبل نهم‬،‫ مترجم‬،"‫ "تعبدل در ترجمه‬،1379 ،‫ منصور‬،‫ کوشب‬-15
12-15 ‫ صص‬،74 ‫ شمبره‬،‫ سبل چهبردهم‬،)‫ علی (مترجم‬،‫ خساعی فر‬،"‫ "استراتژیهبی ترجمه‬،1374 ،‫ الرنس‬،‫ ونوتی‬-16
.‫ پبیبننبمه کبرشنبسی ارشد‬،"‫ در ایران‬80 ‫ "بومی سبزی و بیگبنه سبزی در ترجمه ادبیبت کودک در دهه‬1391 ،‫ سلمب زینب‬،‫ یسدی‬-17
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------222
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Physical pr1operties and mechanical behavior under
compressive loading of Green Walnut
Zahra Basati
Salman Habibi
Vali Rasooli-Sharabian
PhD. Student in Mechanical Biosystem Engineering, Department of Biosystem Engineering, Faculty of Agricultural Sciences and
Natural Resources, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili. Iran.
MSc student of Agricultural Machinery Engineering, Agricultural Machinery Engineering Dept., Faculty of Agricultural
Engineering and Technology, University of Tehran, Karaj,Iran
Assistant Prof. in Department of Biosystem Engineering, Faculty of Agricultural Sciences and Natural Resources, University of
Mohaghegh Ardabili. Iran
Abstract
In this paper some physical and mechanical properties of walnut were determined in order to design processing
equipment and facilities. Physical properties investigated include, size, sphericity index, fruit density, mass,
volume, geometric mean diameter and surface area. Mechanical properties studied were the coefficient of
friction, the rupture force and the rupture energy. The average green walnut‘s length, width, thickness,
sphericity, fruit density, mean mass, volume, geometric mean diameter and surface area were 48.15 mm, 42.92
mm, 39.73 mm, 90.32%, 0.91 g/cm3, 40.75 g, 45 cm3, 43.45 mm and 59.4 cm2 respectively at 66.15% moisture
content (w.b.); while the corresponding values of Walnut (without green shell) at 47.14% moisture content
(w.b.) were 34.61mm, 33.46 mm, 30.99 mm, 95.54%, 0.76 g/cm3, 13.73 g, 18.22 cm3, 32.94 mm and 34.21 cm2,
respectively. On three different surfaces, the static coefficient of friction varies from 0.48 to 0.69 for green
walnut and from 0.29 to 0.47 for walnut. The compression speeds were carried out at 50, 100, and 200
mm/min. The rupture strength of green walnut and walnut decreased with increasing of moisture content while
rupture strength increased with an increase of compression speeds. These data are useful in the design and
development of handling and processing machines, which are not available currently in literature
Keywords: Walnut, Physical and Mechanical Properties, Compression speeds, Rupture strength
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------223
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
1.Introduction
Iran with the production of 170,000 tones of walnut (Juglans regia L.) was ranking as fourth
producers in the world (FAO, 2008). Persian walnut, Juglans regia, is one of the most important
nutritive nut crops. Iran is considered as one of the walnut centers of diversity and cultivation in
middle-eastern part of the world. The main benefits of walnut kernels include lowering cholesterol,
increasing the ratio of high-density lipoprotein cholesterol to total cholesterol, reducing
inflammation, and improving arterial function (Patel, 2005). Walnuts contribute nutrients that are
essential to a healthful lifestyle. Eating walnuts is one of the easiest things a person can do to
improve his or her health. Best of all, their taste are great and are ideally suited for inclusion in any
diet as part of meals or snacks. The most important processing step after walnut harvesting is
separation of kernel from the shell. This process is still carried out manually in Iran, which results in
increased cost and processing time for kernel extraction (Borghei et al., 2000). Therefore, a walnut
cracker should be developed and designed on the basis of physical characteristics and mechanical
properties of walnuts. The physical and mechanical properties of walnut are important to design and
development of the equipment for processing, transportation, sorting, separation, storing and
cracking machine. Designing such equipment without consideration of these properties may yield
poor results. Therefore the determination and consideration of these properties have an important
role (Taheri-Garavand et al., 2009). Among these physical properties, length, width, thickness, mass,
volume and surface areas are the most important ones in sizing systems (Mohsenin, 1986). Koyuncu
et al. (2004) determined the effects of the compression position, geometric mean diameter and shell
thickness of the walnut on the force, specific deformation and energy required to achieve rupture nut
shell and optimum kernel extraction quality. They found that the cracking nuts at the length position
required less force and yielded the best kernel extraction quality. Many studies have been reported
on the physical properties of fruits, grains and seeds, such as Juniperus drupacea fruits (Akinci et al.,
2004) and bambara groundnuts ( Baryeh, 2001). The regression analysis used by Chuma et al.
(1982) to develop equations for predicting volume and surface area. They used logarithmic
transformation to develop equations for wheat kernels at 15.7% moisture content. They suggested
that the volume (V) was related to the surface area (S) by a linear regression relationship: V = 1.10S
+ 17.2. Frequently, the surface areas of fruit are determined on the basis of its diameter or weight.
Knowing the diameter or weight of a fruit, its surface area may be calculated using empirical
equations, or read from an appropriate plot (Sitkei, 1986; Frechette and Zahradnik, 1968). In
another study, Tabatabaeefar and Rajabipour (2005) recommended 11 models for predicting mass
of apples based on geometrical attributes. Several models for predicting mass of kiwi based on
physical attributes were determined and reported by Lorestani and Tabatabaeefar (2006). Also,
Khoshnam et al. (2007) used this method for predicting the mass of pomegranate fruits. They
suggested that there is a very good relationship between mass and measured volume for all varieties
of kiwi. Ebrahimi et al. (2009) studied morphological and physical characteristics of Iranian walnuts
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------224
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
and mass modeling of walnut. Moreover, they reported that among grading system based on
dimensions in walnut (first classification), minor diameter model with nonlinear relation was the
best and could be considered as a good model for economical and horticultural designing systems.
This information is used to design and develop the sizing systems. The objective of this study was to
investigate some physical properties of the walnut namely linear dimensions, unit mass and volume,
sphericity, fruit densities, surface area, rupture energy and coefficient of static friction against three
structural surfaces.
2.Method
From the samples, about 150 fruits were randomly obtained from a local market in the Karaj city (an
important city in date production located in the north of Iran). The fruits were transported to the
Physical Laboratory of Biosystems Faculty in the University of Tehran. All experiments were carried
out at a temperature range of 25–30 °C for three days. The moisture content of fruits was
determined in accordance with standard procedures (AOAC, 1984). In order to obtain the moisture
content, samples were kept in an oven (Iran Khodsaz) for 24 hours at 105 °C.The experiments were
conducted at moisture levels of 66.15 (walnut with shell) and 47.14% (walnut without shell) w.b.
The following methods were used in the determination of some physical and mechanical properties
of walnut. An electronic micrometer with an accuracy of 0.01 mm was used to measure the axial
dimensions of the fruits, such as; length (L), width (W) and thickness (T). From the axial dimensions,
Geometric mean diameter (Dg), arithmetic mean diameter, Da, sphericity (Sp) and surface areas (S)
were calculated by using the following equations:
b.
(1)
c.
(2)
d.
(3)
e.
(4)
where L is the length, W is the width and T is the thickness (Fig. 1.). As reported by Mohsenin (1986).
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------225
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Fig. 1: schematic drawing of the 3 axes for the walnut dimension
Sample mass was measured by using a digital balance with a sensitivity of 0.01 g. The fruit density
(g/cm3) was determined using the water displacement method and were calculated by using the
following equation (Mohsenin, 1986):
(5)
where ρf and ρw are fruit and water densities (kg/m3); Ma and Mw are mass of walnut in air and
water, respectively.
The coefficient of friction, μ, was calculated as:
(6)
where α is the angle of tilt in degree (Olajide et al., 2000). Five replications were made for the
measurement of the static coefficient of friction on various surfaces, galvanized iron, plywood and
glass, in 47.14% and 66.15% moisture levels.
In this study the effects of walnut dimension, moisture content and loading rate, 50 mm/min,
100mm/min and 200 mm/min were studied on cracking force, absorbed energy and toughness.
Walnut fruit were weighed prior to an analysis of shell cracking strength using a proprietary
tension/compression testing machine (Instron Universal Testing Machine /SMT-5, SANTAM
Company, Tehran, Iran).
Energy absorbed (Ea) by the sample at rupture was determined by calculating the area under the
force– deformation curve from the following equation (Braga et al., 1999; Gupta & Das, 2000;
Mohsenin, 1978).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------226
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
(7)
where Fr is the rupture force and Dr is the deformation at rupture point.
Toughness (P) is expressed as the energy absorbed by the walnut up to rupture point per unit
volume of the pit. This was calculated using the following formula (Gupta & Das, 2000; Olaniyan &
Oje, 2002).
(8)
where Ea is the energy absorbed by the fruit and V is the volume of the walnut.
Spreadsheet software, Microsoft EXCEL 2007and SPSS15 was used to analyze the data and
determine regression models between the parameters of either linear or polynomial form. In order
to estimate an apple‘s mass from measured dimensions (length, width, thickness and volume), the
following three categories of models were suggested.
1. Regression models of mass with all three dimensions (length, width, thickness).
2. Regression models of volume with all three dimensions (length, width, thickness).
3. Regression models of volume with walnut mass.
Physical properties:
The number of samples, mean, maximum and minimum values for the physical properties of
walnut are presented in Table 1. The physical properties of date fruit were described in
order to better design of a specific machine for post-harvesting operations.
Table 1: Physical properties of Iranian export walnut
Physical properties
Average
Max
Min
L (mm)
A
48.15
53.50
38.65
B
34.61
42.04
30.64
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------227
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
W (mm)
T (mm)
Dg (mm)
Da (mm)
M (g)
V (cm3)
ρ (g/m3)
f
S (cm2)
A
42.92
49.33
38.12
B
33.46
37.91
27.46
A
39.73
47.28
36.11
B
31.00
38.28
25.53
A
43.45
47.82
37.94
B
32.94
38.91
28.13
A
43.57
47.84
37.95
B
33.02
38.97
28.25
A
40.75
57.44
23.85
B
13.73
22.31
5.98
A
45.00
58.51
29.50
B
18.22
29.75
10.92
A
0.91
0.98
0.70
B
0.76
0.98
0.62
A
59.40
71.82
45.10
B
34.21
47.54
24.85
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------228
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
A is walnut with shell in 66.15% moisture content and B is walnut without shell in 47.14% moisture
content.
The average length (48.15 and 34.61 mm), width (42.92 and 33.46 mm), thickness (39.73 and 31
mm), and geometric mean diameter (43.45 and 32.94 mm) of the walnut with green shell and
without green shell were recorded in this experiment, respectively. Akca and Sen (1995) showed nut
length as 39.97 mm, nut diameter as 33.59 mm and nut thickness as 34.75 of the promising walnut
genotype. This notion is in agreement with our results. The mean values of sphericity for walnut
were 90.32% for walnut with shell and 95.54% for walnut without shell. The static coefficients of
friction for walnut fruit determined with respect to galvanized iron, plywood and glass surfaces are
shown in Table 2.
Table 2: Coefficients of static friction of walnuts at different moisture contents
Moisture
contents
galvanized
iron
plywood
glass
66.15 % (w.b.)
0.69
0.48
0.50
47.14 % (w.b.)
0.47
0.29
0.35
At two moisture contents, the static coefficients of friction were greatest for walnut fruits on
galvanized iron sheet.
Other researchers found that as the moisture content increased, the static coefficient of friction
increased also (Baryeh, 2002; Çalýþýr et al., 2005). The energy required to initiate nut rupture in
samples with varying walnut along the three different compression axes is presented in Fig. 2. The
rupture energy and toughness increase with an increase in compression speed for walnut with shell
and without shell.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------229
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
(a)
(c)
(b)
(d)
Fig 1: Effect of walnut dimension and loading rate on energy absorbed (a and b) and toughness (c
and d).
The energy of cracking values for walnut fruits tested in the X-axis (length) were higher than walnuts
tested in the Y and Z axes. The energy required for walnut rupture loaded along the Y-axis
(Thickness) decreased for both samples. The rupture energy observed when testing walnuts for both
samples was greater at the higher compression speeds at 200 mm/min than that of the other speeds
tested. Sharifian and Derafshi (2008) reported that the rupture energy to fracture walnut shell
increased as the compression speed raised up to 200 mm/min.
The overall mass and volume model based on three diameters and volume model based on mass, in
two types of fruits was given as follows:
A (walnut with green shell):
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------230
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
B (walnut without green shell):
11 models for predicting mass of apples based on geometrical attributes were recommended by
Tabatabaeefar and Rajabipour (2005). They recommended an equation calculating apple mass on
the basis of minor diameter as M= 0.08c2 – 4.74c + 5.14, R2 = 0.89. In another study, Lorestani and
Tabatabaeefar (2006) determined models for predicting mass of kiwi fruit based on physical
attributes. They recommended an equation to calculate kiwi fruit mass based on intermediate
diameter as M = 2.93b – 64.15, R2= 0.78.
4.Conclusion
1- The average mass and volume were found to be 13.73g and 18.22cm 3 in 47.14% moisture content
and 40.75g and 45 cm3 in 66.15% moisture content respectively.
2- The fruit density was measured as 0.76 and 0.91 g/cm3 in 47.14% and 66.15% moisture content
respectively.
3- Linear dimensions ranged from 38.65 to 53.5 mm and 30.64 to 42.04 mm in length, 38.12 to 49.33
mm and 27.46 to 37.91 mm in width, and 36.11 to 47.28 mm and 25.53 to 38.28 in thickness for
66.15% and 47.14% moisture content respectively.
4- The geometric mean diameter, sphericity and surface area were calculated as 32.94 and 43.45
mm,
95.54% and 90.32% and 34.21 and 59.40 mm2 in 47.14% and 66.15% moisture content
respectively.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------231
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
7- On three different surfaces, the static coefficient of friction varies from 0.48 to 0.69 for green
walnut and from 0.29 to 0.47 for walnut without shell.
References
Ak-ca Y. (2001). Ceviz Yeti-ctirici sgi [Cultivation of Walnut]. Arı Ofset Matbaası, Tokat, Turkey
Akca, Y. and S.M. Sen, 1995. Relationship between and yield-nut characteristic in Juglans regia.
Acta Hort., 442: 81-82.
3. Akinci, I., Ozdemir, F., Topuz, A., Kabas, O., & Canakci, M. (2004). Some physical and nutritional
properties of Juniperus drupacea fruits. Journal of Food Engineering, 65, 325–331.
4. AOAC. 1984. Official methods of analysis. 14th edition. Association of Official Analytical
Chemists, Washington D.C.
5. Baryeh E.A., 2002. Physical properties of millet. J. Food Eng., 51, 39-46.
6. Baryeh, E. A. (2001). Physical properties of bambara groundnuts. Journal of Food Engineering,
47(4), 321–326
7. Borghei. A. M , J. Khazaei and T. Tavakoli. Design, Construction and Testing of Walnut Cracker.
AgEng2000 Conference. Paper No: 00-PH-029.
8. Braga G C; Couto S M; Hara T; Neto C T P A (1999). Mechanical behaviour of macadamia nut
under compression loading. Journal of Agricultural Engineering Research, 72, 239–245
9. Çalýþýr S., Marakoðlu T., Öðüt H., and Özturk O., 2005. Physical properties of rapeseed (Brassica
napus oleifera L.). Journal of Food Engineering., 69, 61-66.
10. Chuma, Y., Uchida, S., Shemsanga, H.H., 1982. Simultaneous measurement of size, surface area,
and volume of grains and soybean. Trans. ASAE 25, 1752–1756.
11. Food
and
Agriculture
Organization
of
the
United
Nations
2008.http://www.fao.org/corp/statistics.
1.
2.
12. Frechette, R., Zahradnik, J., 1968. Thermal properties of Mc Intosh apple. Trans. ASAE 11, 21–24.
13. Gupta, R. K., & Das, S. K. (2000). Fracture resistance of sunflower seed and kernel to compressive
loading. Journal of Food Engineering, 46, 1–8.
14. Khoshnam, F., Tabatabaeefar A., GhasemiVarnamkhasti M and Borghei A.M., 2007. Mass
modeling of pomegranate (Punica granatum L) fruit with some physical characteristics. Sci.
Hortic., 114, pp 21–26.
15. Koyuncu, M.A., K. Ekinci and E. Savran, 2004. Cracking characteristics of walnut. Biosyst. Eng.,
87(3): 305-311.
16. Lorestani, A.N and Tabatabaeefar A., 2006. Modeling the mass of Kiwi fruit by geometrical
attributes. Int. Agrophysics, 20, pp 135–139.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------232
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
17. Mohsenin N.N., 1986. Physical Properties of Plant and Animal Materials. Gordon and Breach
Science Publishers, pp 20–89.
18. Mohsenin, N. N. (1978). Physical properties of plant and animal materials. New York: Gordon
and Breach Science Publishers.
19. Olajide, J. O., Ade-Omowaye, B. I. O., & Otunola, E. T. (2000). Some physical properties of shea
kernel. Journal of Agricultural Engineering Research, 76, 419–421.
20. Olaniyan, A. M., & Oje, K. (2002). Some aspects of the mechanical properties of shea nut.
Biosystems Engineering, 81, 413–420.
21. Patel, G., 2005. Essential fats in walnuts are good for the heart and diabetes. J. Am. Diet. Assoc.
105, 1096–1097.
22. Sharifian, F., & Derafshi, M. H. (2008). Mechanical behavior of walnut under cracking conditions.
Journal of Applied Sciences, 8, 886–890.
23. Sitkei, G., 1986. Mechanics of Agricultural Materials. Elsevier Publisher, p. 25.
24. Tabatabaeefar A and Rajabipour A. 2005. Modeling the mass of apples by geometrical attributes.
Sci. Hortic., 105, pp 373–382.
25. Taheri-Garavand A., Ahmadi H and Gharibzahedi S.M.T., Investigation of moisturedependent
physical and chemical properties of red lentil cultivated in Iran. International Agricultural
Engineering Conference (IAEC). Bangkok, Thailand.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------233
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Some Physical and Mechanical Properties of Hawthorn
Fruit
Zahra Basati
Salman Habibi
Vali Rasooli-Sharabian
PhD. Student in Mechanical Biosystem Engineering, ,Department of Biosystem Engineering, Faculty of Agricultural Sciences and
Natural Resources, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili. Iran.
MSc student of Agricultural Machinery Engineering, Agricultural Machinery Engineering,Dept., Faculty of Agricultural
Engineering and Technology, University of Tehran, Karaj,Iran
Assistant Prof. in Department of Biosystem Engineering, Faculty of Agricultural Sciences and Natural Resources, University of
Mohaghegh Ardabili. Iran
Abstract
The knowledge of physical properties of hawthorn (Crataegus spp.) fruit is necessary to design post
harvesting equipment such as cleaning, sorting, grading, kernel removing, storage, packing and
processing of fresh fruits. Also, the information supplied on the physical properties of the hawthorn
fruit can be used in human nutrition. This study was done to analyze the physical and mechanical
properties of the Iranian hawthorn fruit like (dimensions, geometric mean diameter, sphericity, fruit
density, volume, surface area, friction coefficient and Hardness) at the moisture content of 71.23
percent. Other results showed that linear dimensions varied from 18.22 to 29.10 mm in length, 17.92
to 27.79 mm in width, and 13.82 to 21.40 mm in thickness. Mean mass and fruit volume was
measured as 4.273g and 4657.8mm3, respectively. The geometric mean diameter, sphericity, fruit
density and surface area were measured as 20.40mm, 87.74%, 1.04 (g/cm 3) and 1316.42(mm2),
respectively. The friction coefficient over the surface of wood, glass and galvanize sheet were 0.39,
0.54 and 0.45, respectively. The highest rupture force, deformation and toughness in this moisture
content were obtained for hawthorn loaded along the X-axis. The mean values of cracking force and
energy were measured 15.17 N and 579.35 MJ, respectively. Increasing in size of hawthom was
found to increase on cracking force and energy.
Keywords: Hawthorn, Physical and Mechanical Properties, Friction Coefficient
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------234
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
1.Introduction
Hawthorn species often have trees or shrub that has leaves that are cut and significant lobe.
Hawthorn fruit like apples is very small. Some Crataegus constituents are predicted to be good
antioxidants. The flower and fruit constituents responsible for free radical scavenging activity are
epicatechin,hyperoside and chlorogenic acid. They are also among the best antilipoperoxidants
(Bahorun & Greiser, 1996; Bahorun & Trotin, 1994; Rakotoarison & Greissier, 1997). However, only
a few are used for medicinal purposes. Traditionally, the fruits or the berries are used for their
astringent properties in heavy menstrual bleeding and in diarrhoea. Both the flowers and berries act
as diuretic and can be used to treat kidney problems and dropsy.Apart from their delicious flavour,
hawthorn fruits have been shown to have a tonic effect on the heart. Fruits of our native species are
often used in the treatment of weak heart conditions, especially if this is accompanied by high blood
pressure (Baytop, 1984; Grieve, 1982; Schussler & Holzl, 1995; Wichtl, 1996). Studies have
confirmed the potential of hawthorn fruits as a good source of antioxidants constituents (Bahorun &
Greiser,1996; Bahorun & Trotin, 1994; Kery & Verzarne, 1977; Rakotoarison & Greissier, 1997).
Borghei et. al, 2000, studied the effect of direction of applied loading and walnut dimension on the
cracking force and deformation of walnut using an Instron test machine. All the tests were carried
out on dried walnuts in which the moisture content of the shell was 6%, w.b. The ranges of variation
for cracking force and relative deformation1 were 110-800 N and 0.01-0.045 respectively. With
increase in walnut dimension, the cracking force and deformation were increased. Several models
for predicting mass of kiwi based on physical attributes were determined and reported by Lorestani
and Tabatabaeefar (2006). The objective of this study was to investigate some physical properties of
the Iranian hawthorn fruit namely linear dimensions, unit mass and volume, sphericity, fruit
densities, surface area, rupture energy and coefficient of static friction against three structural
surfaces.
2.Method
The ripe fruits were used for all the experiments in this study. After buying the Iranian hawthorn
fruits from the market in Tehran city they were brought to the laboratory at Tehran University and
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------235
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
the test started between healthy fruits. Then, were isolated 100 randomly samples. Before the
experiment, The fruits were cleaned to remove all foreign matters such as dust, branches, leaves,
immature and damaged fruits. To obtain the moisture level of products, three samples of healthy
fruit were put into three containers and after measuring the mass of the fruit and container
separately, we put them within 48 hours and temperature of 78 º C in the Oven. Weight loss on
drying to a final constant weight was recorded as moisture content by (AOAC 1984) recommended
method and using the following equation (1):
(1)
(2)
where MC is moisture content (w.b.), Mo is initial mass and Md is the final mass of date fruit (g). The
100 unit mass was determined using precision electronic balance to an accuracy of 0.01 g. for
measurement of length (L), width (W) and thickness (T) using a micrometer screw gauge with a
reading of 0.01 mm. Fruit volumes were measured by water displacement method. Fruits were
weighed in air and allowed to float in water. Fruits were lowered with a needle into a graduated
beaker containing water and the mass of water displaced by the individual fruit was recorded.
Finally, fruit densities (g/cm3) were determined from mass and volume of 100 grains by using the
following equation (2) (Mohsenin, 1986):
(2)
where ρf and ρw are fruit and water densities (g/m3); Ma and Mw are mass of hawthorn in air and
water, respectively.
The geometric average diameter of hawthorn was calculated according Galedar et al. (2008) and
Mohsenin (1986).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------236
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
(3)
The sphericity Sp (%) was calculated with use the relationship described by Koocheki et al. (2007)
and Milani (2007).
(4)
The surface area (S) of hawthorn fruit was found by analogy with a sphere of the same geometric
mean diameter using the expression cited by Sacilik et al. (2003).
(5)
The coefficients of static friction were obtained with respect to three different surfaces namely
galvanized steel, plywood and glass surfaces by using an inclined plane apparatus as described by
Dutta et al. (1988). The inclined plane was gently raised and the angle of inclination at which the
sample started sliding was read off the protractor with sensitivity of one degree. The tangent of the
angle was reported as the coefficient of friction (Dutta et al., 1988):
(6)
where, μ is the coefficient of friction and φ is the tilt angle of the friction device. All the friction
experiments were conducted in three replications for each surface.
Determination of fruits hardness
Hardness values of hawthorn were measured by applying forces using a Test Instrument of
Biological Materials and the procedure described by Aydın and O¨ gˇu¨ t (1991) (Fig. 1). The device
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------237
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
has three main components, which are a stationary and moving platform, a drive unit (AC electric
motor and electronic variator) and a data acquisition (Dynamometer, amplifier and XY recorder)
system. Hardness force was measured by the data acquisition system. The fruit was placed on the
moving lower platform and was pressed against the stationary platform. The probe used in the
experiment had a 5mm diameter and was connected to the dynamometer. Each experiment was
conducted at a loading velocity at 1mm/min.
In this study the effects of cracking force, absorbed energy were studied on fruit. All the tests were
conducted using an Instron test machine. Fiftye replications were used for each treatment. From the
compression speed and time, the hawthorn deformation was computed and force deformation curve
was plotted. Rupture force and deformation were measured directly from the plotted force–
deformation curve. Energy absorbed (Ea) by the sample at rupture was determined by calculating
the area under the force– deformation curve from the following equation (Braga et al., 1999; Gupta &
Das, 2000; Mohsenin, 1978).
(7)
Where Fr is the rupture force and Dr is the deformation at rupture point.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------238
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
Some physical and mechanical properties of the hawthorn in this research were studied, such as
length (L), width (W) , thickness (T),mass, Geometric mean diameter, Sphericity, surface area, Fruit
density, Volume and Hardness were measured as 23.01± 2.72 (mm), 21.90 ± 2.47(mm), 16.87±1.90
(mm), 4.27±1.20 (g),20.40± 2.27 (mm), 87.74± 2.91, 1316.42 ± 302.53 (mm2), 1.04± 0.19
(g/m3),4657.8± 1425 (mm3) and 1.6 ± 0.23 (N) respectively. The importance of dimensions is in
determining the aperture size of machines, particularly in separation of materials as discussed by
Mohsenin (1986). These dimensions can be used in designing machine components and parameters.
For example, it may be useful in estimating the number of fruits to be engaged at a time. The major
axis has been found to be useful by indicating the natural rest position of the fruit. The following
general expression can be used to describe the relationship between the average dimensions of fruits
at 71.23% (w.b.) moisture content. Physical properties such as weight, length and diameter of fruit,
mass, volume of fruit, geometric mean diameter, sphericity, fruit density, projected area, terminal
velocity, hardness and static coefficient of friction were established at the 71.23% moisture content
level. The moisture content is very important when determining the physical properties such as bulk
density, fruit density, porosity, pulp mass, static and dynamic coefficient of friction of hawthorn fruit
(Ajisegiri, 1987; Baryeh, 2001; Demir, Dog˘an, O¨ zcan, & Hacıseferog˘ulları, 2002; Demir & O¨ zcan,
2001; Hacıseferog˘ulları, Gezer, Bahtiyarca, & Menges_, 2003). Similar investigations were conducted
to determine the projected area, volume, bulk density, fruit density and terminal velocity by Demir
and O¨ zcan (2001) for rose fruits. Eighty-eight percent of fruit were between 3 and 6 g at a moisture
content of 71.23% in weight, 93% were between 17 and 23mm in Geometric mean diameter, 90%
were between 19 and 25mm in length. The dimensions obtained from the equation are close to
actual value. Grading fruit based on weight reduces packing and handling costs and also provides
suitable packing patterns (Khoshnam et al., 2007). Also mean coefficient of static friction, on
galvanized steel, plywood and glass surfaces, were obtained as 0.45, 0.39and 0.54, respectively.
Result of analysis showed that the surface materials had a significant difference on the static
coefficient of friction. The static coefficient of friction on galvanized steel was higher than that on
plywood and lower than that of glass surface. This is due to the frictional properties between the
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------239
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
fruits and surface materials. These properties may be useful in the separation process and the
transportation of the fruits.
The average cracking force required to break the hawthorn N, respectively. The highest rupture
force and energy in this moisture content were obtained for hawthorn loaded along the X-axis. The
mean values of cracking force and energy were measured 15.17 N and 579.35 MJ, respectively.
Increasing in size of hawthom was found to increase on cracking force and energy. Sharifian and
Derafshi (2008) reported that the rupture energy to fracture walnut shell increased as the
compression speed raised up to 200 mm/min.
4.Conclusion:
1- The average mass and volume for Hawthorn were found to be 4.273g and 4657.8mm 3,
respectively.
2- The fruit density was measured as 1.04± 0.19(g/m3)
3- Linear dimensions ranged from 18.22 to 29.10 mm in length, 17.92 to 27.79 mm in width, and
13.82 to 21.40 mm in thickness.
4- The geometric mean diameter, sphericity and surface area were calculated as 20.40mm, 87.74%
and 1316.42(mm2), respectively.
5- The mean coefficients of static friction, on galvanized steel, plywood and glass surfaces, were
obtained as 0.45, 0.39 and 0.54, respectively.
References
1.Ajisegiri, E. S. (1987). Sorption phenomena and storage stability of some tropical agricultural
grains. Unpublished PhD thesis, Faculty of Technology, University of Ibadan, Nigeria.
2.AOAC. 1984. Official methods of analysis. 14th edition. Association of Official Analytical Chemists,
Washington D.C.
3.Aydın, C., & O¨ g˘u¨ t, H. (1991). Determination of some biological properties of Amasya apple and
hazelnuts. Selcuk University The Journal of Agricultural Faculty, 1(1), 45–54, in Turkish.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------240
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
4.Bahorun, T., & Greiser, B. (1996). Oxygen species scavenging activity of phenolic extracts from
hawthorn fresh plant organs and pharmaceutical preparations. Arzneimittel-Forschung/Drug
Research, 46, 1086–1089.
5.Bahorun, T., & Trotin, F. (1994). Antioxidant activities of Crataegus monogyna extracts. Planta
Medica, 60, 323–326.
6.Baryeh, E. A. (2001). Physical properties of bambara groundnuts. Journal of Food Engineering, 47,
321–326.
7.Baytop, T. (1984). Treatment with plants in Turkey. _Istanbul University Publication No. 3255,
_Istanbul (in Turkish).
8.Borghei. A. M , J. Khazaei and T. Tavakoli. Design, Construction and Testing of Walnut Cracker.
AgEng2000 Conference. Paper No: 00-PH-029.
9.Braga, G. C., Couto, S. M., Hara, T., & Neto, J. T. P. A. (1999). Mechanical behaviour of macadamia nut
under compression loading. Journal of Agricultural Engineering Research, 72, 239–245.
10.Demir, F., & O¨ zcan, M. (2001). Chemical and technological properties of rose (Rosa canina L) fruits
grown wild in Turkey. Journal of Food Engineering, 47, 333–336.
11.Demir, F., Dog˘an, H., O¨ zcan, M., & Hacıseferog˘ulları, H. (2002). Nutritional and physical
properties of hackberry (Celtis australis L.). Journal of Food Engineering, 54, 241–247.
12.Dutta, S.K., V.K. Nema and R.K. Bhardwaj. 1988. Physical properties of grain. Journal of Agricultural
Engineering Research 39: 259-268.
13.Galedar M.N., Jafari A., and Tabatabaeefar A., 2008. Some physical properties of wild pistachio nut
and kernel as a function of moisture content. J. Physics Environ. Agric. Sci., 22, 117-124
14.Grieve, M. A. (1982). Modern herbal. Dover Publications Inc. Hacıseferog˘ulları, H., Gezer, _I.,
Bahtiyarca, Y., & Menges_, H. O. (2003). Determination of some chemical and physical properties of
Sakız faba bean (Vicia faba L. var. Major). Journal of Food Engineering, 60, 475–479.
15.Gupta, R. K., & Das, S. K. (2000). Fracture resistance of sunflower seed and kernel to compressive
loading. Journal of Food Engineering, 46, 1–8.
16.Hacıseferog˘ulları, H., Gezer, _I., Bahtiyarca, Y., & Menges_, H. O. (2003). Determination of some
chemical and physical properties of Sakız faba bean (Vicia faba L. var. Major). Journal of Food
Engineering, 60, 475–479.
17.Kery, A., & Verzarne, P. G. (1977). Comparative study of flavonoids from Crataegus oxyacanha and
Crataegus monogyna. Acta Pharm. Hung., 47, 11–23.
18.Khoshnam, F., A. Tabatabaeefar, M. Ghasemi Varnamkhasti and A. Borghei. 2007. Mass modeling of
pomegranate (Punica granatum L.) fruit with some physical characteristics. Scientia Horticulturae
114: 1, 21-26.
19.Koocheki A., Razavi S.M.A., Milani E., Moghadan T.M., Abedini M., Alamatiyan S., and Izadikhah S.,
2007.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------241
Students Symposium
June 5-6, 2016
20.Lorestani, A.N and Tabatabaeefar A., 2006. Modeling the mass of Kiwi fruit by geometrical
attributes. Int. Agrophysics, 20, pp 135–139.
21.Milani E., Razavi S.M.A., Koocheki A., Nikzadeh V., Vahedi N., MoeinFord M., and GholamhosseinPour
A., 2007. Moisture dependent physical properties of cucurbit seeds. Int. Agrophysics, 21, 157-168.
22.Mohsenin, N. N. (1978). Physical properties of plant and animal materials. New York: Gordon and
Breach Science Publishers.
23.Mohsenin, N.N. 1986. Physical properties of Plant and Animal Materials. 2nd edition (revised). 2nd
Ed.; Gordon & Breach Science Publishers, New York.
24.Physical properties of watermelon seed as a function of moisture content and variety. Int.
Agrophysics, 21, 349-359.
25.Rakotoarison, D. A., & Greissier, B. (1997). Antioxidant activities of phenolic extracts from flowers,
in vitro callus and cell suspension cultures of Crataegus monogyna. Pharmazie, 52, 60–64.
26.Sacilik K., Ozturkurk R., and Keskin R., 2003. Some physical properties of hempseed. Biosys. Eng.,
86(2), 191 198.
27.Schussler, M., & Holzl, J. (1995). Myocardial effects of flavonoids from Crataegus species.
Arzneimittel-Forschung, 45, 842–845.
28.Sharifian, F., & Derafshi, M. H. (2008). Mechanical behavior of walnut under cracking conditions.
Journal of Applied Sciences, 8, 886–890.
29.Wichtl, M. (1996). Herbal drugs and phytopharmaceuticals. In N. Bisset (Ed.), A handbook for
practice on a scientific basis (pp. 161–166). CRC: Medpharm Scientific Publishers.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------242
‫‪ 71-71‬خردادماه‬
‫‪The 3rd International CUA Graduate‬‬
‫‪Students Symposium‬‬
‫‪University of Mohaghegh Ardabili‬‬
‫‪June 5-6, 2016‬‬
‫‪-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------‬‬‫‪243‬‬

The Book of Extended Abstracts

Transcription

Similar documents

I`m helping to end MS by participating in the 2016 Jayman BUILT MS

The Board of Directors of Qatar Fuel (WOQOD) is pleased to invite

5 `S` Training Program at ABV-IIITM, Gwalior on 21.07.2016

Porky Expo Flyer

The NeuLion Report

Sept 30-Oct 2, 2016 Nov 4-6, 2016 @Camp Tadmor

4 star ALOE HOTEL, PAPHOS

the Guidelines for the registration on

Ticket plus hotel packages for the Chelsea Flower Show 2016

loyola institute for ministry on-campus open house thursday, may 12